AUDIO/VIDEO MULTI-CHANNEL RECEIVER

VSX-1121-K

Register your product on

http://www.pioneerelectronics.com (US)
http://www.pioneerelectronics.ca (Canada)
· Protect your new investment
The details of your purchase will be on file for reference in the event of an
insurance claim such as loss or theft.
· Receive free tips, updates and service bulletins on
your new product
· Improve product development
Your input helps us continue to design products that meet your needs.
· Receive a free Pioneer newsletter
Registered customers can opt in to receive a monthly newsletter.

Operating Instructions
 IMPORTANT
CAUTION 1) Read these instructions. 11) Only use attachments/accessories specified by
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK 2) Keep these instructions. the manufacturer.
DO NOT OPEN 12) Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or
3) Heed all warnings.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, CAUTION: The exclamation point within an equilateral 4) Follow all instructions. table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with
within an equilateral triangle, is intended to TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC triangle is intended to alert the user to the 5) Do not use this apparatus near water. the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution
alert the user to the presence of uninsulated SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR presence of important operating and 6) Clean only with dry cloth. when moving the cart/apparatus combination to
“dangerous voltage” within the product’s BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS maintenance (servicing) instructions in the avoid injury from tip-over.
enclosure that may be of sufficient INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED literature accompanying the appliance.
7) Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric SERVICE PERSONNEL. accordance with the manufacturer’s
shock to persons. instructions.
D3-4-2-1-1_A1_En 8) Do not install near any heat sources such as
radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other
apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce
WARNING WARNING heat.
This equipment is not waterproof. To prevent a fire or To prevent a fire hazard, do not place any naked flame 9) Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized
shock hazard, do not place any container filled with sources (such as a lighted candle) on the equipment. or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two 13) Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms
liquid near this equipment (such as a vase or flower D3-4-2-1-7a_A1_En
blades with one wider than the other. A or when unused for long periods of time.
pot) or expose it to dripping, splashing, rain or grounding type plug has two blades and a third 14) Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
moisture. grounding prong. The wide blade or the third Servicing is required when the apparatus has
D3-4-2-1-3_A1_En Operating Environment
prong are provided for your safety. If the provided been damaged in any way, such as power-supply
Operating environment temperature and humidity:
plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled
+5 °C to +35 °C (+41 °F to +95 °F); less than 85 %RH
WARNING electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the
(cooling vents not blocked)
Before plugging in for the first time, read the following 10) Protect the power cord from being walked on or apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture,
Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in
section carefully. pinched particularly at plugs, convenience does not operate normally, or has been dropped.
locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or
The voltage of the available power supply differs receptacles, and the point where they exit from
strong artificial light)
according to country or region. Be sure that the D3-4-2-1-7c*_A1_En the apparatus. D3-7-13-69_En
power supply voltage of the area where this unit
will be used meets the required voltage (e.g., 230 V
or 120 V) written on the rear panel. If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC
D3-4-2-1-4*_A1_En outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed NOTE:
and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15
VENTILATION CAUTION mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
When installing this unit, make sure to leave space this unit should be performed only by qualified residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed
around the unit for ventilation to improve heat radiation service personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However,
(at least 40 cm at top, 10 cm at rear, and 20 cm at each cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause
side). sure it is properly disposed of after removal. harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on,
The equipment should be disconnected by removing the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
WARNING the mains plug from the wall socket when left unused — Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for for a long period of time (for example, when on — Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the product, vacation). — Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
and to protect it from overheating. To prevent fire D3-4-2-2-1a_A1_En — Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
D8-10-1-2_A1_En
hazard, the openings should never be blocked or
covered with items (such as newspapers, table-cloths,
curtains) or by operating the equipment on thick carpet CAUTION
or a bed. The STANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not Caution WARNING: Handling the cord on this product or
D3-4-2-1-7b*_A1_En completely shut off all power from the AC outlet. To prevent fire hazard, the Class 2 Wiring Cable cords associated with accessories sold with the
Since the power cord serves as the main disconnect should be used for connection with speaker, and product may expose you to chemicals listed on
device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from the should be routed away from hazards to avoid damage proposition 65 known to the State of California and
AC outlet to shut down all power. Therefore, make to the insulation of the cable. other governmental entities to cause cancer and
sure the unit has been installed so that the power D3-7-13-67*_A1_En birth defect or other reproductive harm.
cord can be easily unplugged from the AC outlet in
case of an accident. To avoid fire hazard, the power D36-P5_B1_En

cord should also be unplugged from the AC outlet Information to User

when left unused for a long period of time (for Alterations or modifications carried out without
example, when on vacation). appropriate authorization may invalidate the user’s
D3-4-2-2-2a*_A1_En right to operate the equipment.
D8-10-2_A1_En

2 En
IMPORTANT NOTICE The Safety of Your Ears is in Your Hands
THE MODEL NUMBER AND SERIAL NUMBER OF Get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a
THIS EQUIPMENT ARE ON THE REAR OR BOTTOM. safe level – a level that lets the sound come through
RECORD THESE NUMBERS ON YOUR ENCLOSED clearly without annoying blaring or distortion and, most
WARRANTY CARD AND KEEP IN A SAFE PLACE importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing.
FOR FUTURE REFERENCE. Sound can be deceiving. Over time, your hearing
D36-AP9-1_A1_En “comfort level” adapts to higher volumes of sound, so
what sounds “normal” can actually be loud and
harmful to your hearing. Guard against this by setting
CAUTION your equipment at a safe level BEFORE your hearing
This product satisfies FCC regulations when shielded adapts.
cables and connectors are used to connect the unit
to other equipment. To prevent electromagnetic
ESTABLISH A SAFE LEVEL:
• Set your volume control at a low setting.
interference with electric appliances such as radios
• Slowly increase the sound until you can hear it
and televisions, use shielded cables and connectors
comfortably and clearly, without distortion.
for connections.
D8-10-3a_A1_En • Once you have established a comfortable sound
level, set the dial and leave it there.

This product is for general household purposes. Any

BE SURE TO OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING
failure due to use for other than household purposes GUIDELINES:
(such as long-term use for business purposes in a • Do not turn up the volume so high that you can’t
restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which requires hear what’s around you.
repair will be charged for even during the warranty • Use caution or temporarily discontinue use in
period. potentially hazardous situations.
K041_A1_En • Do not use headphones while operating a motorized
vehicle; the use of headphones may create a traffic
hazard and is illegal in many areas.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with S001a_A1_En

Canadian ICES-003.
D8-10-1-3_A1_En

CAUTION:
HOT SURFACE. DO NOT TOUCH.
The top surface over the internal
heatsink may become hot when
operating this product continuously.

En 3
 Thank you for buying this Pioneer Connecting additional amplifiers................. 20 07 Playback with HOME MEDIA Direct function............................................... 56
Connecting AM/FM antennas...................... 21 GALLERY inputs Setting the backlight mode.......................... 56
product. Please read through these MULTI-ZONE setup........................................ 21 Multi Operation and System Off................... 56
Enjoying the Home Media Gallery................ 39
operating instructions so you will Connecting a SiriusConnect Tuner.............. 22 Resetting the remote control settings......... 57
Features of Home Media Gallery.................. 39
know how to operate your model Connecting to the network through Introduction.................................................... 39 Controlling components............................... 58
properly. After you have finished read- LAN interface................................................. 22 Playback with Home Media Gallery............. 40
Connecting optional Bluetooth 11 The Advanced MCACC menu
ing the instructions, put them away Advanced operations for Internet radio....... 41
ADAPTER....................................................... 22 Checking about the Accounts...................... 41 Making receiver settings from the
in a safe place for future reference. Connecting an iPod....................................... 22 Advanced MCACC menu.............................. 60
About network playback............................... 42
Connecting a USB device............................. 23 About playable file formats........................... 43 Automatic MCACC (Expert).......................... 60
Contents Connecting an HDMI-equipped
component to the front panel input............. 23
Manual MCACC setup.................................. 62
Checking MCACC Data................................. 64
08 Control with HDMI function
Connecting to a wireless LAN...................... 23 Data Management........................................ 65
01 Before you start About the Control with HDMI function........ 45
Connecting an IR receiver............................ 23
Our philosophy................................................. 6 Making Control with HDMI
Operating other Pioneer components
Features............................................................ 6 connections................................................... 45 12 The System Setup and Other
with this unit’s sensor................................... 24
Checking what’s in the box............................. 6 Plugging in the receiver................................ 24
HDMI Setup................................................... 45 Setup menus
Installing the receiver...................................... 6 Before using synchronization....................... 46 Making receiver settings from the
Loading the batteries....................................... 6 About synchronized operations................... 46 System Setup menu...................................... 66
04 Basic Setup Setting the PQLS function............................ 46 Manual speaker setup................................... 66
Operating range of remote control unit........ 7
Switching the speaker impedance.............. 25 Cautions on the Control with HDMI Network Setup menu.................................... 68
About using AVNavigator
Changing the OSD display language function.......................................................... 47 Checking the Network Information.............. 70
(included CD-ROM)......................................... 7
(OSD Language)............................................ 25 The Other Setup menu.................................. 70
Automatically conducting optimum
02 Controls and displays 09 Using other functions
sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC)................ 25
Remote control................................................ 8 The Input Setup menu................................... 27
Setting the Audio options............................. 48 13 Additional information
Display.............................................................. 9 Setting the Video options.............................. 50 Troubleshooting 1.......................................... 73
Operation Mode Setup.................................. 27
Front panel..................................................... 10 Switching the speaker terminals................. 51 Troubleshooting 2.......................................... 79
Using the MULTI-ZONE controls.................. 51 Troubleshooting of wireless LAN................. 82
05 Basic playback Making an audio or a video recording......... 52 About status messages................................ 83
03 Connecting your equipment Playing a source............................................ 29 Reducing the level of an analog signal........ 52 Speaker Setting Guide.................................. 83
Connecting your equipment......................... 11 Playing an iPod.............................................. 29 Using the sleep timer.................................... 52 Important information regarding the
Rear panel...................................................... 11 Playing a USB device.................................... 30 Dimming the display..................................... 52 HDMI connection.......................................... 84
Determining the speakers’ application....... 12 Listening to the radio..................................... 32 Checking your system settings.................... 52 Cleaning the unit........................................... 84
Placing the speakers..................................... 13 Listening to Satellite Radio........................... 32 Resetting the system..................................... 53 Surround sound formats.............................. 85
Connecting the speakers.............................. 13 Bluetooth ADAPTER for Wireless
Installing your speaker system..................... 14 About THX...................................................... 85
Enjoyment of Music....................................... 34
Selecting the Speaker system...................... 15 10 Controlling the rest of your system About iPod...................................................... 86
About the audio connection......................... 16 About the Remote Setup menu................... 54 About SIRIUS................................................. 86
06 Listening to your system Operating multiple receivers........................ 54 About FLAC.................................................... 86
About the video converter............................. 16
Enjoying various types of playback Setting the remote to control other Auto Surround, ALC and Stream Direct
About HDMI................................................... 16
using the listening modes............................ 36 components................................................... 54 with different input signal formats............... 87
Connecting your TV and playback
Selecting MCACC presets............................ 38 Selecting preset codes directly.................... 55 Glossary.......................................................... 88
components................................................... 17
Choosing the input signal............................. 38 Programming signals from other Features index................................................ 90
Connecting an HDD/DVD recorder, BD
Better sound using Phase Control............... 38 remote controls.............................................. 55 Specifications................................................ 92
recorder and other video sources................ 19
Connecting a satellite/cable receiver or Erasing one of the remote control Preset code list.............................................. 93
other set-top box............................................ 19 button settings............................................... 55
Connecting other audio components.......... 20 Erasing all learnt settings that are in
one input function......................................... 55
4 En
Flow of settings on the receiver 7 Changing the OSD display language (OSD Language) (page 25)
j
8 MCACC speaker settings
! Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 25
Flow for connecting and setting the receiver j
The unit is a full-fledged AV receiver equipped with an abundance of functions and terminals. It can
9 The Input Setup menu (page 27)
be used easily after following the procedure below to make the connections and settings.
(When using connections other than the recommended connections)
Required setting item: 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10
j
Setting to be made as necessary: 5, 7, 9, 11, 12, 13
10 Basic playback (page 29)
j
Important
The receiver’s initial settings can be made on the computer using Wiring Navi on the AVNavigator 11 Adjusting the sound and picture quality as desired
CD-ROM included with the receiver. In this case, virtually the same connections and settings as ! Using the various listening modes (page 36)
in steps 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8 and 9 can be made interactively. For instructions on using AVNavigator, see ! Better sound using Phase Control (page 38)
About using AVNavigator (included CD-ROM) on page 7 . ! Measuring the all EQ type (SYMMETRY/ALL CH ADJ/FRONT ALIGN) (page 60)
! Changing the channel level while listening (page 67)
1 Before you start ! Switching on/off the Acoustic Calibration EQ, Auto Sound Retriever or Dialog Enhancement (page
! Checking what’s in the box on page 6 48)
! Loading the batteries on page 6 ! Setting the PQLS function (page 46)
j ! Setting the Audio options (page 48)
2 Determining the speakers’ application (page 12) ! Setting the Video options (page 50)
! 7.2 channel surround system (Front height) j
! 7.2 channel surround system (Front wide) 12 Other optional adjustments and settings
! 7.2 channel surround system & Speaker B connection ! Control with HDMI function (page 45)
! 5.2 channel surround system & Front Bi-amping connection (High quality surround) ! The Advanced MCACC menu (page 60)
! 5.2 channel surround system & ZONE 2 connection (Multi Zone) ! The System Setup and Other Setup menus (page 66)
j j
3 Connecting the speakers 13 Making maximum use of the remote control
! Placing the speakers on page 13 ! Operating multiple receivers (page 54)
! Connecting the speakers on page 13 ! Setting the remote to control other components (page 54)
! Installing your speaker system on page 14
! Bi-amping your speakers on page 15
j
4 Connecting the components
! About the audio connection on page 16
! About the video converter on page 16
! Connecting your TV and playback components on page 17
! Connecting AM/FM antennas on page 21
! Plugging in the receiver on page 24
j
5 Switching the speaker impedance (page 25)
(Only if the impedance of the connected speakers is 6 W to 8 W)
j
6 Power On
j

En 5
01 Before you start

— in extremely hot or cold areas

Before you start % Bluetooth compatible
Using the Bluetooth ADAPTER (AS-BT100 or — in places where there is vibration or other
AS-BT200) lets you enjoy music files on an movement
iPhone or other Bluetooth wireless technology — in places that are very dusty
% AVNavigator device wirelessly. — in places that have hot fumes or oils (such as
Our philosophy The CD-ROM (AVNavigator) included with this
% Auto Sound Retriever a kitchen)
Pioneer is dedicated to making your home unit provides a variety of functions, such as
The Auto Sound Retriever feature employs ! Do not touch this receiver’s bottom panel
theater listening experience as close as pos- Wiring Navi with a guide for connecting the
DSP technology to restore sound pressure while the power is on or just after it is turned
sible to the vision of the moviemakers and mas- unit and setting up from the computer and an
and smooth jagged artifacts left over after off. The bottom panel becomes hot when the
tering engineer when they created the original Interactive Manual for operating the unit while
compression. power is on (or right after it is turned off) and
soundtrack. We do this by focusing on three reading the manual. could cause burns.
important steps:
% PQLS % Easy setup using Advanced MCACC
1 Designing with carefully selected Jitterless high quality playback is possible by The Auto MCACC Setup provides a quick but
components so as to transmit the original connecting a PQLS-compatible player with accurate surround sound setup, which includes Loading the batteries
soundtrack accurately HDMI connections. the advanced features of Professional Acoustic
The batteries included with the unit are to check
Calibration EQ.
2 Allowing for customized acoustic % iPod playback initial operations; they may not last over a long
calibration according to any listening area Your iPod can be connected to the receiver’s period. We recommend using alkaline batteries
3 Tuning that transmits soul USB terminal to play the music/video files on Checking what’s in the box that have a longer life.
the iPod.
Please check that you’ve received the following
Also, the iPod is charged when it is connected
supplied accessories:
Features to the receiver.
! Setup microphone (cable: 5 m (16.4 ft.))
% Advanced Direct Energy design ! Remote control unit
% HDMI (3D, Audio Return Channel)
This receiver offers a new advancement in dis- ! AAA size IEC R03 dry cell batteries (to confirm
A compatible component is required to use the
crete design unique to Pioneer for high-power system operation) x2
above function.
drivability, low distortion and stable imaging. ! AM loop antenna WARNING
% HOME MEDIA GALLERY ! FM wire antenna ! Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight
% Dolby Pro Logic llz compatible
This receiver can play back contents stored
Adding a pair of speakers above the front left ! iPod cable or other excessively hot place, such as inside a
on your computer when your computer is con-
and right speakers adds expressiveness in the ! Power cord car or near a heater. This can cause batteries
nected to the LAN terminal of this receiver.
vertical direction to the previous horizontally- ! CD-ROM (AVNavigator) to leak, overheat, explode or catch fire. It
% About operation of the receiver with a oriented sound field. The height channel ! These operating instructions can also reduce the life or performance of
mobile terminal (iPod, iPhone, etc.) strengthens the sound field’s sense of three- batteries.
The receiver can be controlled from the mobile dimensionality and air, producing presence and
terminal by installing a special application on expansion. Installing the receiver CAUTION
the mobile terminal. For details, see the product ! When installing this unit, make sure to put it Incorrect use of batteries may result in such
% Internet Radio
information on the Pioneer website. on a level and stable surface. hazards as leakage and bursting. Observe the
By connecting this receiver to the network via
This special application may be changed or ! Don’t install it on the following places: following precautions:
the LAN terminal, you can listen to Internet
discontinued without notice. — on a color TV (the screen may distort) ! Never use new and old batteries together.
radio stations.
% Remote operation on an iPod touch/ — near a cassette deck (or close to a device that ! Insert the plus and minus sides of the
% SIRIUS Ready batteries properly according to the marks in
iPhone/iPad gives off a magnetic field). This may interfere
With the SIRIUS Radio terminal, you’ll be up
Operation via LAN is possible from an iPod with the sound. the battery case.
and running in no time.
touch, iPhone or iPad by downloading a — in direct sunlight ! Batteries with the same shape may have
Pioneer original application (iControlAV2) from — in damp or wet areas different voltages. Do not use different
the iTunes Store. batteries together.
6 En
 Before you start 01

! When disposing of used batteries, please Manual that operates in association with the License Wiring Navi only starts up automatically the
comply with governmental regulations or receiver, updating of various types of software, ! Please agree to the “Terms of Use” indicated first time AVNavigator is launched.
environmental public instruction’s rules that and MCACC Application that lets you check the below before using this CD-ROM. Do not use if 2 Select and use the desired function.
apply in your country or area. MCACC measurement results on 3D graphs. you are unwilling to consent to the terms of its AVNavigator includes the following functions:
use. ! Wiring Navi – Guides you through
Installing AVNavigator Also agree to the “License Agreement” connections and initial settings in dialog
Operating range of remote displayed when installing AVNavigator. fashion. High precision initial settings can be
control unit 1 Load the included AVNavigator
Terms of Use made easily.
CD-ROM into your computer’s CD drive. ! Interactive Manual – Automatically displays
The remote control may not work properly if: ! Copyright to data provided on this CD-ROM
! The installation screen is displayed. Proceed
! There are obstacles between the remote belongs to PIONEER CORPORATION. the pages explaining the functions that have
to step 2.
control and the receiver’s remote sensor. Unauthorized transfer, duplication, broadcast, been operated on the receiver. It is also
! If the installation screen does not appear,
! Direct sunlight or fluorescent light is shining public transmission, translation, sales, possible to operate the receiver from the
double-click on the CD-ROM icon then start
onto the remote sensor. lending or other such matters that go beyond Interactive Manual.
the installer (AVNV_XXX_xxx.exe).
! The receiver is located near a device that is the scope of “personal use” or “citation” as ! Glossary – Displays glossary pages.
emitting infrared rays. 2 Follow the instructions on the screen defined by Copyright Law may be subject ! MCACC Appli – Displays Advanced
! The receiver is operated simultaneously with to install. to punitive actions. Permission to use this MCACC measurement results vividly on the
another infrared remote control unit. When “Finish” is selected, installation is CD-ROM is granted under license by PIONEER computer.
completed. CORPORATION. There are special operating instructions
3 Remove the included AVNavigator General Disclaimer for MCACC Application. These instructions
CD-ROM from the computer’s CD drive. ! PIONEER CORPORATION does not are included in the AVNavigator
guarantee the operation of this CD-ROM with Interactive Manual’s menus. Refer to them
Handling the CD-ROM respect to personal computers using any when using MCACC Application.
of the applicable OS. In addition, PIONEER ! Software Update – Allows various types of
Operating Environment software to be updated.
CORPORATION is not liable for any damages
30° ! This CD-ROM can be used with Microsoft® ! Settings – Used to make various
incurred as a result of use of this CD-ROM
30° Windows® XP/Vista/7. AVNavigator settings.
and is not responsible for any compensation.
! A browser is at times used for AVNavigator ! Detection – Used to detect the receiver.
The names of private corporations, products
functions. The supported browser is Microsoft
and other entities described herein are the
7 m (23 ft.) Internet Explorer 6, 7 and 8. With other
registered trademarks or trademarks of their Note
browsers, some functions may be limited or
respective firms. To use the AVNavigator of another model, first
the display may not appear properly.
uninstall (delete) this receiver’s AVNavigator,
Also, even with a supported browser,
Using AVNavigator then install the AVNavigator of the other model.
About using AVNavigator depending on the browser’s settings, some
(included CD-ROM) functions may be limited and the display may
1 Click [AVNavigator] on the desktop to Deleting the AVNavigator
not appear properly.
The included AVNavigator CD-ROM contains launch AVNavigator. You can use the following method to uninstall
Wiring Navi allowing you to easily make the Precautions For Use AVNavigator is launched and Wiring Navi (delete) the AVNavigator from your PC.
receiver’s connections and initial settings in ! This CD-ROM is for use with a personal starts up. The language selection screen
dialog fashion. High precision initial settings computer. It cannot be used with a DVD appears. Follow the instructions on the screen % Delete from the Control Panel of the
can be completed easily simply by following the player or music CD player. Attempting to play to make the connections and automatic PC.
instructions on the screen to make the connec- this CD-ROM with a DVD player or music settings. From the Start menu, click “Program”
tions and settings. CD player can damage speakers or cause d “PIONEER CORPORATION” d
There are also other features enabling easy use impaired hearing due to the large volume. “AVNavigator(VSX-1121)” d “Uninstall”.
of various functions, including an Interactive

En 7
02 Controls and displays

Controls and displays 8 i/j/k/l/ENTER

Use the arrow buttons when setting up your
10 MULTI-ZONE select buttons
Switch to perform operations in ZONE 2 (page
surround sound system (see page 60) and the 51).
Audio or Video options (page 48 or 50). The ZONE 3 button cannot be used with this
The remote has been conveniently color-coded receiver.
Remote control according to component control using the follow- 9 Receiver Control buttons
This section explains how to operate the remote ing system: Press first to access: 11 Remote control LED
control for the receiver. ! White – Receiver control, TV control ! AUTO/ALC/DIRECT – Switches between Lights when a command is sent from the
! Blue – Other controls (See pages 29, 30, 32, 34 Auto Surround (page 36), Auto Level Control, remote control.
RECEIVER MULTI
OPERATION
SOURCE
and 58.) Optimum Surround mode and Stream Direct 12 OPTION
1 mode (page 37). The preset codes of desired devices can be
2,3
RCU SETUP
11 1 u RECEIVER
BDR ! STEREO – Press to select stereo playback registered in the remote control and button
BD DVD DVR HDMI This switches between standby and on for this mode (page 36).
SAT
receiver. operations can be registered using the learning
4 TV CD HMG ADPT ! STANDARD – Press for Standard decoding mode.
USB
iPod TUNER SIRIUS
OPTION

12 2 MULTI OPERATION and to switch various modes (2 Pro Logic,

INPUT SELECT TV CTRL RECEIVER Use this button to perform multi operations Neo:6, etc.) (page 36). 13
13 (page 56). ! ADV SURR – Use to switch between the Switches the remote to control the receiver
5
INPUT
MASTER
VOLUME
various surround modes (page 37). (used to select the white commands).
3 RCU SETUP Switch to perform operations in the main zone.
TV CONTROL
14 Use to input the preset code when making ! THX – Press to select a Home THX listening
6 mode (page 37). Also use this button to set up surround sound.
CH VOL MUTE remote control settings and to set the remote
15 control mode (page 54). ! PHASE CTRL – Press to switch on/off Phase 14 MASTER VOLUME +/–
AUDIO
PARAMETER
VIDEO
PARAMETER Control (page 38). Use to set the listening volume.
7 LIST TUNE TOOLS 4 Input function buttons ! STATUS – Press to check selected receiver
TOP MENU T.EDIT
Press to select control of other components 15 MUTE
8
BAND GUIDE
settings (page 52). Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has
PRESET ENTER PRESET (page 54). ! PQLS – Press to select the PQLS setting
Use INPUT SELECT c/ d to select the input been muted (adjusting the volume also restores
CATEGORY RETURN (page 46). the sound).
HOME
TUNE
function (page 29). ! HDMI OUT – This button cannot be used
MENU
iPod CTRL
AUTO / ALC / PGM MEMORY MENU 5 TV CTRL with this receiver. 16 LIGHT
Press to turn on/off the illumination for the
DIRECT STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR
HDD DVD Set the preset code of your TV’s manufacturer ! SIGNAL SEL – Use to select an input signal
THX PHASE CTRL STATUS
when controlling the TV (page 55). (page 38). buttons.
! MCACC – Press to switch between MCACC The way the buttons light can be selected from
6 TV CONTROL buttons
TV / DTV MPX PQLS

9 presets (page 38). four modes (page 56).

HDMI OUT AUDIO
These buttons are dedicated to control the TV
1
SIGNAL SEL MCACC
2
SLEEP
3
INFO assigned to the TV CTRL button. ! SLEEP – Use to put the receiver in sleep
4 5 6 DISP mode and select the amount of time before
CH LEVEL A.ATT DIMMER 7 Receiver setting buttons sleep (page 52).
7 8 9
Press first to access:
D.ACCESS CLASS CH
! CH LEVEL – Press repeatedly to select a
/ CLR 0 ENTER
! AUDIO PARAMETER – Use to access the
channel, then use k/l to adjust the level
10
ZONE 2 ZONE 3 LIGHT
Audio options (page 48).
(page 67).
! VIDEO PARAMETER – Use to access the
! A.ATT – Attenuates (lowers) the level of an
Video options (page 50).
analog input signal to prevent distortion
! HOME MENU – Use to access the Home
RECEIVER
(page 52).
Menu (pages 25, 27, 45, 60 and 66).
! DIMMER – Dims or brightens the display
! RETURN – Press to confirm and exit the
(page 52).
current menu screen.

8 En
 Controls and displays 02

7 (PHASE CONTROL) 17 S.RTRV

Display Lights when the Phase Control is switched on Lights when the Auto Sound Retriever function
(page 38). is active (page 48).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
8 Analog signal indicators 18 Character display
AUTO L C R 2DIGITAL PLUS DSD PCM TUNED Displays various system information.
SL
2TrueHD MULTI-ZONE PQLS ALC ATT STEREO
SR DTS HD ES 96/24 S.RTRV SOUND UP MIX OVER MONO
Light to indicate reducing the level of an analog
HDMI dB
DIGITAL XL XC XR signal (page 52). 19 Remote control mode indicator
ANALOG LFE MSTR CD TUNER SIRIUS DVD TV VIDEO HMG USB
9 Tuner indicators Lights to indicate the receiver’s remote control
iPod BD DVR HDMI [ 2 ] [ 3 ] [ 4 ]
AUTO SURROUND
STREAM DIRECT ! TUNED – Lights when a broadcast is being mode setting. (Not displayed when set to 1.)
2PROLOGIC x Neo:6
THX ADV.SURROUND received. (page 71)
STANDARD
SP AB SLEEP ! STEREO – Lights when a stereo FM
6 14 15 16 17 18 19 broadcast is being received in auto stereo
mode.
1 Signal indicators ! 96/24 – Lights with DTS 96/24 decoding. ! MONO – Lights when the mono mode is set
Light to indicate the currently selected input ! DSD PCM – Light during DSD (Direct Stream using MPX.
signal. AUTO lights when the receiver is set to Digital) to PCM conversion with SACDs. 10
select the input signal automatically (page 38). ! PCM – Lights during playback of PCM Lights when the sound is muted.
2 Program format indicators signals.
! MSTR – Lights during playback of DTS-HD 11 Master volume level
Light to indicate the channels to which digital Shows the overall volume level.
signals are being input. Master Audio signals.
“---” indicates the minimum level, and “+12dB”
! L/R – Left front/Right front channel 4 MULTI-ZONE indicates the maximum level.
! C – Center channel Lights when the MULTI-ZONE feature is active
! SL/SR – Left surround/Right surround (page 51). 12 Input function indicators
channel Light to indicate the input function you have
5 SOUND selected.
! LFE – Low frequency effects channel (the (( )) Lights when the DIALOG E (Dialog
indicators light when an LFE signal is being Enhancement) or TONE (tone controls) features 13 Scroll indicators
input) is selected (page 48). Light when there are more selectable items
! XL/XR – Two channels other than the ones when making the various settings.
above 6 Listening mode indicators
! AUTO SURROUND – Lights when the Auto 14 Speaker indicators
! XC – Either one channel other than the ones Lights to indicate the current speaker system
above, the mono surround channel or matrix Surround feature is switched on (page 36).
! ALC – Lights when the ALC (Auto level using SPEAKERS (page 51).
encode flag
control) mode is selected (page 36). 15 SLEEP
3 Digital format indicators ! STREAM DIRECT – Lights when Direct/Pure Lights when the receiver is in sleep mode (page
Light when a signal encoded in the correspond- Direct is selected (page 37). 52).
ing format is detected. ! ADV.SURROUND – Lights when one of 16 Matrix decoding format indicators
! 2 DIGITAL – Lights with Dolby Digital the Advanced Surround modes has been ! 2PRO LOGIC IIx – This lights to indicate 2
decoding. selected (page 37). Pro Logic II / 2 Pro Logic IIx decoding (page
! 2 DIGITAL PLUS – Lights with Dolby Digital ! STANDARD – Lights when one of the 36).
Plus decoding. Standard Surround modes is switched on ! Neo:6 – When one of the Neo:6 modes of the
! 2 TrueHD – Lights with Dolby TrueHD (page 36). receiver is on, this lights to indicate Neo:6
decoding. ! THX – Lights when one of the Home THX processing (page 36).
! DTS – Lights with DTS decoding. modes is selected (page 37).
! DTS HD – Lights with DTS-HD decoding.
En 9
02 Controls and displays

5 Remote sensor ! STANDARD SURROUND – Press for

Front panel Receives the signals from the remote control Standard decoding and to switch various
(page 7). modes (2 Pro Logic, Neo:6, Stereo etc.)
1 2 3 4 3 5 6 (page 36).
6 MASTER VOLUME dial
! ADVANCED SURROUND – Use to switch
7 Front panel controls between the various surround modes (page
To access the front panel controls, catch the 37).
sides of the door with your fingers and pull ! HOME THX – Press to select a Home THX
ADVANCED
MCACC FL OFF HDMI iPod iPhone iPad
forward. listening mode (page 37).
15 HOME MENU
Use to access the Home Menu (page 25, 27, 45,
INPUT MASTER
60 and 66).
SELECTOR VOLUME

INPU
SELET
CTOR

STAN
DBY
16 RETURN
Press to confirm and exit the current menu
/ON

STANDBY/ON

screen.
MAST
VOLU ER
ME

17 TUNER controls
! BAND – Switches between AM and FM radio
bands (page 32).
8 AUDIO PARAMETER ! TUNER EDIT – Use with TUNE i/j, PRESET
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Use to access the Audio options (page 48). k/l and ENTER to memorize and name
9 i/j/k/l (TUNE/PRESET) /ENTER stations for recall (page 32).
AUDIO VIDEO
PARAMETER PARAMETER MULTI-ZONE iPod iPhone iPad AUTO SURR/ALC/ ADVANCED STANDARD
TUNE SPEAKERS CONTROL ON/OFF DIRECT CONTROL STREAM DIRECT SURROUND SURROUND HOME THX
Use the arrow buttons when setting up your 18 PHONES jack
Home Menu. Use TUNE i/j to find radio fre- Use to connect headphones. When the head-
7 PRESET
ENTER
PRESET
BAND
quencies and use PRESET k/l to find preset phones are connected, there is no sound output
PHONES MCACC
SETUP MIC 5V
USB
2.1 A
HDMI 3 INPUT stations (page 32). from the speakers.
TUNER EDIT
HOME MENU RETURN
10 VIDEO PARAMETER 19 MCACC SETUP MIC jack
TUNE
iPod iPhone iPad
Use to access the Video options (page 50). Use to connect the supplied microphone (page
11 SPEAKERS 25).
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Use to change the speaker terminal (page 51). 20 iPod iPhone iPad USB terminals
12 MULTI-ZONE controls Use to connect your Apple iPod/iPhone/iPad as
1 u STANDBY/ON ! FL OFF – Lights when “off” (nothing an audio and video source (page 22), or con-
If you’ve made MULTI-ZONE connections (page
This switches between standby and on for this displayed) is selected with the display’s nect a USB device for audio and photo playback
21) use these controls to control the sub zone
receiver. dimmer adjustment (page 52). (page 23).
from the main zone (page 51).
2 INPUT SELECTOR dial ! HDMI – Blinks when connecting an HDMI-
13 iPod iPhone iPad DIRECT CONTROL 21 HDMI input connector
Use to select an input function. equipped component; lights when the
Change the receiver’s input to the iPod and Use for connection to a compatible HDMI
component is connected (page 17).
3 Indicators enable iPod operations on the iPod (page 30). device (Video camera, etc.) (page 23).
! iPod iPhone iPad – Lights to indicate iPod/
! ADVANCED MCACC – Lights when EQ is iPhone/iPad is connected (page 22). 14 Listening mode buttons
set to ON in the AUDIO PARAMETER menu
4 Character display ! AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT –
(page 48).
See Display on page 9 . Switches between Auto Surround (page 36),
Auto Level Control, Optimum Surround mode
and Stream Direct mode (page 37).
10 En
 Connecting your equipment 03

Connecting your equipment Note

! The input functions below are assigned by default to the receiver’s different input terminals. Refer to
The Input Setup menu on page 27 to change the assignments if other connections are used.
Connecting your equipment
Input Terminals
This receiver provides you with many connection possibilities, but it doesn’t have to be difficult. This Input function
chapter explains the kinds of components you can connect to make up your home theater system. HDMI Digital Component
BD (BD)

CAUTION DVD IN 5 COAX-1 IN 1

! Before making or changing the connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cord TV/SAT OPT-1
from the power outlet. Plugging in should be the final step. DVR/BDR IN 6 OPT-2 IN 2
! When making connections, also keep the power cords of the devices being connected unplugged
VIDEO IN 4 OPT-3
from the power outlets.
! Depending on the device being connected (amplifier, receiver, etc.), the methods of connection HDMI 1 IN 1
and terminal names may differ from the explanations in this manual. Also refer to the operating HDMI 2 IN 2
instructions of the respective devices.
HDMI 3
IN 3
(front panel)

Rear panel CD COAX-2

IN 4 IN 5 IN 6
! The CU-RF100 omni-directional remote control (separately sold) can be connected to the RS-232C
IN 1 IN 2 OUT DC OUTPUT ADAPTER PORT
and EXTENSION terminals. Using the CU-RF100 lets you display the receiver’s display information
(VIDEO) BD IN (DVD) (DVR/BDR) (OUTPUT 5 V
HDMI for WIRELESS LAN LAN AC IN
ASSIGNABLE
(OUTPUT
(10/100) 0.1 A MAX)
5V
1 6 0.6 A MAX)
ASSIGNABLE
Y
COMPONENT VIDEO
PB PR
SIRIUS COAXIAL
ASSIGNABLE
OPTICAL
ASSIGNABLE on the remote control display in your hands and operate it without worrying about obstacles or the
MONITOR IN IN 1 IN 2 IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 OUT
IN 1
(DVD)
OUT

VIDEO
(DVD) (CD) (TV/SAT) (DVR/BDR) (VIDEO)
direction in which the remote control is pointing.
IN 2
(DVR/
BDR) ZONE 2 DVD TV/SAT VIDEO DVR/BDR CD ANTENN
OUT IN IN IN OUT IN IN FRONT 1 SUBWOOFER 2 SURROUND SURR BACK FH / FW PRE OUT RS-232C AM LOOP
(Single)

L
AUDIO
MONITOR
OUT
R

CENTER
ANTENNA
RS-232C AM LOOP FM UNBAL 75 SPEAKERS A R FRONT L CENTER R SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK L(Single) FRONT HEIGHT / FRONT WIDE / B
R L

(OUTPUT 5 V CO
IN 150 mA MAX)

IN OUT
EXTENSION
OUT

(OUTPUT 5 V CONTROL IR
150 mA MAX)
EXTENSION

En 11
03 Connecting your equipment

This plan replaces the left and right front height Front Bi-Amp
Determining the speakers’ FHR speakers shown in [A] with the left and right
application FHL
front wide speakers (FWL/FWR).
R It is not possible to produce sound simultane-
This unit permits you to build various surround R
ously from the front height or front wide speak-
systems, in accordance with the number of
L ers and the surround back speakers.
speakers you have. SW 2 L
C
SR This surround system produces a true-to-life SW 2
! Be sure to connect speakers to the front left SW 1 C
sound over a wider area. SW 1
and right channels (L and R).
! It is also possible to only connect one of the [C] 7.2 channel surround system & Speaker
surround back speakers (SB) or neither. SBR B connection
SL SR
! If you have two subwoofers, the second SBL ! Speaker System setting: Speaker B
subwoofer can be connected to the SL
SUBWOOFER 2 terminal. Connecting two
subwoofers increases the bass sound to
achieve more powerful sound reproduction. In A 7.2 ch surround system connects the left and
R [E] 5.2 channel surround system & ZONE 2
this case, the same sound is output from the right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker
connection (Multi Zone)
two subwoofers. (C), the left and right front height speakers L
! Speaker System setting: ZONE 2
Choose one from Plans [A] to [E] below. (FHL/FHR), the left and right surround speak- R
SW 2 With these connections you can simultaneously
ers (SL/SR), the left and right surround back C
SR L
SW 1 enjoy 5.2-channel surround sound in the main
speakers (SBL/SBR), and the subwoofers (SW 1/
Important zone with stereo playback on another compo-
SW 2).
! The Speaker System setting must be made if nent in ZONE 2. (The selection of input devices
It is not possible to produce sound simultane- SBR
you use any of the connections shown below SL is limited.)
ously from the front height or front wide speak- SBL Speaker B
other than [A] (see Speaker system setting on ers and the surround back speakers.
page 66 ). This surround system produces a more true-to- Main zone
! Sound does not come through simultaneously life sound from above.
R
from the front height, front wide, speaker B With these connections you can simultaneously
[B] 7.2 channel surround system (Front L
and surround back speakers. Output speakers enjoy 5.2-channel surround sound in the main
are different depending on the input signal or wide) zone with stereo playback of the same sound
SW 2
listening mode. ! Speaker System setting: Normal(SB/FW) on the B speakers. The same connections also C
SW 1
allow for 7.2-channel surround sound in the
[A] 7.2 channel surround system (Front
main zone when not using the B speakers.
height)
[D] 5.2 channel surround system & Front SR
*Default setting R
! Speaker System setting: Normal(SB/FH) FWR Bi-amping connection (High quality SL Sub zone
L surround)
! Speaker System setting: Front Bi-Amp
SW 2 SR
C Bi-amping connection of the front speakers for R
SW 1
high sound quality with 5.2-channel surround L
FWL ZONE 2
sound.
SBR
SL
SBL

12 En
 Connecting your equipment 03

! Place the left and right front height speakers ! It is best to angle the speakers towards the
Other speaker connections at least one meter (3.3 ft.) directly above the listening position. The angle depends on Connecting the speakers
! Your favorite speaker connections can be left and right front speakers. the size of the room. Use less of an angle for Each speaker connection on the receiver com-
selected even if you have fewer than 5.2 bigger rooms. prises a positive (+) and negative (–) terminal.
speakers (except front left/right speakers). ! Surround and surround back speakers
THX speaker system setup Make sure to match these up with the terminals
! When not connecting a subwoofer, connect should be positioned 60 cm to 90 cm (2 ft. to on the speakers themselves.
speakers with low frequency reproduction If you are using a THX certified subwoofer, use
3 ft.) higher than your ears and tilted slightly
capabilities to the front channel. (The the THX INPUT jack on the subwoofer (if your
downward. Make sure the speakers don’t
subwoofer’s low frequency component subwoofer has one) or switch the filter position
face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers
CAUTION
is played from the front speakers, so the to THX on your subwoofer. ! These speaker terminals carry HAZARDOUS
should be more directly behind the listener
speakers could be damaged.) See also THX Audio Setting on page 68 to make LIVE voltage. To prevent the risk of electric
than for home theater playback.
! After connecting, be sure to conduct the the settings that will give you the best sound shock when connecting or disconnecting the
! Try not to place the surround speakers farther
Full Auto MCACC (speaker environment experience when using the Home THX modes speaker cables, disconnect the power cord
away from the listening position than the front
setting) procedure. See Automatically (page 37). before touching any uninsulated parts.
and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the
conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto ! Make sure that all the bare speaker wire is
surround sound effect.
MCACC) on page 25 . Some tips for improving sound twisted together and inserted fully into the
quality speaker terminal. If any of the bare speaker
wire touches the back panel it may cause the
Where you put your speakers in the room has power to cut off as a safety measure.
Placing the speakers a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
Refer to the chart below for placement of the following guidelines should help you to get the
speakers you intend to connect. best sound from your system.
Bare wire connections
! The subwoofer can be placed on the floor.
SW 1 SW 2 Ideally, the other speakers should be at about CAUTION
FHL FHR
C ear-level when you’re listening to them. Make sure that all speakers are securely
L R Putting the speakers on the floor (except the installed. This not only improves sound quality,
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a but also reduces the risk of damage or injury
FWL 30 30 FWR wall is not recommended. resulting from speakers being knocked over or
60 60 ! For the best stereo effect, place the front falling in the event of external shocks such as
speakers 2 m to 3 m (6 ft. to 9 ft.) apart, at earthquakes.
equal distance from the TV.
120 120 ! If you’re going to place speakers around your 1 Twist exposed wire strands together.
SL SR 2 Loosen terminal and insert exposed
60 CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your wire.
SBL SB SBR CRT TV. 3 Tighten terminal.
! If you’re using a center speaker, place the
front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place 1 2 3
! Place the surround speakers at 120º from them at a narrower angle.
10 mm (3/ 8 in.)
the center. If you, (1) use the surround ! Place the center speaker above or below the
back speaker, and, (2) don’t use the front TV so that the sound of the center channel is
height speakers / front wide speakers, we localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the
recommend placing the surround speaker center speaker does not cross the line formed
right beside you. by the leading edge of the front left and right
! If you intend to connect only one surround speakers.
back speaker, place it directly behind you.
En 13
03 Connecting your equipment

Note Installing your speaker system

! Please refer to the manual that came with At the very least, front left and right speakers only are necessary. Note that your main surround
your speakers for details on how to connect speakers should always be connected as a pair, but you can connect just one surround back
the other end of the speaker cables to your speaker if you like (it must be connected to the left surround back terminal).
speakers.
! Use an RCA cable to connect the subwoofer. Standard surround connection
It is not possible to connect using speaker
cables. The front height terminals can also be used for the front wide and Speaker B speakers.
! If you have two subwoofers, the second
Front height setting
subwoofer can be connected to the
Front height right Front height left
SUBWOOFER 2 terminal. Connecting two Front wide setting
subwoofers increases the bass sound to Front wide right Front wide left
achieve more powerful sound reproduction. In Speaker B setting
this case, the same sound is output from the Speaker B - right Speaker B - left
two subwoofers.
Front right Subwoofer 1 Center Subwoofer 2 Front left

Banana plug connections

LINE LEVEL LINE LEVEL
If you want to use speaker cables terminated INPUT INPUT
with banana plugs, screw the speaker terminal
fully shut, then plug the banana plug into the
end of the speaker terminal. IN 4 IN 5 IN 6
IN 1 IN 2 DC OUTPUT ADAPTER PORT
(VIDEO) BD IN (DVD) (DVR/BDR) OUT (OUTPUT 5 V
HDMI for WIRELESS LAN LAN AC IN
ASSIGNABLE
(OUTPUT
(10/100) 0.1 A MAX)
5V
1 6 0.6 A MAX)
ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO SIRIUS COAXIAL OPTICAL
ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE
Y PB PR MONITOR IN IN 1 IN 2 IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 OUT
IN 1 OUT (DVD) (CD) (TV/SAT) (DVR/BDR) (VIDEO)
(DVD)
VIDEO
IN 2
(DVR/
BDR) ZONE 2 DVD TV/SAT VIDEO DVR/BDR CD
OUT IN IN IN OUT IN IN FRONT 1 SUBWOOFER 2 SURROUND SURR BACK FH / FW PRE OUT
(Single)

L
AUDIO
MONITOR
OUT
R

CENTER
ANTENNA
RS-232C AM LOOP FM UNBAL 75 SPEAKERS A R FRONT L CENTER R SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK L(Single) FRONT HEIGHT / FRONT WIDE / B
R L

IN

IN OUT
OUT

(OUTPUT 5 V CONTROL IR
150 mA MAX)
EXTENSION

The surround back terminals can also be used for ZONE 2.

5.2 ch surround setting

Not connected Not connected
6.2 ch surround setting
Not connected Surround back
Surround right Surround left
7.2 ch surround setting
Surround back right Surround back left
ZONE 2 setting
ZONE 2 - Right ZONE 2 - Left

14 En
 Connecting your equipment 03

Bi-amping your speakers Bi-wiring your speakers Selecting the Speaker system
Bi-amping is when you connect the high frequency driver and low frequency driver of your speakers Your speakers can also be bi-wired if they sup- The front height terminals can be used for front
to different amplifiers for better crossover performance. Your speakers must be bi-ampable to do port bi-amping. wide and Speaker B connections, in addition to
this (having separate terminals for high and low) and the sound improvement will depend on the ! With these connections, the Speaker System for the front height speakers. Also, the surround
kind of speakers you’re using. setting makes no difference. back terminals can be used for bi-amping and
Front right Front left ZONE 2 connections, in addition to for the sur-
CAUTION round back speakers. Make this setting accord-
Bi-amp compatible Bi-amp compatible
! Don’t connect different speakers from the ing to the application.
speaker High High speaker
same terminal in this way.
Center ! When bi-wiring as well, heed the cautions for Front height setup
Low Low
bi-amping shown above.
*Default setting
% To bi-wire a speaker, connect two
1 Connect a pair of speakers to the front
speaker cords to the speaker terminal on
height speaker terminals.
the receiver.
HDMI
IN 1 IN 2 IN 4
(VIDEO) BD IN
IN 5
(DVD)
IN 6
(DVR/BDR) OUT DC OUTPUT ADAPTER PORT
(OUTPUT 5 V See Standard surround connection on page 14 .
Using a banana plug for the second connection
for WIRELESS LAN
(OUTPUT
LAN 0.1 A MAX) AC IN
ASSIGNABLE 5V
(10/100)
1 6 0.6 A MAX)
COMPONENT VIDEO SIRIUS COAXIAL OPTICAL
2 If necessary, select ‘Normal(SB/FH)’
ASSIGNABLE

IN 1
Y PB PR MONITOR
OUT
IN
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1
(DVD)
IN 2
(CD)
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1 IN 2 IN 3
(TV/SAT) (DVR/BDR) (VIDEO)
OUT
is recommended.
from the Speaker System menu.
(DVD)
VIDEO
IN 2
(DVR/

See Speaker system setting on page 66 to do

BDR) ZONE 2 DVD TV/SAT VIDEO DVR/BDR CD
OUT IN IN IN OUT IN IN FRONT 1 SUBWOOFER 2 SURROUND SURR BACK FH / FW PRE OUT
(Single)

L
AUDIO
MONITOR
OUT
R this.
CENTER
ANTENNA
RS-232C AM LOOP FM UNBAL 75 SPEAKERS A R FRONT L CENTER R SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK L(Single) FRONT HEIGHT / FRONT WIDE / B
R L

Front wide setup

IN

1 Connect a pair of speakers to the front

IN OUT
OUT

(OUTPUT 5 V
150 mA MAX)
EXTENSION
CONTROL IR
height speaker terminals.
See Standard surround connection on page 14 .
2 Select ‘Normal(SB/FW)’ from the
Subwoofer 1 Surround right Surround left Subwoofer 2
Speaker System menu.
See Speaker system setting on page 66 to do
this.
CAUTION
! Most speakers with both High and Low terminals have two metal plates that connect the High
Speaker B setup
to the Low terminals. These must be removed when you are bi-amping the speakers or you could
severely damage the amplifier. See your speaker manual for more information. You can listen to stereo playback in another
! If your speakers have a removable crossover network, make sure you do not remove it for bi-amping. room.
Doing so may damage your speakers. 1 Connect a pair of speakers to the front
height speaker terminals.
See Standard surround connection on page 14 .
2 Select ‘Speaker B’ from the
Speaker System menu.
See Speaker system setting on page 66 to do
this.

En 15
03 Connecting your equipment

Terminal for connection

Bi-Amping setup About the audio connection
Terminal for connection with
source device with TV monitor About HDMI
Bi-amping connection of the front speakers for The HDMI connection transfers uncompressed

High picture quality

high sound quality with 5.2-channel surround Types of cables and Transferable audio HDMI IN HDMI OUT digital video, as well as almost every kind of
sound. terminals signals
digital audio.
1 Connect bi-amp compatible speakers HDMI HD audio
Y PB PR Y PB PR
This receiver incorporates High-Definition
to the front and surround back speaker COMPONENT COMPONENT VIDEO Multimedia Interface (HDMI®) technology.

Sound signal priority

VIDEO IN MONITOR OUT
terminals. This receiver supports the functions described
See Bi-amping your speakers on page 15 . Digital (Coaxial) Conventional digital audio below through HDMI connections.
2 Select ‘Front Bi-Amp’ from the
VIDEO IN VIDEO
MONITOR OUT ! Digital transfer of uncompressed video
Speaker System menu. Video signals can be output (contents protected by HDCP (1080p/24,
See Speaker system setting on page 66 to do
Digital (Optical) 1080p/60, etc.))
this. ! 3D signal transfer
Note ! Deep Color signal transfer
RCA (Analog) Conventional analog audio ! If the video signal does not appear on your ! x.v.Color signal transfer
ZONE 2 setup (White/Red) ! ARC (Audio Return Channel)
TV, try adjusting the resolution settings on
With these connections you can simultaneously your component or display. Note that some ! Input of multi-channel linear PCM digital
enjoy 5.2-channel surround sound in the main components (such as video game units) have audio signals (192 kHz or less) for up to 8
zone with stereo playback on another compo- resolutions that may not be converted. In this channels
nent in ZONE 2. case, try switching Digital Video Conversion ! Input of the following digital audio formats:
1 Connect a pair of speakers to the ! With an HDMI cable, video and audio signals (in Setting the Video options on page 50 ) OFF. — Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS, High
surround back speaker terminals. can be transferred in high quality over a single ! The signal input resolutions that can be bitrate audio (Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD Master
See Standard surround connection on page 14 . cable. converted from the component video input Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio),
for the HDMI output are 480i/576i, 480p/576p, DVD-Audio, CD, SACD (DSD signal), Video
2 Select ‘ZONE 2’ from the CD, Super VCD
720p and 1080i. 1080p signals cannot be
Speaker System menu. About the video converter ! Synchronized operation with components
converted.
See Speaker system setting on page 66 to do using the Control with HDMI function (see
The video converter ensures that all video ! Only signals with an input resolution
this. Control with HDMI function on page 45 )
sources are output through all of the MONITOR of 480i/576i can be converted from the
VIDEO OUT jacks. The only exception is HDMI: component video input for the composite
since this resolution cannot be downsampled, MONITOR OUT terminals. Note
you must connect your monitor/TV to the ! For optimal video performance, THX ! An HDMI connection can only be made
receiver’s HDMI output when connecting this recommends switching Digital Video with DVI-equipped components compatible
video source. Conversion (in Setting the Video options on with both DVI and High Bandwidth Digital
If several video components are assigned to page 50 ) OFF. Content Protection (HDCP). If you choose to
the same input function (see The Input Setup connect to a DVI connector, you will need a
menu on page 27 ), the converter gives priority This item incorporates copy protection technol-
separate adaptor (DVIdHDMI) to do so. A DVI
to HDMI, component, then composite (in that ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other
connection, however, does not support audio
order). intellectual property rights of Rovi Corporation.
signals. Consult your local audio dealer for
Reverse engineering and disassembly are
more information.
prohibited.

16 En
 Connecting your equipment 03

! If you connect a component that

is not compatible with HDCP, an Connecting your TV and playback components
HDCP ERROR message is displayed on the
front panel display. Some components that
Connecting using HDMI
are compatible with HDCP still cause this
message to be displayed, but so long as there If you have an HDMI or DVI (with HDCP) equipped component (Blu-ray Disc player (BD), etc.), you
is no problem with displaying video this is not can connect it to this receiver using a commercially available HDMI cable.
a malfunction. If the TV and playback components support the Control with HDMI feature, the convenient Control
! Depending on the component you have with HDMI functions can be used (see Control with HDMI function on page 45 ).
connected, using a DVI connection may result
HDMI/DVI-compatible
in unreliable signal transfers. Other HDMI/DVI-
Blu-ray Disc player
equipped component
! This receiver supports SACD, Dolby Digital
HDMI/DVI-compatible
Plus, Dolby TrueHD and DTS-HD Master monitor
Audio. To take advantage of these formats,
however, make sure that the component HDMI OUT HDMI OUT
Select one
connected to this receiver also supports the HDMI IN
DIGITAL OUT AUDIO OUT
COAXIAL OPTICAL R ANALOG L
corresponding format.
! Use a High Speed HDMI® cable. If an HDMI
cable other than a High Speed HDMI® cable is This connection is
required in order to
used, it may not work properly. listen to the sound
! When an HDMI cable with a built-in equalizer of the TV over the
receiver.
is connected, it may not operate properly. HDMI
IN 1 IN 2 IN 4
(VIDEO) BD IN
IN 5
(DVD)
IN 6
(DVR/BDR) OUT DC OUTPUT
for WIRELESS LAN LAN
ADAPTE
(OUTPU

! Signal transfer is only possible when

ASSIGNABLE
(OUTPUT
(10/100) 0.1 A
5V
1 6 0.6 A MAX)
ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO SIRIUS COAXIAL OPTICAL

connected to a compatible component.

ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE
Y PB PR MONITOR IN IN 1 IN 2 IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 OUT
IN 1 OUT (DVD) (CD) (TV/SAT) (DVR/BDR) (VIDEO)
(DVD)

! HDMI format digital audio transmissions

VIDEO
IN 2
(DVR/
BDR) ZONE 2 DVD TV/SAT VIDEO DVR/BDR CD

require a longer time to be recognized. Due to

OUT IN IN IN OUT IN IN FRONT 1 SUBWOOFER 2 SURROUND SURR BACK FH / FW PRE OUT
(Single)

L
AUDIO

this, interruption in the audio may occur when MONITOR

OUT
R

switching between audio formats or beginning RS-232C AM LOOP

ANTENNA
FM UNBAL 75 SPEAKERS
CENTER

A R FRONT L CENTER R SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK L(Single) FRONT HEIGHT / FRONT WIDE

playback. R

! Turning on/off the device connected to this IN

unit’s HDMI OUT terminal during playback, OUT

IN OUT

or disconnecting/connecting the HDMI (OUTPUT 5 V

150 mA MAX)
CONTROL IR

cable during playback, may cause noise or EXTENSION

interrupted audio.
! For input components, connections other than HDMI connections are also possible (see
HDMI, the HDMI logo, and High-Definition Connecting your DVD player with no HDMI output on page 18 ).
Multimedia Interface are trademarks or regis- ! If you want to listen to the sound of the TV over the receiver, connect the receiver and TV with audio
tered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the cables.
United States and other countries. — When the TV and receiver are connected by HDMI connections, if the TV supports the HDMI ARC
(Audio Return Channel) function, the sound of the TV is input to the receiver via the HDMI OUT
terminal, so there is no need to connect an audio cable. In this case, set TV Audio at HDMI Setup
“x.v.Color” and are trade-
to via HDMI (see HDMI Setup on page 45 ).
marks of Sony Corporation.

En 17
03 Connecting your equipment

Connecting your DVD player with no HDMI output Connecting your TV with no HDMI input
This diagram shows connections of a TV (with HDMI input) and DVD player (or other playback com- This diagram shows connections of a TV (with no HDMI input) and DVD player (or other playback
ponent with no HDMI output) to the receiver. component) to the receiver.
HDMI/DVI-compatible monitor
! With these connections, the picture is not output to the TV even if the DVD player is connected with
DVD player, etc.
an HDMI cable. Connect the receiver and TV using the same type of video cable as used to connect
the receiver and player.

DVD player, etc.

Select one Select one
AUDIO OUT DIGITAL OUT VIDEO OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
HDMI IN R ANALOG L COAXIAL OPTICAL VIDEO
PR PB Y
TV

Select one Select one Select one

VIDEO IN VIDEO OUT HDMI OUT DIGITAL OUT AUDIO OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO IN COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
PR PB Y VIDEO VIDEO COAXIAL OPTICAL R ANALOG L
PR PB Y

IN 1 IN 2 IN 4 IN 5 IN 6 ADAPTER PORT
(VIDEO) (DVD) (DVR/BDR) DC OUTPUT
HDMI BD IN OUT (OUTPUT 5 V
for WIRELESS LAN
(OUTPUT
LAN 0.1 A MAX) AC IN
ASSIGNABLE 5V
(10/100)
1 6 0.6 A MAX)
ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO SIRIUS COAXIAL OPTICAL
ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE
Y PB PR MONITOR IN IN 1 IN 2 IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 OUT
IN 1 OUT (DVD) (CD) (TV/SAT) (DVR/BDR) (VIDEO)
(DVD)
VIDEO
IN 2
(DVR/
BDR) ZONE 2 DVD TV/SAT VIDEO DVR/BDR CD
OUT IN IN IN OUT IN IN FRONT 1 SUBWOOFER 2 SURROUND SURR BACK FH / FW PRE OUT
(Single)

L
AUDIO
IN 1 IN 2 IN 4 IN 5 IN 6 DC OUTPUT ADAPTER PORT
MONITOR
(VIDEO) (DVD) (DVR/BDR) (OUTPUT 5 V
OUT
R
HDMI BD IN OUT for WIRELESS LAN LAN
ASSIGNABLE
(OUTPUT
(10/100) 0.1 A MAX)
5V
1 6 0.6 A MAX)
CENTER
ANTENNA ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO SIRIUS COAXIAL OPTICAL
ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE
RS-232C AM LOOP FM UNBAL 75 SPEAKERS Y PB PR
A R FRONT L CENTER R SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK L(Single) FRONT HEIGHT / FRONT WIDE / B MONITOR IN IN 1 IN 2 IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 OUT
R L IN 1 OUT (DVD) (CD) (TV/SAT) (DVR/BDR) (VIDEO)
(DVD)
VIDEO
IN 2
(DVR/
BDR) ZONE 2 DVD TV/SAT VIDEO DVR/BDR CD
IN OUT IN IN IN OUT IN IN FRONT 1 SUBWOOFER 2 SURROUND SURR BACK FH / FW
(Single) PRE OUT
IN OUT L
OUT AUDIO
MONITOR
OUT
R
(OUTPUT 5 V CONTROL IR
150 mA MAX) CENTER
EXTENSION ANTENNA
RS-232C AM LOOP FM UNBAL 75 SPEAKERS A R FRONT L CENTER R SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK L(Single) FRONT HEIGHT / FRONT WIDE / B
R L

! If you want to listen to the sound of the TV over the receiver, connect the receiver and TV with audio IN

cables (page 17). OUT

IN OUT

— When the TV and receiver are connected by HDMI connections, if the TV supports the HDMI ARC (OUTPUT 5 V
150 mA MAX)
CONTROL IR

(Audio Return Channel) function, the sound of the TV is input to the receiver via the HDMI OUT EXTENSION

terminal, so there is no need to connect an audio cable. In this case, set TV Audio at HDMI Setup
to via HDMI (see HDMI Setup on page 45 ). ! Connect using an HDMI cable to listen to HD audio on the receiver. Do not use an HDMI cable to
! If you use an optical digital audio cable, you’ll need to tell the receiver which digital input you input video signals.
connected the player to (see The Input Setup menu on page 27 ). Depending on the video component, it may not be possible to output signals connected by HDMI
and other methods simultaneously, and it may be necessary to make output settings. Please refer
to the operating instructions supplied with your component for more information.
! If you want to listen to the sound of the TV over the receiver, connect the receiver and TV with audio
cables (page 17).
! If you use an optical digital audio cable, you’ll need to tell the receiver which digital input you
connected the player to (see The Input Setup menu on page 27 ).
18 En
 Connecting your equipment 03

Connecting an HDD/DVD recorder, BD recorder and other video Connecting a satellite/cable receiver or other set-top box
sources Satellite and cable receivers, and terrestrial digital TV tuners are all examples of so-called ‘set-top
This receiver has two sets of audio/video inputs and outputs suitable for connecting analog or digi- boxes’.
tal video devices, including HDD/DVD recorders and BD recorders. When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the set-top
When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the recorder box to (see The Input Setup menu on page 27 ).
to (see also The Input Setup menu on page 27 ). STB
HDD/DVD recorder, BD recorder, etc.

Select one
VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT DIGITAL OUT
VIDEO R ANALOG L COAXIAL OPTICAL
Select one
AUDIO IN VIDEO IN VIDEO OUT DIGITAL OUT AUDIO OUT
R ANALOG L VIDEO VIDEO COAXIAL OPTICAL R ANALOG L

IN 1 IN 2 IN 4 IN 5 IN 6 ADAPTER PORT
(VIDEO) BD IN (DVD) (DVR/BDR) DC OUTPUT
HDMI (OUTPUT 5 V
OUT for WIRELESS LAN
(OUTPUT
LAN 0.1 A MAX) AC IN
ASSIGNABLE 5V
(10/100)
1 6 0.6 A MAX)
ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO SIRIUS COAXIAL OPTICAL
IN 1 IN 2 IN 4 IN 5 IN 6 DC OUTPUT ADAPTER PORT Y PB PR
ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE
HDMI (VIDEO) BD IN (DVD) (DVR/BDR) (OUTPUT 5 V MONITOR IN IN 1 IN 2 IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 OUT
OUT for WIRELESS LAN
(OUTPUT
LAN 0.1 A MAX) AC IN IN 1 OUT (DVD) (CD) (TV/SAT) (DVR/BDR) (VIDEO)
ASSIGNABLE 5V
(10/100) (DVD)
1 6 0.6 A MAX) VIDEO
ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO SIRIUS COAXIAL OPTICAL IN 2
ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE (DVR/
Y PB PR IN IN 1 IN 2 IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 OUT CD
MONITOR BDR) ZONE 2 DVD TV/SAT VIDEO DVR/BDR
IN 1 OUT (DVD) (CD) (TV/SAT) (DVR/BDR) (VIDEO) OUT IN IN IN OUT IN IN FRONT 1 SUBWOOFER 2 SURROUND SURR BACK FH / FW PRE OUT
(Single)
(DVD)
VIDEO AUDIO L
IN 2
(DVR/ MONITOR
BDR) ZONE 2 DVD TV/SAT VIDEO DVR/BDR CD OUT
OUT IN IN IN OUT IN IN FRONT 1 SUBWOOFER 2 SURROUND SURR BACK FH / FW R
(Single) PRE OUT
L
AUDIO CENTER
ANTENNA
MONITOR
OUT
RS-232C AM LOOP FM UNBAL 75 SPEAKERS A R FRONT L CENTER R SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK L(Single) FRONT HEIGHT / FRONT WIDE / B
R R L

CENTER
ANTENNA
RS-232C AM LOOP FM UNBAL 75 SPEAKERS A R FRONT L CENTER R SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK L(Single) FRONT HEIGHT / FRONT WIDE / B
R L IN

IN OUT
OUT

IN
(OUTPUT 5 V CONTROL IR
IN OUT 150 mA MAX)
OUT
EXTENSION

(OUTPUT 5 V CONTROL IR
150 mA MAX)
EXTENSION
! If your set-top box is equipped with an HDMI output terminal, we recommend connecting it to the
receiver’s HDMI IN 1 or IN 2 terminal. When doing so, also connect the receiver and TV by HDMI
! In order to record, you must connect the analog audio cables (the digital connection is for playback (see Connecting using HDMI on page 17 ).
only) (page 52).
! If your HDD/DVD recorder, BD recorder, etc., is equipped with an HDMI output terminal, we
recommend connecting it to the receiver’s HDMI DVR/BDR IN terminal. When doing so, also
connect the receiver and TV by HDMI (see Connecting using HDMI on page 17 ).

En 19
03 Connecting your equipment

Connecting other audio components Connecting additional amplifiers

This receiver has both digital and analog inputs, allowing you to connect audio components for This receiver has more than enough power for any home use, but it’s possible to add additional
playback. amplifiers to every channel of your system using the pre-outs. Make the connections shown below
When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the compo- to add amplifiers to power your speakers.
nent to (see also The Input Setup menu on page 27 ).
ANALOG
INPUT
MD, DAT, etc.
L

R Front channel
amplifier
ANALOG
INPUT
Select one
DIGITAL IN AUDIO OUT DIGITAL OUT
R ANALOG L
Center channel
OPTICAL COAXIAL OPTICAL
amplifier (mono)
ANALOG
INPUT

R
Surround
channel amplifier
R DC OUTPUT ADAPTER PORT
(OUTPUT 5 V
OUT for WIRELESS LAN LAN AC IN
(OUTPUT
5V
(10/100) 0.1 A MAX) ANALOG
IN 1 IN 2 IN 4
(VIDEO) BD IN
IN 5
(DVD)
IN 6
(DVR/BDR) DC OUTPUT ADAPTER PORT 0.6 A MAX) INPUT
HDMI (OUTPUT 5 V SIRIUS COAXIAL OPTICAL
OUT for WIRELESS LAN
(OUTPUT
LAN 0.1 A MAX) AC IN ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE (10/100)
1 6
5V
0.6 A MAX)
NITOR
UT
IN IN 1
(DVD)
IN 2
(CD)
IN 1 IN 2 IN 3
(TV/SAT) (DVR/BDR) (VIDEO)
OUT L
ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO SIRIUS COAXIAL OPTICAL
ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE VIDEO
IN 1
(DVD)
Y PB PR MONITOR
OUT
IN IN 1
(DVD)
IN 2
(CD)
IN 1 IN 2 IN 3
(TV/SAT) (DVR/BDR) (VIDEO)
OUT
R Front height or Front wide
channel amplifier
CD
VIDEO IN FRONT 1 SUBWOOFER 2 SURROUND SURR BACK FH / FW PRE OUT
(Single)
IN 2
(DVR/ L
BDR) ZONE 2 DVD TV/SAT VIDEO DVR/BDR CD UDIO
OUT IN IN IN OUT IN IN FRONT 1 SUBWOOFER 2 SURROUND SURR BACK FH / FW PRE OUT
(Single) ANALOG
AUDIO L R INPUT
MONITOR CENTER
OUT
R L
CENTER R SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK L(Single) FRONT HEIGHT / FRONT WIDE / B
R L
Surround back
CENTER
ANTENNA
RS-232C AM LOOP FM UNBAL 75 SPEAKERS FRONT CENTER SURROUND R SURROUND BACK L(Single) FRONT HEIGHT / FRONT WIDE / B
R
A R L R L
R L
channel amplifier

IN ANALOG
INPUT Powered
IN OUT
OUT
subwoofer 2
(OUTPUT 5 V CONTROL IR
150 mA MAX)
EXTENSION
ANALOG
INPUT Powered
! If your turntable has line-level outputs (i.e., it has a built-in phono pre-amp), connect it to the CD subwoofer 1

inputs instead.
! You can’t hear HDMI audio through this receiver’s digital out jack. ! If you’re not using a subwoofer, change the front speaker setting (see Speaker Setting on page 64 ) to
LARGE.
! You can use the additional amplifier on the surround back channel pre-outs for a single speaker as
well. In this case plug the amplifier into the left (SURROUND BACK L (Single)) terminal only.
! The sound from the surround back terminals will depend on how you have configured the Speaker
system setting on page 66 .
! If you have two subwoofers, the second subwoofer can be connected to the SUBWOOFER 2
terminal. Connecting two subwoofers increases the bass sound to achieve more powerful sound
reproduction. In this case, the same sound is output from the two subwoofers.
! To hear sound only from the pre-outs, switch the speaker system to OFF, or simply disconnect any
speakers that are connected directly to the receiver.

20 En
 Connecting your equipment 03

5 Connect the FM wire antenna into the Basic MULTI-ZONE setup (ZONE 2)
Connecting AM/FM antennas FM antenna socket. MULTI-ZONE setup
For best results, extend the FM antenna fully 1 Connect a separate amplifier to the
Connect the AM loop antenna and the FM wire This receiver can power up to two independent
and fix to a wall or door frame. Don’t drape AUDIO ZONE 2 OUT jacks on this receiver.
antenna as shown below. To improve reception systems in separate rooms after you have made
loosely or leave coiled up. You should have a pair of speakers attached to
and sound quality, connect external antennas the proper MULTI-ZONE connections.
the sub zone amplifier as shown in the follow-
(see Connecting external antennas on page 21 ). Different sources can be playing in two zones at
ing illustration.
Connecting external antennas the same time or, depending on your needs, the
same source can also be used. The main and 2 Connect a TV monitor to the VIDEO
1 2 To improve FM reception, connect an external
sub zone have independent power (the main ZONE 2 OUT jack on this receiver.
FM antenna to FM UNBAL 75 W.
zone power can be off while sub zone is on) and Sub zone (ZONE 2) Main zone
the sub zone can be controlled by the remote or IN 1 IN 2 IN 4
HDMI (VIDEO) BD IN

3 front panel controls. ASSIGNABLE

1 6
ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO
VIDEO IN Y PB PR

5
IN 1
ANTENNA (DVD)

Making MULTI-ZONE connections

IN 2
AM LOOP FM UNBAL 75 (DVR/

75 Ω coaxial cable BDR) ZONE 2 ZONE 3

OUT OUT
DVD
IN
TV/SAT
IN
V

4
ANTENNA
It is possible to make these connections if you MONITOR
OUT

AM LOOP FM UNBAL 75
have a separate TV and speakers for the sub RS-232C AM LOOP
ANTENNA
FM UNBAL 75 SPEAKERS A

zone (ZONE 2). You will also need a separate AUDIO IN

a b c
amplifier if you are not using the MULTI-ZONE
R L IN

IN OUT
OUT

setup using speaker terminals (ZONE 2) on page (OUTPUT 5 V CONTROL IR

150 mA MAX)

To improve AM reception, connect a 5 m to 6 m 21 for the sub zone. EXTENSION

(16 ft. to 20 ft.) length of vinyl-coated wire to the

AM LOOP terminals without disconnecting the MULTI-ZONE listening options
1 Pull off the protective shields of both supplied AM loop antenna. The following table shows the signals that can MULTI-ZONE setup using speaker
AM antenna wires. For the best possible reception, suspend hori- be output to ZONE 2:
terminals (ZONE 2)
2 Push open the tabs, then insert one zontally outdoors.
Sub You must select ZONE 2 in Speaker system set-
wire fully into each terminal, then release Input functions available
Outdoor antenna Zone ting on page 66 to use this setup.
the tabs to secure the AM antenna wires.
DVD, TV/SAT, DVR/BDR, VIDEO, 1 Connect a pair of speakers to the
3 Fix the AM loop antenna to the HOME MEDIA GALLERY, iPod/USB,
Indoor antenna surround back speaker terminals.
attached stand. ANTENNA (vinyl-coated wire) ZONE 2 CD, TUNER, ADAPTER PORT, SIRIUS
To fix the stand to the antenna, bend in the AM LOOP FM UNBAL 75
(Outputs analog audio, composite
direction indicated by the arrow (fig. a) then clip video.)
5 m to 6 m
the loop onto the stand (fig. b). (16 ft. to 20 ft.) It is not possible to down-convert the audio
! If you plan to mount the AM antenna to a and video input signals from the HDMI input
wall or other surface, secure the stand with terminals, digital input terminals (OPTICAL and
screws (fig. c) before clipping the loop to the COAXIAL) and the COMPONENT VIDEO input
stand. Make sure the reception is clear. terminals and output them to ZONE 2.
4 Place the AM antenna on a flat
surface and in a direction giving the best
reception.

En 21
03 Connecting your equipment

2 Connect a TV monitor to the VIDEO You will also need to connect the antenna and Turn on the DHCP server function of your
ZONE 2 OUT jack on this receiver. AC adapter to the SiriusConnectTM tuner. router. In case your router does not have the Important
! For instructions on playing the SIRIUS Radio, built-in DHCP server function, it is necessary ! Do not move the receiver with the Bluetooth
Sub zone (ZONE 2) Main zone
see Listening to Satellite Radio on page 32 . to set up the network manually. For details, see ADAPTER connected. Doing so could cause
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
1 6
IN 1 IN 2
OUT 2
DC OUTPUT
for WIRELESS LAN
(OUTPUT
5V
LAN
(10/10 Network Setup menu on page 68 . damage or faulty contact.
0.6 A MAX)
ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO AXIAL OPTICAL

LAN terminal specifications % Switch the receiver into standby

SIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE
Y PB PR 1 IN 2 IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 OUT

Connecting to the network

IN 1 D) (CD) (TV/SAT) (DVR/BDR) (VIDEO)
(DVD)

VIDEO IN
IN 2
(DVR/ ! LAN terminal : Ethernet jack and connect Bluetooth ADAPTER to the
through LAN interface
BDR) ZONE 2 ZONE 3
UBWOOFER
OUT OUT 2 SURROUND SURR BACK FH / FW PRE O

(10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)
(Single)

MONITOR
OUT
L

R
ADAPTER PORT.
ANTENNA
TER By connecting this receiver to the network via ! For instructions on playing the Bluetooth
the LAN terminal, you can listen to Internet wireless technology device, see Pairing the
RS-232C AM LOOP FM UNBAL
UND75 L R SURROUND BACK L(Single) FRONT HE

Note
R

L R
IN IR radio stations. To listen to Internet radio sta- ! Refer to the operation manual of the Bluetooth ADAPTER and Bluetooth wireless
tions, you must sign a contract with an ISP technology device on page 34 .
IN 1 IN

equipment you have as the connected

OUT

(OUTPUT 5 V
150 mA MAX)
EXTENSION
CONTROL (OU
TO (Internet Service Provider) beforehand. equipment and connection method may differ
When connected in this way, you can play audio depending on your Internet environment.
files stored on the components on the network, ! When using a broadband Internet connection, Connecting an iPod
including your computer, using HOME MEDIA a contract with an Internet service provider This receiver has a dedicated iPod terminal
GALLERY inputs. is required. For more details, contact your that will allow you to control playback of audio
nearest Internet service provider. content from your iPod using the controls of
Connecting a SiriusConnect Tuner DC OUTPUT
LAN
this receiver.
To receive SIRIUS Satellite Radio broadcasts,
for WIRELESS LAN
(OUTPUT
5V
(10/100)
0.6 A MAX)
L OPTICAL
you will need to activate your SiriusConnectTM BLE
IN 2
(CD)
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1 IN 2 IN 3
(TV/SAT) (DVR/BDR) (VIDEO)
OUT
Connecting optional Bluetooth
tuner. Internet iPod iPhone iPad AUTO SURR/ALC/ ADVANCED STANDARD

OFER 2 SURROUND SURR BACK FH / FW

(Single) PRE OUT
ADAPTER DIRECT CONTROL STREAM DIRECT SURROUND SURROUND HOME THX

IN 6
(DVR/BDR)
OUT
DC OUTPUT
for WIRELESS LAN
(OUTPUT
LAN
L
Modem When the Bluetooth® ADAPTER (AS-BT100 or
(10/100)

AS-BT200) is connected to this receiver, a prod-

5V R
0.6 A MAX)
SIRIUS COAXIAL OPTICAL
ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE

uct equipped with Bluetooth wireless technol-

MONITOR IN IN 1 IN 2 IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 OUT USB HDMI 3 INPUT
OUT (DVD) (CD) (TV/SAT) (DVR/BDR) (VIDEO) 5V 2.1 A
L R SURROUND BACK L(Single) FRONT HEIGHT / F
R
VIDEO

/BDR CD
IN
ogy (portable cell phone, digital music player,
IN FRONT 1 SUBWOOFER 2 SURROUND SURR BACK FH / FW PRE OUT
etc.) can be used to listen to music wirelessly.
(Single)
iPod iPhone iPad
L
AUDIO

R ! The Bluetooth wireless technology enabled

device must support A2DP profiles.
CENTER

T L CENTER R SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK L(Single) FRONT HEIGH

LAN
iPod
! Pioneer does not guarantee proper connection
R
3 2 1 WAN

Router and operation of this unit with all Bluetooth

iPod cable
wireless technology enabled devices. (supplied)
LAN cable MENU

(sold separately) Bluetooth® ADAPTER

 

Antenna
to LAN port 
DC OUTPUT ADAPTER PORT
(OUTPUT 5 V
for WIRELESS LAN LAN AC IN
SiriusConnectTM
(OUTPUT
(10/100) 0.1 A MAX)
5V

PC
0.6 A MAX)
SIRIUS
OPTICAL
H

HOME tuner N2
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 OUT
CD) (TV/SAT) (DVR/BDR) (VIDEO)

SIR Connect the LAN terminal on this receiver to

IUS ER 2 SURROUND SURR BACK FH / FW PRE OUT
the LAN terminal on your router (with or with-
H (Single)

out the built-in DHCP server function) with a R

straight LAN cable (CAT 5 or higher).

AC adapter L R SURROUND BACK L(Single) FRONT HEIGHT / FRONT WIDE / B
R L

22 En
 Connecting your equipment 03

% Switch the receiver into standby then % Switch the receiver into standby 1 Connect the IR receiver sensor to the IR
use the supplied iPod cable to connect then connect your USB device to the 2
DC OUTPUT
for WIRELESS LAN
(OUTPUT
LAN
ADAPTER PORT
(OUTPUT 5 V
0.1 A MAX)
IN jack on the rear of this receiver.
(10/100)

your iPod to the iPod iPhone iPad USB USB terminal on the front panel of this
5V
0.6 A MAX)
L OPTICAL
Closet or shelving unit
BLE ASSIGNABLE

terminal on the front panel of this receiver.

IN 2 IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 OUT
(CD) (TV/SAT) (DVR/BDR) (VIDEO)

Internet
receiver. ! This receiver does not support a USB hub. Pioneer Non-Pioneer
OOFER 2 SURROUND SURR BACK FH / FW PRE OUT
component component
! It is also possible to connect using the cable ! For instructions on playing the USB device,
(Single)

L
Modem
included with the iPod, but in this case it is not see Playing a USB device on page 30 . R

possible to view pictures via the receiver. L R SURROUND BACK L(Single) FRONT HEIGHT / FRONT WIDE / B CONTROL IR
R L

! For the cable connection, also refer to the

operating instructions for your iPod. Connecting an HDMI-equipped Router
IN OUT IN

! For instructions on playing the iPod, see component to the front panel IN 4 IN 5

Playing an iPod on page 29 .

IN 1 IN 2 BD IN
HDMI (VIDEO) (DVD)

input WAN ASSIGNABLE

1 6
ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO
Y PB PR
IN 1
(DVD)

Connecting a USB device

IN 2
(DVR/
BDR) ZONE 2 DVD TV/SAT VIDEO DVR/
iPod iPhone iPad AUTO SURR/ALC/ ADVANCED STANDARD OUT IN IN IN OUT
DIRECT CONTROL STREAM DIRECT SURROUND SURROUND HOME THX

It is possible to play audio and photo files by MONITOR

OUT

connecting USB devices to this receiver. It ANTENNA

RS-232C AM LOOP FM UNBAL 75 SPEAKERS
is also possible to connect a USB keyboard A R FRONT
DC 5V Ethernet WPS
USB HDMI 3 INPUT
(US-international layout) to the receiver to enter 5V 2.1 A
Wireless LAN converter (AS-WL300) IN

text in the following GUI screens. OUT

IN OUT

iPod iPhone iPad

! Change the input name in the Input Setup (OUTPUT 5 V CONTROL IR
150 mA MAX)

menu (page 27). EXTENSION

! Add names to radio station presets (page 32). Connecting an IR receiver

If you keep your stereo components in a closed
iPod iPhone iPad AUTO SURR/ALC/ ADVANCED STANDARD cabinet or shelving unit, or you wish to use the
DIRECT CONTROL STREAM DIRECT SURROUND SURROUND IR receiver
Video camera (etc.) sub zone remote control in another zone, you
can use an optional IR receiver (such as a Niles
or Xantech unit) to control your system instead 2 Connect the IR IN jack of another
5V
USB
2.1 A
HDMI 3 INPUT of the remote sensor on the front panel of this component to the IR OUT jack on the rear
Connecting to a wireless LAN receiver. of this receiver to link it to the IR receiver.
! Remote operation may not be possible if direct Please see the manual supplied with your IR
Wireless connection to the network is possible
iPod iPhone iPad

light from a strong fluorescent lamp is shining receiver for the type of cable necessary for the
through a wireless LAN connection. Use the
on the IR receiver remote sensor window. connection.
separately sold AS-WL300 for connection.
! Note that other manufacturers may not use ! If you want to link a Pioneer component to
! For instructions on setting the wireless LAN
the IR terminology. Refer to the manual that the IR receiver, see Operating other Pioneer
converter, see Network Setup menu on page
came with your component to check for IR components with this unit’s sensor on page
68 .
compatibility. 24 to connect to the CONTROL jacks instead
! If using two remote controls (at the same of the IR OUT jack.
USB mass
storage device time), the IR receiver’s remote sensor takes
priority over the remote sensor on the front
USB keyboard
panel.

En 23
03 Connecting your equipment

IN 4
! Do not use any power cord other than the one
Operating other Pioneer
IN 1 IN 2
(VIDEO) BD IN
supplied with this unit.
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
1 6

components with this unit’s ! Do not use the supplied power cord for any
ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO
Y PB PR
IN 1

purpose other than that described below.

(DVD)

sensor IN 2
(DVR/
BDR) ZONE 2
OUT
DVD
IN
TV/SAT
IN
! The receiver should be disconnected by
Many Pioneer components have SR CONTROL MONITOR removing the mains plug from the wall
jacks which can be used to link components
OUT

socket when not in regular use, e.g., when on

together so that you can use just the remote RS-232C AM LOOP
ANTENNA
FM UNBAL 75 SPEAKERS
vacation.
sensor of one component. When you use a ! If you have connected speakers with a 6 W
remote control, the control signal is passed IN

IN OUT impedance, change the impedance setting

along the chain to the appropriate component.
OUT

before turning on the power.

! If you want to control all your components (OUTPUT 5 V
150 mA MAX)
CONTROL IR

using this receiver’s remote control, see page

EXTENSION
1 Plug the supplied power cord into the
54. AC IN socket on the back of the receiver.
! If you have connected a remote control to the IN OUT IN OUT 2 Plug the other end into a power outlet.
CONTROL CONTROL
CONTROL IN jack (using a mini-plug cable), ! After this receiver is connected to an AC
you won’t be able to control this unit using the outlet, a 2 second to 10 second HDMI
remote sensor. initialization process begins. You cannot
carry out any operations during this process.
Important 3 Continue the chain in the same way for The HDMI indicator in the front panel display
! Note that if you use this feature, make sure as many components as you have. blinks during this process, and you can turn
that you also have at least one set of analog on this receiver once it has stopped blinking.
audio, video or HDMI jacks connected to When you set the Control with HDMI to OFF,
another component for grounding purposes. Plugging in the receiver you can skip this process. For details about
the Control with HDMI feature, see Control
1 Decide which component you want to Only plug in after you have connected all your
with HDMI function on page 45 .
use the remote sensor of. components to this receiver, including the
When you want to control any component in the speakers.
chain, this is the remote sensor at which you’ll
point the corresponding remote control. CAUTION
2 Connect the CONTROL OUT jack of that ! Handle the power cord by the plug part. Do
component to the CONTROL IN jack of not pull out the plug by tugging the cord, and
another Pioneer component. never touch the power cord when your hands
Use a cable with a mono mini-plug on each end are wet, as this could cause a short circuit or
for the connection. electric shock. Do not place the unit, a piece of
furniture, or other object on the power cord or
pinch the cord in any other way. Never make
a knot in the cord or tie it with other cables.
The power cords should be routed so that they
are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged
power cord can cause a fire or give you an
electric shock. Check the power cord once in a
while. If you find it damaged, ask your nearest
Pioneer authorized independent service
company for a replacement.
24 En
 Basic Setup 04

! Using the Full Auto MCACC Setup will

Basic Setup
If you have a tripod, use it to place the micro-
overwrite any existing settings for the MCACC phone so that it’s about ear level at your
preset you select. normal listening position. If you do not have
! Before using the Full Auto MCACC Setup, the a tripod, use some other object to install the
2 Press on the remote control, headphones should be disconnected. microphone.
Switching the speaker then press HOME MENU. Install the microphone on a stable floor.
impedance A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen Placing the microphone on any of the following
CAUTION
We recommend using speakers of 8 W with this appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and surfaces may make accurate measurement
! The test tones used in the Full Auto MCACC
system, but it is possible to switch the imped- ENTER to navigate through the screens and impossible:
Setup are output at high volume.
ance setting if you plan to use speakers with a 6 select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the ! Sofas or other soft surfaces.
W impedance rating. current menu. THX® ! High places such as tabletops and sofa tops.
! THX is a trademark of THX Ltd. which is The Full Auto MCACC display appears once the
1 Switch the receiver into standby. 3 Select ‘System Setup’ from the Home
registered in some jurisdictions. All rights microphone is connected.
2 While holding down ENTER on the Menu.
reserved.
front panel, press u STANDBY/ON. 4 Select ‘OSD Language’ from the 1a.Full Auto MCACC
1 Press u RECEIVER to switch on the A/V RECEIVER
The display shows RESET c NO d. System Setup menu.
receiver and your TV. Speaker System
EQ Type
: Normal(SB/FH)
: SYMMETRY

3 Use TUNE i/j to select SPEAKER c 5 Select the desired language. Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this
MCACC
THX Speaker
: M1.MEMORY 1
: NO

8W d, and then use PRESET k/l to select 6 Select ‘OK’ to change the language. receiver.
SPEAKER 8W or SPEAKER 6W. The setting is completed and the System Setup
START

2 Connect the microphone to the MCACC

! SPEAKER 8W – Use this setting if your menu reappears automatically. SETUP MIC jack on the front panel.
speakers are rated at 8 W or more. Exit Return

Push down on the lower portion of the front

! SPEAKER 6W – Use this setting if your
panel door to access the MCACC SETUP MIC
speakers are rated at 6 W. Automatically conducting ! If you leave the GUI screen for over five
jack.
minutes, the screen saver will appear.
optimum sound tuning (Full
Auto MCACC) 3 Select the parameters you want to set.
Changing the OSD display MULTI-ZONE
CONTROL ON/OFF
iPod iPhone iPad
DIRECT CONTROL
AUTO SURR/ALC/
STREAM DIRECT ! When data measurement is taken, the
language (OSD Language) The Full Auto MCACC Setup measures the reverb characteristics data (both before- and
acoustic characteristics of your listening area, after-calibration) that this receiver had been
The language used on the Graphical User
taking into account ambient noise, speaker storing will be overwritten.
Interface screen can be changed. PHONES MCACC USB
connection and speaker size, and tests for both SETUP MIC 5V 2.1 A
! When measurement is taken of the reverb
! The explanations in these operating
channel delay and channel level. After you have characteristics data other than SYMMETRY,
instructions are for when English is selected
set up the microphone provided with your sys-
iPod iPhone iPad

for the GUI screen. the data are not measured after the
tem, the receiver uses the information from a correction. If you will need to measure after
1 Press u RECEIVER to switch on the series of test tones to optimize the speaker set- Microphone
correcting data, take the measurement
receiver and your TV. tings and equalization for your particular room. using the EQ Professional menu in the
Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to
Manual MCACC setup (page 62).
this receiver (for example, if you connected this
Important If the speakers are connected using any setup
receiver to the VIDEO jacks on your TV, make
! Make sure the microphone and speakers are other than Normal(SB/FH), be sure to set
sure that the VIDEO input is now selected). Tripod
not moved during the Full Auto MCACC Setup. Speaker System before the Full Auto MCACC
Setup. See Speaker system setting on page 66 .
Make sure there are no obstacles between the
speakers and the microphone.

En 25
04 Basic Setup

! Speaker System – Shows the current select RETRY after checking for ambient perform the Full Auto MCACC procedure
settings. When this is selected and ENTER is noise (see Problems when using the Auto again.
Problems when using the Auto
pressed, the speaker system selection screen MCACC Setup on page 26 ) and verifying the — If the connections were right, select MCACC Setup
appears. Select the proper speaker system, mic connection. If there doesn’t seem to be GO NEXT and continue. If the room environment is not optimal for the
then press RETURN to return. a problem, you can simply select GO NEXT 7 Make sure ‘OK’ is selected, then press Auto MCACC Setup (too much background
If you are planning on bi-amping your front and continue. ENTER. noise, echo off the walls, obstacles blocking
speakers, or setting up a separate speaker A progress report is displayed on-screen while the speakers from the microphone) the final
1a.Full Auto MCACC
system in another room, read through A/V RECEIVER
the receiver outputs more test tones to deter- settings may be incorrect. Check for household
Speaker system setting on page 66 and make Now Analyzing... 2/9
mine the optimum receiver settings. appliances (air conditioner, fridge, fan, etc.),
sure to connect your speakers as necessary Environment Check
Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this is that may be affecting the environment and
Ambient Noise : OK
before continuing to step 4. Microphone
Speaker YES/NO :
:
happening. It may take 3 to 10 minutes. switch them off if necessary. If there are any
! EQ Type – This determines how the 1a.Full Auto MCACC
instructions showing in the front panel display,
frequency balance is adjusted. L :
A/V RECEIVER
YES
8 The Full Auto MCACC Setup procedure please follow them.
! MCACC – The six MCACC presets are used Exit
FHL
C
:
:
YES
YES Cancel is completed and the Home Menu menu ! Some older TVs may interfere with the
FHR : YES

for storing surround sound settings for

R
SR
:
:
YES
YES
reappears automatically. operation of the microphone. If this seems to
different listening positions. Simply choose
SBR
SBL
:
:
YES
YES Be sure to disconnect the microphone from be happening, switch off the TV when doing
SL : YES

an unused preset for now (you can rename it 10

SW : YES
this receiver upon completion of the Full Auto the Auto MCACC Setup.
OK RETRY

later in Data Management on page 65 ). MCACC Setup.

! THX Speaker – Select YES when using THX
Exit Cancel
The settings made in the Full Auto MCACC
speakers (all speakers other than the front Setup should give you excellent surround
The configuration shown on-screen should sound from your system, but it is also possible
speakers are set to SMALL). In other cases,
reflect the actual speakers you have. to adjust these settings manually using The
leave at NO.
! If you see an ERR message (or the speaker Advanced MCACC menu on page 60 or The
4 Press then select START. configuration displayed isn’t correct), System Setup and Other Setup menus on page
5 Follow the instructions on-screen. there may be a problem with the speaker 66 .
Make sure the microphone is connected, and connection. If selecting RETRY doesn’t work, ! Depending on the characteristics of your
if you’re using a subwoofer, make sure it is turn off the power and check the speaker room, sometimes identical speakers with
switched on and set to a comfortable volume connections. If there doesn’t seem to be a cone sizes of around 12 cm (5 inches) will
level. problem, you can simply use i/j to select end up with different size settings. You
6 Wait for the test tones to finish, then the speaker and k/l to change the setting can correct the setting manually using the
confirm the speaker configuration in the and continue. Manual speaker setup on page 66 .
! If the speaker is not pointed to the ! The subwoofer distance setting may be
GUI screen.
microphone (listening position) or when farther than the actual distance from the
A progress report is displayed on-screen while
using speakers that affect the phase listening position. This setting should
the receiver outputs test tones to determine
(dipole speakers, reflective speakers, etc.), be accurate (taking delay and room
the speakers present in your setup. Try to be as
Reverse Phase may be displayed even if the characteristics into account) and generally
quiet as possible while it’s doing this.
speakers are properly connected. does not need to be changed.
If no operations are performed for 10 seconds
If Reverse Phase is displayed, the speaker’s ! If Full Auto MCACC Setup measurement
while the speaker configuration check screen
wiring (+ and –) may be inverted. Check the results are incorrect due to the interaction of
is being displayed, the Full Auto MCACC Setup
speaker connections. the speakers and viewing environment, we
will resume automatically. In this case, you
— If the connections were wrong, turn off recommend adjusting the settings manually.
don’t need to select ‘OK’ and press ENTER in
the power, disconnect the power cord,
step 7.
then reconnect properly. After this,
! With error messages (such as Too much
ambient noise! or Check microphone.),
26 En
 Basic Setup 04

5 Select the input(s) to which you’ve

The Input Setup menu Input function default and Operation Mode Setup
connected your component.
For example, if your DVD player only has an possible settings
You only need to make settings in the This receiver is equipped with a great number
Input Setup menu if you didn’t hook up your optical output, you will need to change the DVD The terminals on the receiver generally cor- of functions and settings. The Operation Mode
digital equipment according to the default input function’s Digital In setting from COAX-1 respond to the name of one of the input func- feature is provided for users who find it difficult
settings (see Input function default and possible (default) to the optical input you’ve connected tions. If you have connected components to to master all these functions and settings.
settings on page 27 ). In this case, you need to it to. The numbering (OPT-1 to OPT-2) corre- this receiver differently from (or in addition to) One of two settings can be selected for the
tell the receiver what equipment is hooked up sponds with the numbers beside the inputs on the defaults below, see The Input Setup menu Operation Mode: Expert and Basic.
to which terminal so the buttons on the remote the back of the receiver. on page 27 to tell the receiver how you’ve
1 Press on the remote control,
control correspond to the components you’ve connected up. The dots (k) indicate possible
6 When you’re finished, proceed to the then press HOME MENU.
connected. assignments.
settings for other inputs. A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen
1 Press on the remote control, There are optional settings in addition to the Input Input Terminals appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and
then press HOME MENU. assignment of the input jacks: function ENTER to navigate through the screens and
HDMI Digital Component
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen ! Input Name – You can choose to rename the select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the
input function for easier identification. Select BD (BD)
appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and current menu.
ENTER to navigate through the screens and Rename to do so, or Default to return to the DVD IN 5 COAX-1 IN 1
2 Select ‘Operation Mode Setup’ from
select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the system default. k
TV/SAT OPT-1 k the Home Menu.
current menu. ! Input Skip – When set to ON, that input <a>
is skipped when selecting the input using DVR/BDR IN 6 OPT-2 IN 2
3 Select the Operation Mode setting you
2 Select ‘System Setup’ from the want.
INPUT SELECT. (DVD and other inputs can VIDEO IN 4 OPT-3
Home Menu. k
! Expert (default) – Users can set all the
be still be selected directly with the input
3 Select ‘Input Setup’ from the HDMI 1 IN 1 functions by themselves.
function buttons.)
System Setup menu. HDMI 2 IN 2 ! Basic – The number of operable functions is
7 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
restricted, and functions whose operations
4.System Setup You will return to the System Setup menu. HDMI 3
IN 3
A/V RECEIVER
(front panel) are restricted are automatically set to achieve
a.Manual SP Setup
b. Input Setup the Pioneer-recommended sound and
c. OSD Language HOME
d. Network Setup
MEDIA
picture quality. The functions that can be
e. HDMI Setup
f. Other Setup 4b.Input Setup
A/V RECEIVER GALLERY operated are shown below. They can be set
Input : DVD as necessary by referring to the operating
Input Name : Rename iPod/USB
Input Skip : OFF instructions.
Digital In : COAX-1
Exit
HDMI Input :
Return
DVD CD COAX-2
Component In : In-1
Operable
TUNER functions/ Descriptions Page
ADAPTER items
Exit Finish
PORT HOME MENU
SIRIUS k Full Auto Makes high precision
4 Select the input function that you MCACC sound field settings easily.
25
a With Control with HDMI set to ON, assignments
want to set up.
cannot be made (see Control with HDMI function on Input names can be
The default names correspond with the names
page 45 ). Input Name changed as desired for 27
next to the terminals on the rear panel (such as easier use.
DVD or BD) which, in turn, correspond with the
Inputs not being used are
names on the remote control. Input Skip 27
skipped (not displayed).

En 27
04 Basic Setup

Operable Operable
functions/ Descriptions Page functions/ Descriptions Page
items items
Software Updates to the latest ver- PHASE CTRL
71 Plays with phase shifting in
Update sion of the software. (Phase 38
the low range corrected.
Network Checks the receiver’s IP Control)
70
Information address. Switches the input to iPod/
iPod iPhone
Pairing Pairs with a Bluetooth USB and sets the mode
iPad DIRECT 30
Bluetooth device using AS-BT100 or 34 allowing operation from
CONTROL
Setup AS-BT200. the iPod.

Audio Parameters 4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

MCACC You will return to the Home Menu.
Selects your favorite
(MCACC 48
MCACC preset memory.
preset)
DELAY Adjusts the delay time of
48
(Sound Delay) the overall sound.
S.RTRV
Plays compressed sound
(Auto Sound 48
with high sound quality.
Retriever)
DUAL Dual monaural audio
48
(Dual Mono) setting.
V.SB Creates a virtual surround
(Virtual Sur- back channel sound for 48
round Back) playback.
V.HEIGHT Creates a virtual height
(Virtual channel sound for play- 48
Height) back.
V.DEPTH
Plays with a sound field
(Virtual 48
suited for 3D images.
Depth)
Other functions
INPUT
SELECT
Switches the input. 29
(INPUT
SELECTOR)
MASTER
Use to set the listening
VOLUME +/–, 29
volume.
MUTE
LISTENING Only Pioneer-recommended
36
MODE modes can be selected.
Plays using the PQLS
PQLS 46
function.

28 En
 Basic playback 05

Basic playback Playing an iPod

1 Press u RECEIVER to switch on the
receiver and your TV.
This receiver has the iPod iPhone iPad USB See Connecting an iPod on page 22 .
terminal that will allow you to control playback ! It is also possible to operate the iPod on the
! See also Listening to your system on page 36 iPod itself, without using the TV screen. For
Playing a source for information on different ways of listening
of audio content from your iPod using the con-
trols of this receiver. details, see Switching the iPod controls on
Here are the basic instructions for playing a to sources.
! This receiver is compatible with the audio page 30 .
source (such as a DVD disc) with your home It is possible to check on the front panel dis-
and video of the iPod nano (audio only for the 2 Press iPod USB on the remote control
theater system. play whether or not multi-channel playback is
iPod nano 1G/2G), iPod fifth generation (audio to switch the receiver to the iPod/USB.
1 Switch on your system components being performed properly. For details, see Auto
only), iPod classic, iPod touch, iPhone and Loading appears in the GUI screen while the
and receiver. Surround, ALC and Stream Direct with different
iPad. However, some of the functions may be receiver verifies the connection and retrieves
Start by switching on the playback compo- input signal formats on page 87 .
restricted for some models. The receiver is not data from the iPod.
nent (for example a DVD player), your TV and When using a surround back speaker,
compatible with the iPod shuffle. When the display shows the iPod Top menu
subwoofer (if you have one), then the receiver 2DIGITAL is displayed when playing Dolby
! This receiver has been developed and tested you’re ready to play music from the iPod.
(press u RECEIVER). Digital 5.1 channel signals, and DTS is dis-
for the software version of iPod/iPhone/iPad ! The controls of your iPod will be inoperable
Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this played when playing DTS 5.1-channel signals.
indicated on the website of Pioneer (http:// when connected to this receiver.
receiver. If the display does not correspond to the input
pioneer.jp/homeav/support/ios/na/).
signal and listening mode, check the connec-
2 Select the input function you want to ! Installing software versions other than
tions and settings. Playing back audio files stored on
play. indicated on the website of Pioneer to your
5 Use the MASTER VOLUME +/– to adjust iPod/iPhone/iPad may result in incompatibility an iPod
You can use the input function buttons on the
remote control, INPUT SELECT, or the front the volume level. with this receiver. To navigate songs on your iPod, you can take
panel INPUT SELECTOR dial. Turn down the volume of your TV so that all ! iPod, iPhone and iPad are licensed for advantage of the GUI screen of your TV con-
! If you need to manually switch the input sound is coming from the speakers connected reproduction of non-copyrighted materials nected to this receiver. You can also control all
signal type press SIGNAL SEL (page 38). to this receiver. or materials the user is legally permitted to operations for music in the front panel display
reproduce. of this receiver.
3 Press to the receiver operation
Playing a source with HDMI ! Features such as the equalizer cannot ! Note that characters that cannot be displayed
mode.
connection be controlled using this receiver, and we on this receiver are displayed as #.
4 Press AUTO/ALC/DIRECT recommend switching the equalizer off before ! This feature is not available for photos on your
(AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT) to % Use INPUT SELECT to select the input connecting. iPod. To display photos, switch iPod operation
select ‘AUTO SURROUND’ and start function connected to the receiver’s HDMI ! Pioneer cannot under any circumstances to the iPod (see Switching the iPod controls on
playback of the source. input terminals. accept responsibility for any direct or indirect page 30 ).
If you’re playing a Dolby Digital or DTS surround You can also perform the same operation by loss arising from any inconvenience or loss
sound source, you should hear surround sound. using the INPUT SELECTOR dial on the front of recorded material resulting from the iPod Finding what you want to play
If you are playing a stereo source, you will only panel or by pressing HDMI on the remote con- failure. When your iPod is connected to this receiver,
hear sound from the front left/right speakers in trol repeatedly. ! When listening to a track on the iPod in the you can browse songs stored on your iPod by
the default listening mode. ! Set the HDMI parameter in Setting the Audio main zone, it is possible to control the sub playlist, artist name, album name, song name,
! You may need to check the digital audio options on page 48 to THROUGH if you want zone, but not to listen to a different track in genre or composer, similar to using your iPod
output settings on your DVD player or digital to hear HDMI audio output from your TV (no the sub zone from the one playing in the main directly.
satellite receiver. It should be set to output sound will be heard from this receiver). zone.
Dolby Digital, DTS and 88.2 kHz / 96 kHz PCM 1 Use i/j to select ‘Music’ from the
! If the video signal does not appear on your
(2 channel) audio, and if there is an MPEG iPod Top menu.
TV, try adjusting the resolution settings on
audio option, set this to convert the MPEG your component or display. Note that some
audio to PCM. components (such as video game units) have
resolutions that may not be converted. In this
case, use an analog video connection. En 29
05 Basic playback

2 Use i/j to select a category, then 1 Press iPod CTRL to switch the iPod ! Press iPod USB to switch the remote control
press ENTER to browse that category. controls. Note to the iPod/USB operation mode.
! To return to the previous level any time, press This enables operation and display on your If an Over Current message lights in the dis- AUTO/ALC PGM MEMORY MENU
AUDIO VIDEO DIRECT STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR
RETURN. iPod, and this receiver’s remote control and GUI play, the power requirements of the USB device PARAMETER
LIST
PARAMETER
TUNE TOOLS
HDD DVD

3 Use i/j to browse the selected screen become inactive. are too high for this receiver. Try following the TOP MENU T.EDIT
THX PHASE CTRL STATUS

BAND GUIDE

category (e.g., albums). 2 Press iPod CTRL again to switch back to points below: TV / DTV MPX PQLS

! Use k/l to move to previous/next levels. the receiver controls. ! Switch the receiver off, then on again. PRESET ENTER PRESET

HDMI OUT AUDIO

! Reconnect the USB device with the receiver CATEGORY RETURN 1 2 3
4 Continue browsing until you arrive at switched off. HOME
TUNE
SIGNAL SEL MCACC SLEEP INFO
MENU
what you want to play, then press d to Note ! Use a dedicated AC adapter (supplied with the
iPod CTRL
4 5 6 DISP

start playback. ! Change the receiver’s input to the device) for USB power.
iPod in one action by pressing the If this doesn’t remedy the problem, it is likely
iPod iPhone iPad DIRECT CONTROL button Playing back photo files stored on
Note your USB device is incompatible.
on the front panel to enable iPod operations a USB memory device
! You can play all of the songs in a particular
on the iPod. ! Photo files cannot be played in the sub zone.
category by selecting the All item at the top of Playing back audio files stored on
each category list. For example, you can play a USB memory device 1 Use i/j to select ‘Photos’ from the
all the songs by a particular artist. USB Top menu.
Playing a USB device The maximum number of levels that you can
select in Step 2 (below) is 8. Also, you can dis- 2 Use i/j to select a folder, then press
Basic playback controls It is possible to play files using the USB inter-
face on the front of this receiver. play and play back up to 30 000 folders and files ENTER to browse that folder.
This receiver’s remote control buttons can be within a USB memory device. ! To return to the previous level any time, press
used for basic playback of files stored on an ! Compatible USB devices include external
! Note that non-Roman characters in the playlist RETURN.
iPod. magnetic hard drives, portable flash memory
drives (particularly key drives) and digital audio are displayed as #. 3 Continue browsing until you arrive at
! Press iPod USB to switch the remote control
players (MP3 players) of format FAT16/32. 1 Use i/j to select ‘Music’ from the what you want to play, then press d to
to the iPod/USB operation mode.
! Pioneer cannot guarantee compatibility USB Top menu. start playback.
AUDIO VIDEO
AUTO/ALC PGM MEMORY MENU
DIRECT STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR (operation and/or bus power) with all USB The selected content is displayed in full screen
PARAMETER PARAMETER
HDD DVD 2 Use i/j to select a folder, then press
LIST TUNE TOOLS
mass storage devices and assumes no and a slideshow starts.
THX PHASE CTRL STATUS
ENTER to browse that folder.
TOP MENU T.EDIT
responsibility for any loss of data that may After a slideshow launches, pressing ENTER
! To return to the previous level any time, press
BAND GUIDE

toggles between play and pause (only when

TV / DTV MPX PQLS
occur when connected to this receiver.
PRESET ENTER PRESET
RETURN.
HDMI OUT AUDIO
1 Press u RECEIVER to switch on the Theme on the Slideshow Setup is set to
CATEGORY RETURN 1 2 3
3 Continue browsing until you arrive at Normal (OFF)).
HOME SIGNAL SEL MCACC SLEEP INFO receiver and your TV.
MENU TUNE
4 5 6 DISP what you want to play, then press d to ! If the slideshow is left in the pause mode for
iPod CTRL
See Connecting a USB device on page 23 .
start playback. five minutes, the list screen reappears.
! During Audiobook playback, press i/j to ! Make sure the receiver is in standby when
! Copyrighted audio files cannot be played
switch the playback speed: Faster f Normal disconnecting the USB device.
back on this receiver. Basic playback controls
f Slower. 2 Press iPod USB on the remote control ! DRM-protected audio files cannot be played
to switch the receiver to the iPod/USB. back on this receiver. Button(s) What it does
Switching the iPod controls Loading appears in the GUI screen as this Starts displaying a photo and play-
receiver starts recognizing the USB device con- ENTER, d
You can switch over the iPod controls between Basic playback controls ing a slideshow.
the iPod and the receiver. nected. When the display shows the USB Top This receiver’s remote control buttons can be Stops the player and returns to the
menu you’re ready to play from the USB device. RETURN, k
! You cannot use this function, when an used for basic playback of files stored on USB previous menu.
iPod of fifth generation or iPod nano of first memory devices. o
Displays the previous photo content.
generation is connected. <a>

30 En
 Basic playback 05

Button(s) What it does About playable file formats

p
Displays the next photo content. The USB function of this receiver supports the following file formats. Note that some file formats
<a>
are not available for playback although they are listed as playable file formats.
e
Pauses/unpauses the slideshow.
<a>
Music files
DISP
Displays the photo information.
<a> Category Extension Stream
a You can only use this button when Theme on the Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 48 kHz
Slideshow Setup is set to Normal (OFF).
Quantization bitrate 16 bit
MP3 MPEG-1, 2, 2.5 Audio
.mp3 Channel 2 ch
Slideshow Setup <a> Layer-3
Bitrate 8 kbps to 320 kbps
Make the various settings for playing slide-
VBR/CBR Supported/Supported
shows of photo files here.
Sampling frequency 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz
1 Use i/j to select ‘Slideshow Setup’
WAV .wav LPCM Quantization bitrate 8 bit, 16 bit
from the USB Top menu.
Channel 2 ch, Monaural
2 Select the setting you want.
Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 48 kHz
! Theme – Add various effects to the
slideshow. Quantization bitrate 16 bit
WMA8/9
! Interval – Set the interval for switching the WMA .wma Channel 2 ch
<b>
photos. This may not be available depending Bitrate 8 kbps to 320 kbps
on the Theme setting. VBR/CBR Supported/Supported
! BGM – Play music files stored on the USB
a “MPEG Layer-3 audio decoding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia.”
device while displaying photos.
b Files encoded using Windows Media Codec 9 may be playable but some parts of the specification are not sup-
! Music Select – Select the folder containing ported; specifically, Pro, Lossless, Voice.
the music files to be played when BGM is set
to ON. Photo files
3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the USB Top menu. Category Extension
.jpg Meeting the following conditions:
.jpeg ! Baseline JPEG format (including files recorded in Exif/DCF
Format
JPEG .jpe format)
.jif ! Y:Cb:Cr - 4:4:4, 4:2:2 or 4:2:0
.jfif Resolution 30 to 8184 pixels vertical, 40 to 8184 pixels horizontal

En 31
05 Basic playback

! While listening to FM radio, press 4 Press ENTER.

Listening to the radio AUTO/ALC/DIRECT for Neural Surround. After pressing ENTER, the preset class and Listening to Satellite Radio
The following steps show you how to tune in to ! The Neural Surround mode can be selected number stop blinking and the receiver stores To listen to Satellite Radio, you’ll need to con-
FM and AM radio broadcasts using the auto- also with STANDARD. the station. nect a SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuner (sold sepa-
matic (search) and manual (step) tuning func- rately) to your Sirius-Ready receiver. SIRIUS
tions. If you already know the frequency of the Tuning directly to a station Listening to station presets Satellite Radio is available to residents of the
station you want, see Tuning directly to a sta- US (except Alaska and Hawaii) and Canada.
tion below. Once you are tuned to a station you 1 Press TUNER to select the tuner. 1 Press TUNER to select the tuner. Satellite Radio delivers a variety of commercial-
can memorize the frequency for recall later-see 2 Use BAND to change the band (FM or 2 Press CLASS to select the class in which free music from categories ranging from Pop,
Saving station presets on page 32 for more on AM), if necessary. the station is stored. Rock, Country, R&B, Dance, Jazz, Classical
how to do this. 3 Press D.ACCESS (Direct Access). Press repeatedly to cycle through classes A to and many more plus coverage of all the top
1 Press TUNER to select the tuner. G. professional and college sports including play
4 Use the number buttons to enter the by play games from select leagues and teams.
2 Use BAND to change the band (FM or frequency of the radio station. 3 Press PRESET k/l to select the
Additional programming includes expert sports
AM), if necessary. For example, to tune to 106.00 (FM), press 1, 0, station preset you want.
talk, uncensored entertainment, comedy, fam-
6, 0, 0. ! You can also use the number buttons on the
3 Tune to a station. ily programming, local traffic and weather and
If you make a mistake halfway through, press remote control to recall the station preset.
There are three ways to do this: news from your most trusted sources.
! Automatic tuning – To search for stations D.ACCESS twice to cancel the frequency and Once you’ve purchased a SIRIUS tuner you’ll
in the currently selected band, press and start over. Naming station presets need to activate it and subscribe to begin
hold TUNE i/j for about a second. The For easier identification, you can name your enjoying the service. Easy to follow installation
receiver will start searching for the next Saving station presets station presets. and setup instructions are provided with the
station, stopping when it has found one. If you often listen to a particular radio station, 1 Choose the station preset you want to SIRIUS tuner. There are a variety of program-
Repeat to search for other stations. it’s convenient to have the receiver store the name. ming packages available, including the option
! Manual tuning – To change the frequency frequency for easy recall whenever you want See Listening to station presets on page 32 for of adding “The Best of XM” programming to the
one step at a time, press TUNE i/j. to listen to that station. This saves the effort of how to do this. SIRIUS service. The “Best of XM” service is not
! High speed tuning – Press and hold TUNE manually tuning in each time. This receiver can available to SIRIUS Canada subscribers at this
i/j for high speed tuning. Release the 2 Press T.EDIT (TUNER EDIT). time. Please check with SIRIUS Canada for any
memorize up to 63 stations, stored in seven
button at the frequency you want. The display shows PRESET NAME, then a blink- updates using the numbers and web address
banks, or classes (A to G) of 9 stations each.
ing cursor at the first character position. below.
1 Tune to a station you want to 3 Input the name you want. Family friendly packages are also available to
Improving FM sound memorize. Use i/j to select a character, k/l to set the restrict channels featuring content that may be
If the TUNED or STEREO indicator doesn’t See Listening to the radio on page 32 for more position, and ENTER to confirm your selection. inappropriate for children.
light when tuning to an FM station because the on this. To subscribe to SIRIUS, U.S. and Canadian
signal is weak, press MPX to switch the receiver
2 Press T.EDIT (TUNER EDIT). customers can call 1-888-539-SIRI (1-888-539-
into mono reception mode. This should improve Note
The display shows PRESET MEMORY, then a 7474) or visit sirius.com (US) or siriuscanada.
the sound quality and allow you to enjoy the ! To erase a station name, simply repeat steps 1
blinking memory class. ca (Canada).
broadcast. to 3 and input eight spaces instead of a name.
3 Press CLASS to select one of the seven ! Once you have named a station preset, you SIRIUS, XM and all related marks and logos
classes, then press PRESET k/l to select can press DISP when listening to a station are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its
Using Neural Surround subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Service not
the station preset you want. to switch the display between name and
This feature uses Neural SurroundTM technolo- You can also use the number buttons to select a frequency. available in Alaska and Hawaii.
gies to achieve optimal surround sound from station preset.
FM radio.

32 En
 Basic playback 05

% Press SIRIUS to switch to the SIRIUS Selecting channels and browsing by 4 Press ENTER. their channel number and providing the
input. genre After pressing ENTER, the preset class and parental lock password.
For best reception, you may need to move the number stop blinking and the receiver stores ! Antenna Aiming – Check the strength of
From the SIRIUS Channel Guide, you can
SiriusConnectTM tuner antenna near a window the SIRIUS channel. satellite and terrestrial reception.
browse SIRIUS Radio channels in the order that
(refer to the manual for the SiriusConnectTM ! Memory Recall – Use i/j to browse your
they appear, or you can narrow your channel
Home tuner for antenna placement saved song information.
search by genre. Note
recommendations). ! Password Set – Set the parental lock
% Press i/j to enter the SIRIUS ! You can also press MEMORY during
! If after pressing SIRIUS the display shows password.
Channel Guide, then navigate through reception display to save the information of up
Antenna Error, try disconnecting the antenna to five songs. See Using the SIRIUS Menu on 3 When you’re finished press TOP MENU
and reconnecting. If the display shows the channels one at time with i/j, then
page 33 to recall this information. to return to the reception display.
Check Sirius Tuner, check the connection press ENTER to listen to the SIRIUS radio
! You can reset the Channel presets, Memory,
of the AC adapter and this receiver to the broadcast.
Channel Skip/Add, Parental Lock and
SiriusConnectTM tuner. ! To browse by genre, first press CATEGORY,
Password settings in Resetting the system on
! You can check the strength of reception in use i/j to select a genre, then press ENTER.
page 53 .
Using the SIRIUS Menu on page 33 . ! To cancel and exit any time, press RETURN.
Listening to channel presets
Note Note
! You can select channels directly by pressing 1 Press CLASS to select the class in which
! In order to activate your radio subscription,
D.ACCESS, then the three-digit channel the channel is stored.
you will need the SIRIUS ID (SID) which
number. Press repeatedly to cycle through classes A to
uniquely identifies your tuner. The SID may be
! You can press DISP to change SIRIUS Radio G.
found on a sticker located on the packaging,
or on the bottom of the tuner itself. The label information in the front panel display. 2 Press k/l to select the channel preset
will have a printed 12-digit SID number. When ! The currently selected channel is you want.
you have located the SID, write it down in the automatically chosen (without pressing You can also use the number buttons on the
space provided near the end of this manual. ENTER) after 10 seconds. remote control to recall the channel preset.
Contact SIRIUS on the internet at:
https://activate.siriusradio.com Saving channel presets Using the SIRIUS Menu
! Follow the prompts to activate your This receiver can memorize up to 63 channels, The SIRIUS Menu provides additional SIRIUS
subscription, or you can also call SIRIUS toll- stored in seven banks, or classes (A to G) of 9 Radio features.
free at 1-888-539-SIRIUS (1-888-539-7474). channels each.
! Select 0 (SIRIUS ID) from the GUI screen to 1 Press TOP MENU.
check the Radio ID of the SIRIUS Connect 1 Select the channel you want to
2 Use i/j to select a menu item, then
tuner (see Selecting channels and browsing by memorize.
press ENTER.
genre on page 33 ). See Selecting channels and browsing by genre
Choose from the following menu items:
on page 33 .
! Channel Skip/Add – Use i/j and ENTER
Listening to SIRIUS Radio 2 Press T.EDIT (TUNER EDIT). to select channels you would like to remove/
The display shows a blinking memory class. restore from/to the channel guide.
After connecting, you will be able to use this
3 Press CLASS to select one of the seven ! Parental Lock – Use i/j and ENTER to
receiver to select channels and navigate cat-
classes, then press k/l to select the select channels you would like to place under
egories using the GUI screen.
channel preset you want. parental lock. Channels put under parental
! It’s easiest if you have your TV switched on to
You can also use the number buttons to select a lock are not displayed in the Channel Guide,
take advantage of the GUI screens. You can,
station preset. but may be accessed by directly inputting
however, use just the front panel display to do
everything if you prefer.
En 33
05 Basic playback

be enjoyed on devices equipped with SCMS-T If pairing is successful, there is no need to 4 Select ‘Pairing Bluetooth Device’, then
Bluetooth ADAPTER for type Bluetooth wireless technology. performing the pairing operation below. press ENTER.
Wireless Enjoyment of Music ! With the AS-BT100, some functions may not ! When using the AS-BT200 only: This unit 5 Select the ‘Passcode’ setting you want.
be available on this receiver. complies with Bluetooth Specifications Select the same passcode as the Bluetooth
Device not Ver. 2.1. When this unit and another device
equipped with wireless technology device you wish to connect.
Bluetooth wireless
Remote control operation equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology ! 0000/1234/8888 – Select the passcode from
technology: The remote control supplied with this unit both comply with Bluetooth Specification Ver. these options. These are the passcodes that
Digital music
allows you to play and stop media, and perform 2.1, pairing of the two may be possible without can be used in most cases.
Bluetooth Bluetooth wireless player the need for inputting a password.
wireless technology + other operations. ! Others – Select to use a passcode other than
technology enabled device: Bluetooth audio ! It must be necessary that the Bluetooth In this case, a passcode may be displayed on those mentioned above.
enabled device: Digital music transmitter wireless technology enabled device supports this receiver and on the device equipped with
cell phone player (sold commercially) Bluetooth wireless technology. If this happens, 6 If you selected ‘Others’ in step 5, enter
AVRCP profiles.
check that the same passcode is displayed the passcode.
! Remote control operations cannot be
on this receiver and the device equipped Use i/j to select a number and k/l to move
guaranteed for all Bluetooth wireless
with Bluetooth wireless technology, then the cursor.
technology enabled devices.
select YES with the k and l keys and press 7 Follow the instructions displayed on
ENTER. After this, also perform the connection the GUI screen to conduct pairing with the
Music data Bluetooth ® Pairing the Bluetooth ADAPTER operation on the Bluetooth device to be Bluetooth wireless technology device.
ADAPTER and Bluetooth wireless connected. If the passcode does not match Switch on the Bluetooth wireless technology
This receiver technology device the code displayed on the Bluetooth device to device that you want to make pair, place it near
“Pairing” must be done before you start play- be connected, select NO to cancel pairing, the receiver and set it to the pairing mode.
back of Bluetooth wireless technology content then try starting over.
8 Check to see that the Bluetooth
ADVANCED
MCACC FL OFF HDMI iPod iPhone iPad

using the Bluetooth ADAPTER. Make sure to Press ADPT to set the ADAPTER PORT
INPUT
SELECTOR
MASTER
VOLUME

ADAPTER is detected by the Bluetooth

perform pairing the first time you operate the input, then conduct the pairing operation on
STANDBY /ON

wireless technology device.

system or any time pairing data is cleared. the Bluetooth wireless technology device.
When the Bluetooth wireless technology device
The pairing step is necessary to register the If pairing is successful, there is no need to
is connected:
Bluetooth wireless technology device to enable performing the pairing operation below.
Remote control CONNECTED appears in the receiver display.
Bluetooth communications. For more details, ! Pair one unit at a time.
operation ! The system can display alphanumeric
see also the operating instructions of your ! When connecting this receiver by Bluetooth
characters only. Other characters may not be
Bluetooth wireless technology device. connections with a device equipped with the
displayed correctly.
! Pairing is required when you first use the Bluetooth function to listen to music, do not
When the Bluetooth wireless technology device
Wireless music play Bluetooth wireless technology device and connect any devices other than this receiver
is not connected:
Bluetooth ADAPTER. by Bluetooth connection to the Bluetooth-
When the Bluetooth ADAPTER (AS-BT100 or Go back to the passcode setting in step 5. In
! To enable Bluetooth communication, pairing equipped device. If a Bluetooth connection is
AS-BT200) is connected to this unit, a product this case, perform the connection operation
should be done with both your system and already established with a device other than
equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology from the Bluetooth wireless technology device.
Bluetooth wireless technology device. this receiver, disconnect the other device
(portable cell phone, digital music player, etc.) 9 From the Bluetooth wireless
! If the Bluetooth wireless technology device’s before connecting this receiver.
can be used to listen to music wirelessly. Also, technology device list, select Bluetooth
security code is “0000”, there is no need to 1 Press on the remote control,
by using a commercially available transmit- ADAPTER and enter the Passcode selected
make the security code setting on the receiver. then press HOME MENU.
ter supporting Bluetooth wireless technol-
Press ADPT to set the ADAPTER PORT in step 5.
ogy, you can listen to music on a device not 2 Select ‘System Setup’, then press
input, then conduct the pairing operation on ! The passcode may in some cases be referred
equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology. ENTER.
the Bluetooth wireless technology device. to as PASSKEY or PIN code.
The AS-BT100 and AS-BT200 models supports
3 Select ‘Other Setup’, then press ENTER.
SCMS-T contents protection, so music can also

34 En
 Basic playback 05

Listening to music contents of a

Bluetooth wireless technology
device with your system
1 Press ADPT on the remote control to
switch the receiver to ADAPTER PORT
input.
! When the Bluetooth ADAPTER is not plugged
into the ADAPTER PORT, NO ADAPTER
will be displayed if ADAPTER PORT input is
selected.
2 From the Bluetooth wireless
technology device, perform the operation
to connect to the Bluetooth ADAPTER.
3 Start playback of music contents stored
on the Bluetooth wireless technology
device.
This receiver’s remote control buttons can
be used for basic playback of files stored on
Bluetooth wireless technology devices.
! Bluetooth wireless technology device should
be compatible with AVRCP profile.
! Depending on the Bluetooth wireless
technology device you use, operation may
differ from what is shown in the remote
control buttons.
HDD DVD

THX PHASE CTRL STATUS

TV / DTV MPX PQLS

HDMI OUT AUDIO

1 2 3

4 While listening to a source, set the

remote control to the receiver operation
mode, then press ADV SURR repeatedly to
select SOUND RETRIEVER AIR.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are reg-
istered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG,
Inc. and any use of such marks by PIONEER
CORPORATION is under license. Other trade-
marks and trade names are those of their
respective owners.
En 35
06 Listening to your system

Listening to your system

! Neural Surround – Up to 7.1 channel sound
Standard surround sound (surround back), especially suited to music
The following modes provide basic surround sources
sound for stereo and multichannel sources. ! STEREO – The audio is heard with your
2 While listening to a source, sound settings and you can still use the
Enjoying various types of press AUTO/ALC/DIRECT
1 Press to the receiver operation
mode. audio options.
playback using the listening (AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT) for With multichannel sources, if you have con-
modes auto playback of a source. 2 While listening to a source, press
nected surround back, front height or front wide
AUTO SURROUND shows briefly in the dis- STANDARD (STANDARD SURROUND).
Using this receiver, you can listen to any source speakers, you can select (according to format):
play before showing the decoding or playback If necessary, press repeatedly to select a listen-
in surround sound. However, the options avail- ! 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE – See above
format. Check the digital format indicators in ing mode.
able will depend on your speaker setup and the ! 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC – See above
the front panel display to see how the source is ! If the source is Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby
type of source you’re listening to. ! Dolby Digital EX – Creates surround back
being processed. Surround encoded, the proper decoding
To play with surround sound, check “Standard channel sound for 5.1 channel sources and
! If the source is Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby format will automatically be selected and
surround sound”, “Using the Home THX modes” provides pure decoding for 6.1 channel
Surround encoded, the proper decoding shows in the display.
or “Using the Advanced surround effects” below sources (like Dolby Digital Surround EX)
format will automatically be selected and ! If the surround back speakers are not
and select the desired mode. ! DTS-ES Matrix or DTS-ES Discrete – Allows
shows in the display. connected, 2 Pro Logic IIx becomes
To play with the optimum mode for the input you to hear 6.1 channel playback with DTS-
! When listening to the FM radio, the Neural 2 Pro Logic II (5.1 channel sound).
signal, see “Auto playback” or “Using Stream ES encoded sources
Surround feature is selected automatically With two channel sources, you can select from:
Direct”. (The sound is played in stereo when ! DTS Neo:6 – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel
(see Using Neural Surround on page 32 for ! 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE – Up to 7.1 channel
2-channel signals are input, in surround when playback with DTS encoded sources
more on this). sound (surround back), especially suited to
multi-channel signals are input.) ! Neo:6 – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel
! When listening to the ADAPTER PORT movie sources
playback
input, the SOUND RETRIEVER AIR feature is ! 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC – Up to 7.1 channel
! 2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT – See above
Important selected automatically. sound (surround back), especially suited to
! WIDE SURROUND MOVIE – See above
! The listening modes and many features ALC – In the Auto level control (ALC) mode, this music sources
! WIDE SURROUND MUSIC – See above
described in this section may not be available receiver equalizes playback sound levels. ! 2 Pro Logic IIx GAME – Up to 7.1 channel
! STEREO – See above
depending on the current source, settings and Also, the low and high frequency sounds, dia- sound (surround back), especially suited to
! Straight Decode – Plays back without the
status of the receiver. logs, surround effects, etc., that are difficult to video games
effects above.
hear when the volume is low are adjusted to be ! 2 PRO LOGIC – 4.1 channel surround
Auto playback optimal for the volume level. This mode is par- sound (sound from the surround speakers is
mono) Note
There are many ways to listen back to sources ticularly optimum when listening at night.
! 2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT – Up to 7.1 channel ! When listening sources in
using this receiver, but the simplest, most OPTIMUM SURR – In the Optimum Surround
sound (front height) 2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT mode, you can also
direct listening option is the Auto Surround mode, this receiver automatically optimizes
! WIDE SURROUND MOVIE – Up to 7.1 adjust the H.GAIN effect (see Setting the Audio
feature. The receiver automatically detects what sound balance in each scene based on actually
channel sound (front wide), especially suited options on page 48 ).
kind of source you’re playing and selects multi- set volume. The sound balancer controls three
to movie sources ! When listening to 2-channel sources in
channel or stereo playback as necessary. major theater sound elements dialogue, bass
! WIDE SURROUND MUSIC – Up to 7.1 Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music mode, there are
and surround with original algorithm.
1 Press to the receiver operation channel sound (front wide), especially suited three further parameters you can adjust:
mode. to music sources C.WIDTH,DIMENSION and PANORAMA. See
Note ! Neo:6 CINEMA – 7.1 channel sound Setting the Audio options on page 48 to adjust
! When ALC is selected, the effect level can (surround back), especially suited to movie them.
be adjusted using the EFFECT parameter in sources ! When listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:6
Setting the Audio options on page 48 . ! Neo:6 MUSIC – 7.1 channel sound (surround Cinema or Neo:6 Music mode, you can also
back), especially suited to music sources adjust the center image effect (see Setting the
Audio options on page 48 ).
36 En
 Listening to your system 06

! Neural Surround can be selected for ! THX GAMES ! EXPANDED – Creates an extra wide stereo
2-channel signals for which the input signal ! THX Surround EX – Allows you to hear 6.1 field Note
is PCM (48 kHz or less), Dolby Digital, DTS or or 7.1 channel playback with 5.1 channel ! TV SURROUND – Provides surround sound ! When an Advanced Surround listening mode
analog 2-channel sources. sources for both mono and stereo TV sources is selected, the effect level can be adjusted
! The stereo mode can also be selected by ! Neo:6 CINEMA+THX CINEMA ! ADVANCED GAME – Suitable for video using the EFFECT parameter in Setting the
pressing the STEREO button. ! Neo:6 MUSIC+THX MUSIC games Audio options on page 48 .
! When listening through headphones, you can ! Neo:6 GAME+THX GAMES ! SPORTS – Suitable for sports programs However, with F.S.SURR FOCUS,
select STEREO mode only. ! 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX CINEMA ! CLASSICAL – Gives a large concert hall-type F.S.SURR WIDE and SOUND RETRIEVER AIR,
! 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC+THX MUSIC sound the effect level cannot be adjusted.
Using the Home THX modes ! 2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT+THX CINEMA ! ROCK/POP – Creates a live concert sound for ! The Front Stage Surround Advance
! 2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT+THX MUSIC rock and/or pop music (F.S.SURR FOCUS and F.S.SURR WIDE)
THX and Home THX are technical standards
! 2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT+THX GAMES ! UNPLUGGED – Suitable for acoustic music function allows you to create natural surround
created by THX Ltd. for cinema and home
sources sound effects using just the front speakers
theater sound. Home THX is designed to make
Note ! EXT.STEREO – Gives multichannel sound to and the subwoofer.
home theater audio sound more like what you
! When listening sources in a stereo source, using all of your speakers
hear in a cinema.
! F.S.SURR FOCUS – Use to provide a rich
Different THX options will be available depend- 2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT mode, you can also Using Stream Direct
adjust the H.GAIN effect (see Setting the Audio surround sound effect directed to the center
ing on the source and the setting for surround Use the Stream Direct modes when you want
options on page 48 ). of where the front left and right speakers
back channel processing (see THX Audio Setting to hear the truest possible reproduction of a
sound projection area converges.
on page 68 for more on this). source. All unnecessary signal processing is
! F.S.SURR WIDE – Use to provide a surround
1 Press to the receiver operation Using the Advanced surround sound effect to a wider area than FOCUS bypassed, and you’re left with the pure analog
mode. effects mode. or digital sound source.
The Advanced surround effects can be used for Processing differs depending on the input sig-
2 Press THX (HOME THX) to select a FOCUS position WIDE position
a variety of additional surround sound effects. (Recommended)
nal and whether or not surround back speakers
listening mode.
Most Advanced Surround modes are designed Front left Front right Front left Front right are connected. For details, see Auto Surround,
With two channel sources, press THX repeat-
to be used with film soundtracks, but some
speaker speaker speaker speaker ALC and Stream Direct with different input signal
edly to select a matrix-decoding process for the
modes are also suited for music sources. Try formats on page 87 .
THX CINEMA mode (see THX Audio Setting on
page 68 for an explanation of each process): different settings with various soundtracks to 1 Press to the receiver operation
! THX CINEMA see which you like. mode.
! THX MUSIC 1 Press to the receiver operation 2 While listening to a source,
! THX GAMES mode. press AUTO/ALC/DIRECT
! 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX CINEMA ! SOUND RETRIEVER AIR – Suitable for (AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT) to
2 Press ADV SURR
! 2 PRO LOGIC+THX CINEMA listening to the sound from a Bluetooth select the mode you want.
(ADVANCED SURROUND) repeatedly to
! Neo:6 CINEMA+THX CINEMA wireless technology device. The Check the digital format indicators in the front
select a listening mode.
! 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC+THX MUSIC SOUND RETRIEVER AIR listening mode can panel display to see how the source is being
! ACTION – Designed for action movies with
! Neo:6 MUSIC+THX MUSIC only selected when the ADAPTER PORT processed.
dynamic soundtracks
! 2 Pro Logic IIx GAME+THX GAMES input or listening through headphones. ! AUTO SURROUND – See Auto playback on
! DRAMA – Designed for movies with lots of
! 2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT+THX CINEMA ! PHONES SURR – When listening through page 36 .
dialog
! 2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT+THX MUSIC headphones, you can still get the effect of ! ALC – Listening in Auto level control mode
! SCI-FI – Designed for science fiction with lots
! 2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT+THX GAMES overall surround. (page 36).
of special effects
With multichannel sources, press THX
! MONO FILM – Creates surround sound from
(HOME THX) repeatedly to select from:
mono soundtracks
! THX CINEMA
! ENT.SHOW – Suitable for musical sources
! THX MUSIC
En 37
06 Listening to your system

! DIRECT – Plays back sound from the the effect you can actually feel when
source with the least modification next Choosing the input signal Better sound using Phase PHASE CONTROL is set to ON on this receiver
to PURE DIRECT. With DIRECT, the only On this receiver, it is possible to switch Control depends on the type of your subwoofer. Set
modifications added to PURE DIRECT the input signals for the different inputs as your subwoofer to maximize the effect. It is
This receiver’s Phase Control feature uses
playback are calibration of the sound field by described below. also recommended you try changing the
phase correction measures to make sure your
the MCACC system and the Phase Control ! This receiver can only play back Dolby Digital, orientation or the place of your subwoofer.
sound source arrives at the listening position in
effect. PCM (32 kHz to 192 kHz) and DTS (including ! Set the built-in lowpass filter switch of your
phase, preventing unwanted distortion and/or
! PURE DIRECT – Plays back unmodified DTS 96/24) digital signal formats. The subwoofer to off. If this cannot be done on
coloring of the sound.
sound from source with only minimal digital compatible signals via the HDMI terminals your subwoofer, set the cutoff frequency to a
Phase Control technology provides coherent
treatment. No sound is output from the are: Dolby Digital, DTS, PCM (32 kHz to 192 higher value.
sound reproduction through the use of phase
Speaker B in this mode. kHz), Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS- ! If the speaker distance is not properly set, you
matching for an optimal sound image. The
! OPTIMUM SURR – Listening in Optimum EXPRESS, DTS-HD Master Audio and SACD. may not have a maximized PHASE CONTROL
default setting is on and we recommend leav-
Surround mode (page 36). ! You may get digital noise when an LD, CD, effect.
ing Phase Control switched on for all sound
DVD or BD player compatible with DTS is ! The PHASE CONTROL mode cannot be set to
sources.
playing an analog signal. To prevent noise, ON in the following cases:
Note 1 Press to the receiver operation
make the proper digital connections (page 16) — When the PURE DIRECT mode is switched
! When listening through headphones, you can mode.
and set the signal input to DIGITAL. on.
select ALC, OPTIMUM SURR or PURE DIRECT
! Some DVD players don’t output DTS signals. 2 Press PHASE CTRL (PHASE CONTROL) to — When the HDMI audio output parameter is
mode only.
For more details, refer to the instruction switch on phase correction. set to THROUGH in Setting the Setting the
manual supplied with your DVD player. The PHASE CONTROL indicator on the front Audio options on page 48 .
Selecting MCACC presets panel lights.
1 Press to the receiver operation
! Default setting: MEMORY 1 mode.
If you have calibrated your system for different 2 Press SIGNAL SEL to select the input Note
listening positions, you can switch between set- ! Phase matching is a very important factor
signal corresponding to the source
tings to suit the kind of source you’re listening in achieving proper sound reproduction.
component.
to and where you’re sitting (for example, watch- If two waveforms are ‘in phase’, they crest
Each press cycles through the options as
ing movies from a sofa, or playing a video game and trough together, resulting in increased
follows:
close to the TV). amplitude, clarity and presence of the sound
! AUTO – The receiver selects the first
signal. If a crest of a wave meets a trough,
1 Press to the receiver operation available signal in the following order: HDMI;
then the sound will be ‘out of phase’ and an
mode. DIGITAL; ANALOG.
unreliable sound image will be produced.
! ANALOG – Selects an analog signal.
2 While listening to a source, press ! For discs created with standards other than
! DIGITAL – Selects an optical or coaxial
MCACC. Phase Control, the LFE channel is delayed
digital signal.
Press repeatedly to select one of the six MCACC upon recording in the first place. Phase
! HDMI – Selects an HDMI signal.
presets. See Data Management on page 65 to Control Plus function corrects for phase
— When the HDMI audio output parameter
check and manage your current settings. shifting on such discs. For instructions on
is set to THROUGH, the sound will be
! These settings have no effect when setting the Phase Control Plus, see Setting the
heard through your TV, not from this
headphones are connected. Audio options on page 48 .
receiver.
! You can also press k/l to select the ! The PHASE CONTROL feature is available
When set to DIGITAL, HDMI or AUTO (only
MCACC preset. even when the headphones are plugged in.
selected DIGITAL or HDMI), the indicators light
! If your subwoofer has a phase control switch,
according to the signal being decoded (see
set it to the plus (+) sign (or 0º). However,
Display on page 9 ).

38 En
 Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs 07

Playback with HOME MEDIA

! PCs running Microsoft Windows 7 with ! Display of the currently playing track
Windows Media Player 12 installed information on the receiver’s display,
! DLNA-compatible digital media servers (on including artist, song and album name.
GALLERY inputs PCs or other components)
Files stored in a PC or DMS (Digital Media
*1: For more information, see the Apple web-
site (http://www.apple.com).
Server) as described above can be played *2: The receiver’s power automatically turns on
! Besides a PC, you can also play back audio via command from an external Digital Media when Network Standby at Network Setup is
Enjoying the Home Media files stored on your other components with the Controller (DMC). Devices controlled by this set to ON.
Gallery built-in media server function based on DLNA DMC to play files are called DMRs (Digital
1.0 or DLNA 1.5 framework and protocols Media Renderers). This receiver supports this Note
(i.e. network-capable hard disks and audio DMR function. When in the DMR mode, such ! A network environment is required to use
systems). operations as playing and stopping files can AirPlay.
% Listening to Internet radio stations be performed from the external controller. ! The receiver’s name that shows up in the
You can select and listen to your favorite Volume adjustment and the muting control AirPlay UI on iPod touch, iPhone, iPad and
This receiver’s Home Media Gallery function are also possible. The DMR mode is canceled
Internet radio station from the list of Internet iTunes can be changed by Friendly Name
allows you to listen to audio files or listen to if the remote control unit is operated while in
radio stations created, edited, and managed by from Network Setup.
Internet radio stations on a computer or other the DMR mode (aside from certain buttons,
the vTuner database service exclusively for use ! AirPlay provided on this receiver has been
component connected to the receiver’s LAN including the MASTER VOLUME +/–, MUTE
with the Pioneer products. developed and tested based on the software
terminal. This chapter describes the setup and and DISP).
dSee Playback with Home Media Gallery on versions for the iPod, iPhone, iPad and the
playback procedures required to enjoy these ! Depending on the external controller being
page 40 and Listening to Internet radio stations software versions for iTunes that are indicated
features. It is advisory that you also refer to the used, playback may be interrupted when the
on page 40 . on the Pioneer website. AirPlay may not be
operation manual supplied with your network volume is adjusted from the controller. In this
% Listening to Rhapsody, Sirius or compatible with iPod, iPhone, iPad or iTunes
component. case, adjust the volume from the receiver or
Pandora software versions other than those indicated
! To listen to Internet radio stations, you must remote control.
dSee Listening to Rhapsody on page 41 . on the Pioneer website.
sign a contract with an ISP (Internet Service
Provider) beforehand. dSee Listening to Sirius Internet Radio on page
41 . Using AirPlay on iPod touch, About the DHCP server function
! Photo or video files cannot be played back.
! With Windows Media Player 11 or Windows dSee Listening to Pandora Internet Radio on iPhone, iPad, and iTunes
To play back audio files stored on components
Media Player 12, you can even play back page 41 . This receiver supports AirPlay audio streaming on the network or listen to Internet radio sta-
copyrighted audio files on this receiver. from iPod touch (2nd, 3rd and 4th generations), tions, you must turn on the DHCP server func-
iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPad with iOS 4.2 or later, tion of your router. In case your router does
Introduction and iTunes 10.1 (Mac and PC) or later. not have the built-in DHCP server function, it
Features of Home Media To use AirPlay, select your receiver on your iPod is necessary to set up the network manually.
Gallery touch, iPhone, iPad or in iTunes. *1 Otherwise, you cannot play back audio files
About playable DLNA network
The receiver’s input will switch automatically to stored on components on the network or listen
This receiver is equipped with the LAN terminal devices Home Media Gallery when AirPlay is in use. *2
and you can enjoy the following features by con- to Internet radio stations. See Network Setup
The Home Media Gallery allows you to play The following operations can be performed
necting your components to these terminals. menu on page 68 for more on this.
music on media servers connected on an identi- when in AirPlay mode:
% Playback the music files stored in PCs cal Local Area Network (LAN) as the receiver. ! Adjustment of the receiver’s volume from iPod
You can playback a lot of musics stored in your This unit allows for the playing of files stored on touch, iPhone, iPad or iTunes.
Authorizing this receiver
PCs using this unit. the following: ! Pause/resume, next/previous track, and In order to be able to play with Home Media
dSee Playback with Home Media Gallery on ! PCs running Microsoft Windows Vista or XP shuffle/repeat from the remote control of the Gallery, this receiver must be authorized. This
page 40 and Playing back audio files stored on with Windows Media Player 11 installed receiver. happens automatically when the receiver
components on the network on page 40 . makes a connection over the network to the PC.

En 39
07 Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs

If not, please authorize this receiver manually 2 Use i/j to select the category you ! Sirius – See Listening to Sirius Internet Radio over the World Wide Web. On this receiver you
on the PC. The authorization (or permission) want to play back, and then press ENTER. on page 41 . can select Internet radio stations by genre as
method for access varies depending on the type Select a category from the following list: ! Pandora – See Listening to Pandora Internet well as by region.
of server currently being connected. For more ! Internet Radio – Internet radio Radio on page 41 . Depending on the Internet line conditions,
information on authorizing this receiver, refer to ! Rhapsody – Rhapsody music broadcast ! Server – See Playing back audio files stored on the sound may not be smooth when playing
the instruction manual of your server. service components on the network on page 40 . Internet radio.
! Sirius – Internet radio that supports Sirius
! Pandora – Internet radio that supports Playing back audio files stored on About list of Internet radio
Playback with Home Media Pandora components on the network The list of Internet radio stations on this receiver
Gallery ! Server Name – Server components on the
You can perform the following operations with
is created, edited, and managed by the vTuner
network database service exclusively for use with this
! Favorites – Favorite songs currently being the remote control of this receiver. Note that
receiver. For details about vTuner, see vTuner
Important registered some buttons are not available for operation
on page 89 .
! When you play back audio files, ! Recently played – Internet Radio listening depending on the category currently being
‘Connecting...’ is displayed before playback history (most recent 20 incidents) played back.
Saving and retrieving Internet radio
starts. The display may continue for several Depending on the selected category, the names ! Press HMG to switch the remote control to the
HOME MEDIA GALLERY operation mode.
stations
seconds depending on the type of file. of folders, files, and Internet radio stations are
! In case a domain is configured in a Windows You can easily save and retrieve saved Internet
displayed. AUTO/ALC PGM MEMORY MENU

radio stations. See Advanced operations for

AUDIO VIDEO DIRECT STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR

network environment, you cannot access a PC PARAMETER PARAMETER

HDD DVD
3 Use i/j to select the folder, music LIST TUNE TOOLS
Internet radio on page 41 for more on this.
on the network while you are logged onto the THX PHASE CTRL STATUS

files or Internet radio station to play back,

TOP MENU T.EDIT

domain. Instead of logging onto the domain,

BAND GUIDE
TV / DTV MPX PQLS
! To listen to Internet radio stations, you must
and then press ENTER. PRESET ENTER PRESET have high-speed broadband Internet access.
log onto the local machine.
Press i/j to scroll up and down the list and HDMI OUT AUDIO
With a 56 K or ISDN modem, you may not
! There are cases where the time elapsed may CATEGORY RETURN 1 2 3
select the desired item. When you press ENTER, enjoy the full benefits of Internet radio.
not be correctly displayed. HOME
MENU TUNE
SIGNAL SEL MCACC SLEEP INFO

playback starts with the playback screen being iPod CTRL

4 5 6 DISP
! The port number varies depending on the
1 Press HMG to select Home Media displayed for the selected item. To return to the Internet radio station. Check the firewall
Gallery as the input function. list screen, press RETURN. settings.
It may take several seconds for this receiver When the list screen is displayed from the Listening to Internet radio ! A list of Internet radio stations provided by the
to access the network. The following screen playback screen, the playback screen reappears stations vTuner database service is subject to change
appears when the Home Media Gallery is automatically if no operation is performed for 10 or deletion without notice due to various
Internet radio is an audio broadcasting service
selected as the input function. The number next seconds while the list screen is displayed. reasons.
transmitted via the Internet. There are a large
to indicates the number of connected servers. Only audio files with the mark can be played. ! Broadcasts may be stopped or interrupted
number of Internet radio stations broadcast-
Top Menu
In case of the folders with the mark, use i/j ing a variety of services from every corner of depending on the Internet radio station. In
1 A/V RECEIVER and ENTER to select the desired folder and the world. Some are hosted, managed, and this case, you cannot listen to a radio station
Internet Radio
Rhapsody
Sirius
audio files. broadcast by private individuals while others selected from the list of Internet radio stations.
Pandora
****** 4 Repeat step 3 to play back the desired are by the corresponding traditional terrestrial
Favorites
Recently Played
song. radio stations or radio networks. Whereas ter- Registering broadcast stations not
Setup

For detailed operating instructions, refer to the restrial, or OTA (over-the-air), radio stations are on the vTuner list from the special
1/8
section shown below. geographically restricted on the range of radio Pioneer site
! Internet radio stations – See Listening to waves broadcast from a transmitter through With the receiver, broadcast stations not
Internet radio stations on page 40 . the air, Internet radio stations are accessible
! The server without the mark cannot be included on the list of station distributed by
! Rhapsody – See Listening to Rhapsody on from anywhere in the world, as long as there is vTuner can be registered and played. Check the
accessed.
page 41 . a connection to the Internet, as services are not access code required for registration on the
transmitted through the air but are delivered receiver, use this access code to access the
40 En
 Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs 07

special Pioneer Internet radio site and register registered. In this case they are registered on ! As of April 2011, the Pandora service is only 3 Press CLASS to select the class that you
the desired broadcast stations in your favorites. the receiver as favorite broadcast stations and offered in the United States. want to save the station in.
The address of the special Pioneer Internet can be played. ! Some functions may be changed at Pandora’s Select the desired class from A to G.
radio site is: discretion. 4 Use i/j to select the number that
http://www.radio-pioneer.com Listening to Rhapsody you want to save the station as, and then
1 Display the Internet Radio list screen. Rhapsody is a paid digital music broadcast ser- Playing back your favorite songs press ENTER.
To display the Internet Radio list screen, per- vice provided by RealNetworks. Rhapsody offers You can register up to 20 of your favorite songs You can also select the station number by using
form steps 1 to 3 at Playback with Home Media 30-day free trial. Access the website in order or Internet radio stations in the Favorites folder. the number buttons. Select the desired number
Gallery on page 40 . to set up a trial account: http://www.rhapsody. Note that only the audio files stored on compo- from 1 to 9.
2 Use i/j to select ‘Help’, then press com/pioneer/signup nents on the network can be registered.
ENTER. ! You must have a registered account in order Retrieving saved Internet radio
3 Use i/j to select ‘Get access code’, to listen to songs using Rhapsody. For details, Registering and deleting audio files stations
then press ENTER.
see Checking about the Accounts on page 41 . and Internet radio stations in and
You need to save Internet radio stations first
! As of April 2011, the Rhapsody service is only from the Favorites folder
The access code required for registration on the before retrieving them. If there are no Internet
offered in the United States.
special Pioneer Internet radio site is displayed. Press PGM while a song is being played back or radio stations currently being saved, see Saving
! Some functions may be changed at
Make a memo of this address. stopped. The selected song is then registered in Internet radio stations on page 41 and save at
Rhapsody’s discretion.
The following can be checked on the Help the Favorites folder. least one Internet radio station before proceed-
screen: Up to 20 songs or Internet radio stations can be ing with the following steps.
! Get access code – The access code required Listening to Sirius Internet Radio registered.
1 Select the class that you want to
for registration on the special Pioneer Check the website below to listen to Sirius To delete a registered song, select the Favorites
retrieve an Internet radio station from.
Internet radio site is displayed. Internet Radio: http://www.sirius.com/ folder, select the song you want to delete from
Each time you press CLASS, the class switches
! Show Your WebID/PW – After registering siriusinternetradio the folder, and press CLR. The selected song is
to A to G in turn.
on the special Pioneer Internet radio site, the ! You must have a registered account in order to then deleted from the Favorites folder.
registered ID and password are displayed. listen to songs using Sirius Internet Radio. For 2 Use i/j to select the station number
! Reset Your WebID/PW – Resets all the details, see Checking about the Accounts on that you want to retrieve.
information registered on the special page 41 . Advanced operations for You can also select the station number by using
the number buttons.
Pioneer Internet radio site. When reset, all ! Some functions may be changed at Sirius’s Internet radio
the registered broadcast stations are also discretion. ‘Preset Not Stored’ appears when you select
cleared. If you want to listen to the same an Internet radio station currently not being
stations, re-register after resetting. Saving Internet radio stations saved.
Listening to Pandora Internet
4 Access the special Pioneer Internet This receiver can remember the Internet radio
Radio
radio site from your computer and stations that you often listen to in seven classes
Pandora is personalized internet radio that is (A to G) with up to nine stations in each class Checking about the Accounts
perform the registration process.
designed to help you discover new music you’ll to make the total of 63 stations at its maximum Screen concerning Rhapsody, Sirius or
http://www.radio-pioneer.com
love mixed in with music you already know. capacity. Pandora Internet Radio account registration.
Access the above site and use the access code
For details, check the website: http://www.
in step 3 to perform user registration, following 1 Tune into the Internet radio station 1 Press HMG to select Home Media
pandora.com
the instructions on the screen. that you want to save. Gallery as the input function.
! You must have a registered account in order to
5 Register the desired broadcast Tune into the desired Internet radio station by 2 Select ‘Setup’ then press ENTER.
listen to songs using Pandora Internet Radio.
stations as your favorites, following the following Steps 1 to 3 on page 40.
Select Pandora, then follow the instructions 3 Select ‘Accounts’ and press ENTER to
instructions on the computer’s screen. on the screen to make the account settings. 2 Press T.EDIT to switch to the station- confirm your selection.
Both broadcast stations not on the vTuner Also see Checking about the Accounts on page saving mode.
list and stations on the vTuner list can be 41 .
En 41
07 Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs

4 Select Rhapsody, Sirius or Pandora and Content owners use WMDRM technology to to the operating instructions for the software or WITH THE FOREGOING. PIONEER IS NOT
press ENTER. protect their intellectual property, including device for more information. LIABLE OR RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY LOSS
The contents below can be checked when copyrights. This device uses WMDRM software DLNATM, the DLNA Logo and DLNA CERTIFIEDTM OR DAMAGE ARISING FROM ACCESS
Rhapsody is selected. to access WMDRM protected content. If the are trademarks, service marks, or certification TO OR USE OF CONTENT. NO ORAL OR
! Set Account WMDRM software fails to protect the content, marks of the Digital Living Network Alliance. WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN
! Account Info content owners may ask Microsoft to revoke BY PIONEER OR ITS CUSTOMER SERVICES
The contents below can be checked when Sirius the software’s ability to use WMDRM to play or Content playable over a network REPRESENTATIVES WILL CREATE ANY SUCH
is selected. copy protected content. Revocation does not WARRANTY.
! Even when encoded in a compatible format,
! Set Account affect unprotected content. When you download IN NO EVENT WILL PIONEER, ITS AFFILIATES,
some files may not play correctly.
The contents below can be checked when licenses for protected content, you agree that OR THEIR RESPECTIVE OFFICERS,
! Movie or Photo files cannot be played back.
Pandora is selected. Microsoft may include a revocation list with the DIRECTORS, OR EMPLOYEES BE LIABLE IN
! There are cases where you cannot listen to an
! Set Account licenses. Content owners may require you to CONNECTION WITH YOUR USE OF THIRD
Internet radio station even if the station can be
! Sign out upgrade WMDRM to access their content. If you PARTY CONTENT SERVICES THROUGH
selected from a list of radio stations.
5 Follow the instructions on the screen decline an upgrade, you will not be able to access THIS DEVICE FOR PERSONAL INJURY
! Some functions may not be supported
content that requires the upgrade. OR SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT OR
to input and set. depending on the server type or version used.
This product is protected by certain intellectual CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND,
! Supported file formats vary by server. As such,
property rights of Microsoft. Use or distribution of INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION DAMAGES
Note files not supported by your server are not
such technology outside of this product is pro- FOR ATTORNEY’S FEES, LOST DATA OR LOST
! When disposing of the product, we displayed on this unit. For more information
hibited without a license from Microsoft. PROFITS, REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF
recommend you reset it to delete the data. See check with the manufacturer of your server.
LIABILITY AND WHETHER OR NOT ADVISED
Resetting the system on page 53 . OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. IN
DLNA Disclaimer for Third Party Content
NO EVENT WILL PIONEER’S TOTAL LIABILITY
ACCESS TO THIRD PARTY CONTENT TO YOU FOR ALL DAMAGES ARISING FROM
About network playback SERVICES, INCLUDING ALL ASSOCIATED THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIRD PARTY
The network playback function of this unit uses FEATURES AND FUNCTIONALITIES, IS CONTENT SERVICES (OTHER THAN AS MAY
the following technologies: PROVIDED “AS IS,” “AS AVAILABLE” AND BE REQUIRED BY LAW IN CASES INVOLVING
AT THE USER’S OWN RISK, WITHOUT PERSONAL INJURY) EXCEED $10.00. THE
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND. PIONEER FOREGOING LIMITATIONS WILL APPLY EVEN IF
Windows Media Player DLNA CERTIFIEDTM Audio Player DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR THE ABOVE REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL
See Windows Media Player 11/ The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a IMPLIED, IN CONNECTION WITH ACCESS PURPOSE. IF ANY APPLICABLE AUTHORITY
Windows Media Player 12 on page 89 for more cross-industry organization of consumer elec- TO AND USE OF CONTENT SERVICES HOLDS ANY PORTION OF THIS SECTION
on this. tronics, computing industry and mobile device THROUGH THIS DEVICE, INCLUDING TO BE UNENFORCEABLE, THEN LIABILITY
companies. Digital Living provides consumers WITHOUT LIMITATION WARRANTIES OF WILL BE LIMITED TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT
Windows Media DRM with easy sharing of digital media through a MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW.
wired or wireless network in the home. FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
Microsoft Windows Media Digital Rights
The DLNA certification logo makes it easy AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. PIONEER
Management (WMDRM) is a platform to pro-
to find products that comply with the DLNA DOES NOT GUARANTEE, REPRESENT, OR
tect and securely deliver content for playback
Interoperability Guidelines. This unit complies WARRANT THAT CONTENT SERVICES WILL
on computers, portable devices and network
with DLNA Interoperability Guidelines v1.5. BE FREE FROM ERRORS, INTERRUPTION,
devices. Home Media Gallery functions as a
When a PC running DLNA server software or LOSS, CORRUPTION, ATTACK, VIRUSES,
WMDRM 10 for networked devices. WMDRM
other DLNA compatible device is connected to INTERFERENCE, HACKING, OR OTHER
protected content can only be played on media
this player, some setting changes of software SECURITY INTRUSION, AND PIONEER
servers supporting WMDRM.
or other devices may be required. Please refer DISCLAIMS ANY LIABILITY IN CONNECTION

42 En
 Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs 07

About playback behavior over a About playable file formats

network
The Home Media Gallery feature of this receiver supports the following file formats. Note that some
! Playback may stall when the PC is switched file formats are not available for playback although they are listed as playable file formats. Also, the
off or any media files stored on it are deleted compatibility of file formats varies depending on the type of server. Check with your server to ensure
while playing content. the compatibility of file formats supported by your server.
! If there are problems within the network ! Internet radio playback may be affected by the Internet communications environment, and in this
environment (heavy network traffic, etc.) case playback may not be possible even with the file formats listed here.
content may not be displayed or played
properly (playback may be interrupted or
Music files
stalled). For best performance, a 100BASE-
TX connection between player and PC is Category Extension Stream
recommended.
Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 48 kHz
! If several clients are playing simultaneously,
as the case may be, playback is interrupted or Quantization bitrate 16 bit
MP3 MPEG-1 Audio
stalled. .mp3 Channel 2 ch
<a> Layer-3
! Depending on the security software installed Bitrate 8 kbps to 320 kbps
on a connected PC and the setting of such VBR/CBR Supported/Supported
software, network connection may be blocked.
Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 48 kHz
Pioneer is not responsible for any malfunction —
LPCM LPCM Quantization bitrate 16 bit, 20 bit, 24 bit
of the player and/or the Home Media Gallery <b>
features due to communication error/malfunc- Channel 2 ch
tions associated with your network connection Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 192 kHz
and/or your PC, or other connected equip- WAV .wav LPCM Quantization bitrate 16 bit, 20 bit, 24 bit
ment. Please contact your PC manufacturer or Channel 2 ch
Internet service provider.
Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 48 kHz
“Windows MediaTM” is a trademark of Microsoft
Quantization bitrate 16 bit
Corporation.
This product includes technology owned by WMA2/7/8 Channel 2 ch
Microsoft Corporation and cannot be used or Bitrate 5 kbps to 320 kbps
distributed without a license from Microsoft VBR/CBR Supported/Supported
Licensing, Inc. WMA .wma
Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 48 kHz
Microsoft®, Windows®7, Windows®Vista,
Quantization bitrate 16 bit
Windows®XP, Windows®2000,
WMA9 Channel 2 ch
Windows®Millennium Edition, Windows®98, and
WindowsNT® are either registered trademarks Bitrate 5 kbps to 320 kbps
or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the VBR/CBR Supported/Supported
United States and/or other countries. Sampling frequency 32 kHz to 48 kHz
.m4a Quantization bitrate 16 bit
MPEG-4 AAC LC
.aac
AAC MPEG-4 HE AAC Channel 2 ch
.3gp
(aacPlus v1/2) Bitrate 16 kbps to 320 kbps
.3g2
VBR/CBR Supported/Supported

En 43
07 Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs

Category Extension Stream

Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 192 kHz
Quantization bitrate 8 bit, 16 bit, 24 bit
FLAC .flac FLAC Channel 2 ch
Bitrate —
VBR/CBR —
a “MPEG Layer-3 audio decoding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia.”
b Only streaming data from servers is concerned, so there is no extension.

44 En
 Control with HDMI function 08

Control with HDMI function

! To get the most out of this function, we However, Display Power Off will activate the
recommend that you connect your HDMI settings set forth in step 6 below.
component not to a TV but rather directly to ! ALL – Enabled for all linked functions.
the HDMI terminal on this receiver. ! PQLS – Enabled only for the PQLS function.
! For details about concrete operations, When PQLS is selected, link functions
About the Control with HDMI settings, etc., refer to also the operating other than the PQLS function may not work
function instructions for each component. HDMI Setup properly. If you wish to use all link functions,
Synchronized operations below with a Control select ALL.
You must adjust the settings of this receiver
with HDMI-compatible Pioneer TV or Blu-ray
as well as the connected Control with HDMI- 6 Select the ‘Display Power Off’ setting
Disc player or with a component of another Making Control with HDMI
compatible components in order to make use you want.
make that supports the Control with HDMI connections of the Control with HDMI function. For more If the TV’s power is turned off while using the
functions are possible when the component is You can use synchronized operation for a con- information see the operating instructions for Control with HDMI function, the receiver’s
connected to the receiver using an HDMI cable. nected TV and up to 7 other components. each component. power is also turned off (all power off function).
! The receiver’s volume can be set and the ! Be sure to connect the TV’s audio cable to 1 Press on the remote control, This function can be disabled.
sound can be muted using the TV’s remote the audio input of this unit. When the TV and
then press HOME MENU. ! YES – The all power off function is enabled.
control. receiver are connected by HDMI connections, The receiver’s power turns off together with
! The receiver’s input switches over if the TV supports the HDMI ARC (Audio 2 Select ‘System Setup’, then press the TV’s power. This function only works
automatically when the TV’s input is Return Channel) function, the sound of the ENTER. when the input for a component connected
changed or a Control with HDMI-compatible TV is input to the receiver via the HDMI OUT 3 Select ‘HDMI Setup’, then press ENTER. to the receiver by HDMI connection is
component is played. terminal, so there is no need to connect an
4 Select the ‘Control’ setting you want. selected or when watching the TV.
! The receiver’s power is also set to standby, audio cable. In this case, set TV Audio at
Choose whether to set this unit’s Control with ! NO – The all power off function is disabled.
when the TV’s power is set to standby. HDMI Setup to via HDMI (see HDMI Setup on
HDMI function ON or OFF. You will need to set The receiver’s power is not affected when the
page 45 ). TV’s power is turned off.
it to ON to use the Control with HDMI function.
Important For details, see Connecting your TV and playback
When using a component that does not sup- 7 Select the ‘Standby Through’ setting
! With Pioneer devices, the Control with HDMI components on page 17 .
port the Control with HDMI function, set this you want.
functions are referred to as “KURO LINK”. to OFF. When Control is ON, the signals of the input
! You cannot use this function with components Important ! ON – Enables the Control with HDMI device or TV connected to the receiver can be
that do not support Control with HDMI. ! When connecting this system or changing function. When this unit’s power is turned transferred even when the receiver’s power is in
! We only guarantee this receiver will work connections, be sure to switch the power off off and you have a supported source begin the standby mode (Standby Through mode). The
with Pioneer Control with HDMI-compatible and disconnect the power cord from the wall playback while using the Control with HDMI power consumption in this Standby Through
components and components of other socket. After completing all connections, function, the audio and video outputs from mode can be set to conserve energy.
makes that support the Control with HDMI connect the power cords to the wall socket. the HDMI connection are output from the TV. ! Normal – Regular mode. Power-up time from
function. However, we do not guarantee that ! After this receiver is connected to an AC ! OFF – The Control with HDMI is disabled. the Standby Through mode is short.
all synchronized operations will work with outlet, a 2 second to 10 second HDMI Synchronized operations cannot be used. ! Eco – Power consumption in the Standby
components of other makes that support the initialization process begins. You cannot carry When this unit’s power is turned off, audio Through mode is reduced. Some time is
Control with HDMI function. out any operations during this process. The and video of sources connected via HDMI are required for powering up from the Standby
! Use a High Speed HDMI® cable when you HDMI indicator in the front panel display not output. Through mode.
want to use the Control with HDMI function. blinks during this process, and you can turn
The Control with HDMI function may not work 5 Select the ‘Control Mode’ setting you 8 Select the ‘TV Audio’ setting you want.
on this receiver once it has stopped blinking. want. When a TV supporting the HDMI ARC (Audio
properly if a different type of HDMI cable is When you set the Control with HDMI to OFF,
used. Choose whether you want to enable HDMI for Return Channel) function is connected to the
you can skip this process. For details about the all linked functions or the PQLS function only. receiver, the sound of the TV can be input via
Control with HDMI feature, see Control with the HDMI OUT terminal.
HDMI function on page 45 .

En 45
08 Control with HDMI function

! Normal – The TV’s sound is input from the synchronized amp mode back on, set audio to of the Control with HDMI functions may not ! On players compatible with PQLS Multi
Audio input terminals other than HDMI be played through the receiver from the TV’s work.) Surround, PQLS works for all sources. Set the
inputs. menu screen, etc. This receiver will power up ! When the TV’s power is set to standby, the player’s audio output to Linear PCM.
! via HDMI – The TV’s sound is input via the and switch to the synchronized amp mode. receiver’s power is also set to standby. (Only ! On players compatible with PQLS 2 ch Audio,
HDMI terminal. This can only be selected ! When the synchronized amp mode is when the input for a component connected to PQLS only works when playing CDs.
when Control is set to ON. canceled, the receiver’s power turns off if you the receiver by HDMI connection is selected or Please refer to the operating instructions sup-
9 When you’re finished, press were viewing an HDMI input or a TV program when watching the TV) plied with your player for more information.
HOME MENU. on the TV. ! The sound of TV programs or an external This function is activated when Control is set
! When in the synchronized amp mode, the input connected to the TV can also be output to ON.
synchronized amp mode is canceled if an from the speakers connected to the receiver. ! If a listening mode other than
Before using synchronization operation that produces sound from the TV is (If the TV does not support the HDMI ARC AUTO SURROUND, ALC, DIRECT,
performed from the TV’s menu screen, etc. (Audio Return Channel) function, this requires PURE DIRECT, OPTIMUM SURR or STEREO is
Once you have finished all connections and ! When the TV’s power is set to standby, the connection of an optical digital cable, etc., in selected while the PQLS effect is enabled, the
settings, you must: receiver’s power is also set to standby. (Only addition to the HDMI cable.) PQLS effect is disabled.
1 Put all components into standby mode. when the input for a component connected to The synchronized operations below can be ! When this receiver is connected by HDMI
2 Turn the power on for all components, the receiver by HDMI connection is selected or used when the receiver’s Control with HDMI cable to a Pioneer player that is compatible
with the power for the TV being turned on when watching the TV.) function is connected to a player or recorder of with the PQLS function via HDMI connection
last. ! The receiver’s input switches automatically a brand other than Pioneer that supports the and HDMI reauthentication is performed
when the Control with HDMI-compatible Control with HDMI function. (the HDMI indicator blinks), the PQLS effect
3 Choose the HDMI input to which the component is played. ! When playback starts on the player or is enabled and the listening mode is set to
TV is connected to this receiver, and see if ! The receiver’s input switches automatically recorder, the receiver’s input switches to AUTO SURROUND if a listening mode other
video output from connected components when the TV’s input is switched. the HDMI input to which that component is than AUTO SURROUND, ALC, DIRECT,
displays properly on the screen or not. ! The synchronized amp mode remains in connected. PURE DIRECT, OPTIMUM SURR or STEREO is
4 Check whether the components effect even if the receiver’s input is switched See the Pioneer website for the latest informa- selected.
connected to all HDMI inputs are properly to a component other than one connected by tion on the models of non-Pioneer brands and % Press on the remote control,
displayed. HDMI. products that support the Control with HDMI then press PQLS to select the PQLS
The operations below can also be used on function. setting.
Pioneer Control with HDMI-compatible TVs. The setting is displayed on the front panel
About synchronized ! When the receiver’s volume is adjusted or the display.
operations sound is muted, the volume status is displayed Setting the PQLS function ! PQLS AUTO – PQLS is enabled. A precision
on the TV’s screen. PQLS (Precision Quartz Lock System) is a quartz controller in this receiver eliminates
The Control with HDMI-compatible component
! When the OSD language is switched on digital audio signal transfer control technology distortion caused by timing errors (jitter),
connected to the receiver operates in sync as
the TV, the receiver’s language setting also using the Control with HDMI function. It offers giving you the best possible digital-to-analog
described below.
switches accordingly. higher-quality audio playback by controlling conversion when you use the HDMI interface.
! From the menu screen of the Control with
HDMI-compatible TV, set audio to be played audio signals from the receiver to a PQLS com- This is valid as an HDMI function for PQLS-
through this receiver, and the receiver will About connections with a product patible player, etc. This enables removing jitter compatible players.
switch to the synchronized amp mode. of a different brand that supports that has a negative effect on the quality of the ! PQLS OFF – PQLS is disabled.
! When in the synchronized amp mode, you the Control with HDMI function sound and is generated upon transmission.
can adjust the receiver’s volume or mute the ! On players compatible with PQLS Bit-stream,
The synchronized operations below can be used
sound using the TV’s remote control. PQLS always works for all sources.
when the receiver’s Control with HDMI func-
! When in the synchronized amp mode, the tion is connected to a TV of a brand other than
synchronized amp mode is canceled when Pioneer that supports the Control with HDMI
the receiver’s power is turned off. To turn the function. (Depending on the TV, however, some

46 En
 Control with HDMI function 08

Cautions on the Control with

HDMI function
! Connect the TV directly to this receiver.
Interrupting a direct connection with other
amps or an AV converter (such as an HDMI
switch) can cause operational errors.
! Only connect components (Blu-ray Disc
player, etc.) you intend to use as a source to
the HDMI input of this receiver. Interrupting
a direct connection with other amps or an
AV converter (such as an HDMI switch) can
cause operational errors.
! When Control is set to ON, HDMI Input
in The Input Setup menu on page 27 is
automatically set to OFF.
! When the receiver’s Control is turned ON,
even if the receiver’s power is in the standby
mode, it is possible to output the audio and
video signals from a player via HDMI to
the TV without producing sound from the
receiver, but only when a Control with HDMI-
compatible component (Blu-ray Disc player,
etc.) and compatible TV are connected. In this
case, the receiver’s power turns on and the
power and HDMI indicators light.

En 47
09 Using other functions

Using other functions Setting

BASS
What it does Option(s)
c –6 to +6 (dB) d
Adjusts the amount of bass.
<a> Default: 0 (dB)
TREBLE c –6 to +6 (dB) d
Setting the Audio options <a>
Adjusts the amount of treble.
Default: 0 (dB)
There are a number of additional sound settings you can make using the AUDIO PARAMETER With the Auto Sound Retriever function, DSP processing OFF
menu. The defaults, if not stated, are listed in bold. is used to compensate for the loss of audio data upon
compression, improving the sound’s sense of density
S.RTRV and modulation.
Important
(Auto Sound Retriever) When ON is selected, the Sound Retriever effect is
! Note that if a setting doesn’t appear in the AUDIO PARAMETER menu, it is unavailable due to the ON
<b> optimized based on the bitrate information of the con-
current source, settings and status of the receiver. tents input to the USB memory audio and HOME MEDIA
1 Press to the receiver operation mode, then press AUDIO PARAMETER. GALLERY (digital audio input only) to achieve high sound
quality.
2 Use i/j to select the setting you want to adjust.
May improve the quality of sound in a noisy source (for OFF
Depending on the current status/mode of the receiver, certain options may not be able to be DNR
example, video tape with lots of background noise) when
selected. Check the table below for notes on this. (Digital Noise
switched on. ON
Reduction)
3 Use k/l to set as necessary. This only has an effect with 2-channel signal inputs.
See the table below for the options available for each setting. Localizes dialog in the center channel to make it stand
4 Press RETURN to confirm and exit the menu. DIALOG E out from other background sounds in a TV or movie c OFF/FLAT/UP1/UP2/UP3/
(Dialog Enhancement) soundtrack. By moving from UP1 through UP2 and UP3 UP4 d
<c> up to UP4, you can make the sound source seem to Default: OFF
Audio parameter menu relocate upwards.
CH1 – Channel 1 is heard
Setting What it does Option(s)
Specifies how dual mono encoded Dolby Digital only
Selects your favorite MCACC preset memory when mul- c M1. MEMORY 1 to M6.
MCACC DUAL soundtracks should be played. Dual mono is not widely CH2 – Channel 2 is heard
tiple preset memories are saved. When an MCACC preset MEMORY 6 d
(MCACC preset) (Dual Mono) used, but is sometimes necessary when two languages only
memory has been renamed, the given name is displayed. Default: M1. MEMORY 1
need to be sent to separate channels. CH1 CH2 – Both channels
EQ ON
heard from front speakers
(Acoustic Calibration Switches on/off the effects of EQ Pro.
EQ) OFF This is useful if you find there is a slight delay before OFF OFF
recognizes the PCM signal on a CD, for instance.
S-WAVE ON
Switches on/off the effects of Standing Wave Control. Fixed PCM When ON is selected, noise may be output during play-
(Standing Wave) OFF back of non-PCM sources. Please select another input ON

For discs created with standards other than Phase Con- signal if this is a problem.
Phase C+ trol, the LFE channel is delayed upon recording in the c 0 to 16 (ms) d Adjusts the level of dynamic range for movie soundtracks AUTO
(Phase Control Plus) first place. This function corrects for phase shifting on Default: 6ms DRC
optimized for Dolby Digital, DTS, Dolby Digital Plus, MAX
such discs. (Dynamic Range
Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD and DTS-HD Master Audio (you
Control) MID
Some monitors have a slight delay when showing video, c 0.0 to 10.0 (frames) d may need to use this feature when listening to surround
<d>
DELAY so the soundtrack will be slightly out of sync with the pic- 1 second = 30 frames sound at low volumes). OFF
(Sound Delay) ture. By adding a bit of delay, you can adjust the sound to (NTSC)
match the presentation of the video. Default: 0.0
TONE Applies the treble and bass tone controls to a source, or BYPASS
(Tone Control) bypasses them completely. ON

48 En
 Using other functions 09

Setting What it does Option(s) Setting What it does Option(s)

Some audio sources include ultra-low bass tones. Set the When you’re not using surround back speakers, select- OFF
V.SB
LFE attenuator as necessary to prevent the ultra-low bass ing this mode allows you to hear a virtual surround
(Virtual Surround
tones from distorting the sound from the speakers. back channel through your surround speakers. You can
c OFF/ –20dB/ –15dB/ Back) ON
LFE The LFE is not limited when set to 0 dB, which is the choose to listen to sources with no surround back chan-
–10dB/ –5dB/ 0dB d <j>
(LFE Attenuate) recommended value. When set to –5 dB, –10 dB, –15 dB nel information.
Default: 0dB
or –20 dB, the LFE is limited by the respective degree. V.HEIGHT When you’re not using front height speakers, selecting OFF
When OFF is selected, no sound is output from the LFE (Virtual Height) this mode allows you to hear a virtual front height chan-
channel. <k> nel through your front speakers. ON

SACD GAIN Brings out detail in SACDs by maximizing the dynamic 0dB OFF
When this mode is selected, the sound field expands
<e> range (during digital processing). +6dB V.DEPTH
virtually to behind the display, resulting in a sound field MIN
HDMI Specifies the routing of the HDMI audio signal out of this AMP (Virtual Depth)
with the same depth as the 3D picture to achieve a better MID
(HDMI Audio) receiver (amp) or through to a TV. When THROUGH is <l>
sense of presence.
THROUGH MAX
<f> selected, no sound is output from this receiver.
This feature automatically corrects the audio-to-video OFF a The adjustment can be made only when TONE is set to ON.
delay between components connected with an HDMI b With the iPod/USB, HOME MEDIA GALLERY or ADAPTER PORT input function, by default S.RTRV is set to
A.DELAY ON.
cable. The audio delay time is set depending on the
(Auto delay) c UP1 to UP4 can be selected only when the front height speaker is connected. The presence or absence of
operational status of the display connected with an ON
<g> effects depends on the listening mode.
HDMI cable. The video delay time is automatically
adjusted according to the audio delay time. d The initially set AUTO is only available for Dolby TrueHD signals. Select MAX or MID for signals other than
Dolby TrueHD.
C.WIDTH e You shouldn’t have any problems using this with most SACD discs, but if the sound distorts, it is best to switch
(Center Width) Provides a better blend of the front speakers by spread- the gain setting back to 0dB.
(Applicable only ing the center channel between the front right and left c 0 to 7 d f ! The HDMI Audio setting cannot be switched while performing synchronized amp mode operations.
when using a center speakers, making it sound wider (higher settings) or Default: 3 ! The synchronized amp mode must be turned on in order to play the receiver’s HDMI audio and video input
speaker) narrower (lower settings). signals from the TV with the receiver’s power in the standby mode. See About synchronized operations on page
<h> 46 .
Adjusts the depth of the surround sound balance from g This feature is only available when the connected display supports the automatic audio/video synchronizing
DIMENSION c –3 to +3 d
front to back, making the sound more distant (minus capability (‘lipsync’) for HDMI. If you find the automatically set delay time unsuitable, set A.DELAY to OFF and
<h> Default: 0
settings), or more forward (positive settings). adjust the delay time manually. For more details about the lipsync feature of your display, contact the manufac-
OFF turer directly.
PANORAMA Extends the front stereo image to include the surround
h Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music/Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode.
<h> speakers for a ‘wraparound’ effect. ON
i Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:6 MUSIC/CINEMA mode.
C.IMAGE j ! You can’t use the Virtual Surround Back mode when the headphones are connected to this receiver or when
(Center Image) Adjusts the center image to create a wider stereo effect c 0 to 10 d any of the stereo, Front Stage Surround Advance, Sound Retriever Air or Stream Direct modes is selected.
(Applicable only with vocals. Adjust the effect from 0 (all center channel Defaults: ! You can only use the Virtual Surround Back mode if the surround speakers are on and the SB setting is set
when using a center sent to front right and left speakers) to 10 (center chan- Neo:6 MUSIC: 3 to NO or if Front Bi-Amp or ZONE 2 is selected at Speaker System. It can also be used when Speaker B is
speaker) nel sent to the center speaker only). Neo:6 CINEMA: 10 selected at Speaker System and SP:dA+B ON is selected with the SPEAKERS button.
<i> k ! You can’t use the Virtual Height mode when the headphones are connected to this receiver or when any of the
c 10 to 90 d stereo, Front Stage Surround Advance, Sound Retriever Air or Stream Direct modes is selected.
Sets the effect level for the currently selected Advanced ! You can only use the Virtual Height mode if the surround speakers are on and the FH setting is set to NO. It
Defaults:
EFFECT Surround or ALC mode (each mode can be set sepa- can also not be used when playing signals containing actual front height channel information.
EXT.STEREO: 90
rately). l ! This mode is effective for contents with a sampling frequency of 48 kHz or less.
Others: 50
! You can’t use the Virtual Depth mode when the headphones are connected to this receiver or when any of the
Adjusts the output from the front height speaker when LOW
H.GAIN stereo, Front Stage Surround Advance, Sound Retriever Air or Stream Direct modes is selected.
listening in 2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT mode. If set to MID ! You can only use the Virtual Depth mode if the surround speakers are on.
(Height Gain)
HIGH, the sound from the top will be more emphasized. HIGH

En 49
09 Using other functions

Setting What it does Option(s)

Setting the Video options
STREAM This improves elements that reduce picture quality mainly OFF
There are a number of additional picture settings you can make using the VIDEO PARAMETER (Stream Smoother) noticeable in network contents, such as mosquito noise and
menu. The defaults, if not stated, are listed in bold. <e> block noise. ON

PDP
Sets the optimum picture quality for the type of monitor that
Important V.ADJ is connected. Select PDP for plasma displays, LCD for liquid LCD
! Note that if an option cannot be selected on the VIDEO PARAMETER menu, it is unavailable due to (Advanced Video crystal monitors, FPJ for front projectors, PRO for profes- FPJ
the current source, setting and status of the receiver. Adjust) sional monitors. If you want to adjust the picture quality PRO
! All of the setting items can be set for each input function. settings to your personal tastes, select MEMORY.
MEMORY
! Setting items other than V.CONV can only be selected when V.CONV is set to ON.
YNR c 0 to +8 d
1 Press to the receiver operation mode, then press VIDEO PARAMETER. Reduces noise in the luminance (Y) signal.
<d, e> Default: 0
2 Use i/j to select the setting you want to adjust. CNR c 0 to +8 d
Reduces noise in the input’s color (C) signal.
Depending on the current status/mode of the receiver, certain options may not be able to be <d, e> Default: 0
selected. Check the table below for notes on this. BNR Reduces block noise (block-shaped distortion generated c 0 to +8 d
3 Use k/l to set as necessary. <d, e> upon MPEG compression) in the picture. Default: 0
See the table below for the options available for each setting. MNR Reduces mosquito noise (distortion generated at the con- c 0 to +8 d
<d, e> tours of the picture upon MPEG compression) in the picture. Default: 0
4 Press RETURN to confirm and exit the menu.
DETAIL c –4 to +4 d
Adjusts how sharp edges appear.
<d, e> Default: 0
Video parameter menu BRIGHT
c –6 to +6 d
(Brightness) Adjusts the overall brightness.
Setting What it does Option(s) Default: 0
<d, e>
V.CONV ON
Converts video signals for output from the MONITOR OUT CONTRAST c –6 to +6 d
(Digital Video Adjusts the contrast between light and dark.
jacks (including HDMI OUT connector) for all video types <d, e> Default: 0
Converter) OFF
(see page 16). HUE c –6 to +6 d
<a> Adjusts the red/green balance.
<d, e> Default: 0
AUTO
CHROMA
PURE c –6 to +6 d
Specifies the output resolution of the video signal (when (Chroma Level) Adjusts saturation from dull to bright.
480p Default: 0
RES video input signals are output at the HDMI OUT connector, <d, e>
(Resolution) select this according to the resolution of your monitor and 720p BLK SETUP Sets the black level according to the video input signal. 7.5
<b> the images you wish to watch). 1080i (Black Setup) Normally select 7.5. If the dark parts of the picture are all
(“480p” indicates the 480p/576p resolution setting.) <f> black with this setting, select 0. 0
1080p
Specifies the aspect ratio when input signals are output at THROUGH
1080/24p ASP
the HDMI output. Make your desired settings while checking
This setting optimizes the operation of the progressive AUTO (Aspect)
PCINEMA each setting on your display (if the image doesn’t match your NORMAL
scanning circuit for playing film materials. Normally set it <g>
(PureCinema) ON monitor type, cropping or black bands appear).
to AUTO. If the picture seems unnatural, switch this to ON
<c, e> OFF a If the video picture deteriorates when this settings is switched ON, switch it OFF.
or OFF.
b ! When set to a resolution with which the TV (monitor) is not compatible, no picture is output. Also, in some
P.MOTION cases no picture will be output due to copyright protection signals. In this case, change the setting.
Adjusts the motion and still picture quality when video c –4 to +4 d
(Progressive Motion) ! When AUTO is selected, the resolution is selected automatically according to the capacity of the TV (monitor)
output is set to progressive. Default: 0
<c, e> connected by HDMI. When PURE is selected, the signals are output with the same resolution as when input
(see About the video converter on page 16 ).
! If this is set to something other than AUTO, PURE and 480i/576i analog signals are input, 480p/576p signals
are output from the component output terminals.
50 En
 Using other functions 09

c ! This setting is valid for component outputs and switched automatically according to the audio
HDMI output. Switching the speaker input signal. Using the MULTI-ZONE controls
! P.MOTION is disabled when PCINEMA is set to
ON.
terminals ! SP: SB ON – Surround back channels are The following steps use the front panel con-
added to the front, center and surround trols to adjust the sub zone volume and select
! This setting have the effect only for pictures If you selected Normal(SB/FH),
channels (maximum 5 channels) and a sources. See MULTI-ZONE remote controls on
recorded in the interlaced scan format (480i/576i or Normal(SB/FW) or Speaker B at Speaker
1080i signals). maximum of 7 channels are output. page 52 .
system setting on page 66 , you can switch
d Adjustment is not possible unless V.ADJ (Advanced ! SP: FW ON – Front wide channels are added
between speakers using the SPEAKERS button. 1 Press MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF on the
Video Adjust) is set to MEMORY. to the front, center and surround channels
If you selected Front Bi-Amp or ZONE 2, the front panel.
e ! This setting is only displayed when the video (maximum 5 channels) and a maximum of 7
button will simply switch your main speaker Each press selects a MULTI-ZONE option:
signals below are being input: channels are output.
— 480i, 576i, 480p, 576p, 720p, 1080i analog video
terminals on or off. ! ZONE 2 ON – Selects your primary (ZONE 2)
! SP: OFF – No sound is output from the
signals % Use SPEAKERS on the front panel to sub zone
speakers.
— 480i, 576i, 480p, 576p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p, select a speaker system setting. ! MULTI ZONE OFF – Switches the MULTI-
When you select Speaker B, you can select from:
1080p24 HDMI video signals As mentioned above, if you have selected ZONE feature off
f This adjustment is only possible when 480i signals
! SP: A ON – Sound is output from the
Front Bi-Amp or ZONE 2, the button will simply The MULTI-ZONE indicator lights when the
are being input from the composite video jacks. A-speaker terminals (up to 7 channels
switch your main speaker terminal (A) on or off. MULTI-ZONE control has been switched ON.
g ! If the image doesn’t match your monitor type, (including surround back channels),
adjust the aspect ratio on the source component or Press repeatedly to choose a speaker terminal depending on the source). 2 Press MULTI-ZONE CONTROL on the
on the monitor. option: ! SP: B ON – Sound is output from the two front panel to select the sub zone(s) you
! This setting is only displayed when 480i/p or 576i/p When you select Normal(SB/FH), you can select speakers connected to the B-speaker want.
video signals are being input. from: terminals. Multichannel sources will not be ! When the receiver is on, make sure that any
! SP: SB/FH ON – Surround back or front height heard. operations for the sub zone are done while
channels are added to the front, center and ! SP: A+B ON – Sound is output from the ZONE and your selected sub zone(s) show in
surround channels (maximum 5 channels) A-speaker terminals (up to 5 channels, the display. If this is not showing, the front
and a maximum of 7 channels are output. The depending on the source), the two speakers panel controls affect the main zone only.
surround back and front height channels are connected to the B-speaker terminals, and If the receiver is in standby, the display is
switched automatically according to the audio the subwoofer. The sound from the B-speaker dimmed, and ZONE and your selected sub
input signal. terminals will be the same as the sound zone(s) continue to show in the display.
! SP: SB ON – Surround back channels are from the A-speaker terminals (multichannel 3 Use the INPUT SELECTOR dial to select
added to the front, center and surround sources will be downmixed to 2 channels). the source for the zone you have selected.
channels (maximum 5 channels) and a ! SP: OFF – No sound is output from the For example, ZONE 2 DVD sends the source
maximum of 7 channels are output. speakers. connected to the DVD inputs to the primary
! SP: FH ON – Front height channels are added
(ZONE 2) sub room.
to the front, center and surround channels
Note ! If you select TUNER, you can use the tuner
(maximum 5 channels) and a maximum of 7
! The subwoofer output depends on the settings controls to select a preset station (see Saving
channels are output.
you made in Manual speaker setup on page 66 station presets on page 32 if you’re unsure
! SP: OFF – No sound is output from the
. However, if SP: B ON is selected above, no how to do this). The tuner cannot be tuned to
speakers.
sound is heard from the subwoofer (the LFE more than one station at a time. Therefore,
When you select Normal(SB/FW), you can select
channel is not downmixed). changing the station in one zone also
from:
! All speaker systems (except changes the station in the other zone. Please
! SP: SB/FW ON – Surround back or front wide
Speaker B connections) are switched off be careful not to change stations when
channels are added to the front, center and
when headphones are connected. recording a radio broadcast.
surround channels (maximum 5 channels)
and a maximum of 7 channels are output. The
surround back and front wide channels are

En 51
09 Using other functions

4 When Speaker System is set to ZONE 2, 4 Prepare the recorder. ! You can check the remaining sleep time at
use the MASTER VOLUME dial to adjust Making an audio or a video Insert a blank tape, MD, video etc. into the any time by pressing SLEEP once. Pressing
the volume for the sub zone. recording recording device and set the recording levels. repeatedly will cycle through the sleep options
Refer to the instructions that came with the again.
5 When you’re finished, press You can make an audio or a video recording
recorder if you are unsure how to do this. Most ! The sleep timer is valid for all zones. If
MULTI-ZONE CONTROL again to return to from the built-in tuner, or from an audio or video
video recorders set the audio recording level any zone is on, the sleep timer continues
the main zone controls. source connected to the receiver (such as a CD
automatically-check the component’s instruc- functioning.
You can also press MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF on player or TV).
Keep in mind you can’t make a digital record- tion manual if you’re unsure.
the front panel to switch off all output to the sub
zone(s). ing from an analog source or vice-versa, so 5 Start recording, then start playback of
! You won’t be able to switch the main zone make sure the components you are recording the source component. Dimming the display
off completely unless you’ve switched off the to/from are hooked up in the same way (see You can choose between four brightness levels
MULTI-ZONE control first. Connecting your equipment on page 11 for more for the front panel display. Note that when
! If you don’t plan to use the MULTI-ZONE on connections). Reducing the level of an selecting sources, the display automatically
feature for a while, turn off the power in both ! The receiver’s volume, Audio parameters (the analog signal brightens for a few seconds.
the sub and main rooms so that this receiver tone controls, for example), and surround % Press to the receiver operation
The input attenuator lowers the input level of an
is in standby. effects have no effect on the recorded signal. mode, then press DIMMER repeatedly to
analog signal when it’s too strong. You can use
! Some digital sources are copy-protected, and change the brightness of the front panel
this if you find that the OVER indicator lights
MULTI-ZONE remote controls can only be recorded in analog. display.
often or you can hear distortion in the sound.
! Some video sources are copy-protected. These ! You can also choose to turn the display off. In
Press the remote control’s ZONE 2 to operate The attenuator isn’t available with digital
cannot be recorded. this case, the FL OFF indicator lights.
the ZONE 2. sources, or when using the Stream Direct
Since the video converter is not available when
The following table shows the possible MULTI- (ANALOG DIRECT) modes.
making recordings (from the video OUT jacks)
ZONE remote controls: % Press to the receiver operation
make sure to use the same type of video cable Checking your system settings
Button(s) What it does for connecting your recorder as you used to mode, then press A.ATT to switch the
input attenuator on or off. Use the status display screen to check your
Switches on/off power in the sub
connect your video source (the one you want to
current settings for features such as surround
u
zone. record) to this receiver. For example, you must
back channel processing and your current
connect your recorder using Component video
INPUT Use to select the input function in the MCACC preset.
SELECT sub zone. if your source has also been connected using Using the sleep timer
Component video. The sleep timer switches the receiver into 1 Press to the receiver operation
Use to select the input function
Input func- standby after a specified amount of time so mode, then press STATUS to check the
directly (this may not work for some 1 Select the source you want to record.
tion buttons you can fall asleep without worrying about the system settings.
functions) in the sub zone. Use the input function buttons (or
receiver being left on all night. Use the remote The front panel display shows each of the fol-
MASTER INPUT SELECT).
control to set the sleep timer. lowing settings for three seconds each: Input
VOLUME Use to set the listening volume in the 2 Prepare the source you want to record.
+/– sub zone. Source d Sampling Frequency d MCACC
Tune to the radio station, load the CD, video, % Press to the receiver operation
<a> preset d ZONE 2 input.
DVD etc. mode, then press SLEEP repeatedly to set
Mutes the sound or restores the the sleep time. 2 When you’re finished, press STATUS
MUTE 3 Select the input signal according to the
<a>
sound if it has been muted (adjusting again to switch off the display.
the volume also restores the sound). signal to be recorded. 30 min 60 min
a You can only use this button when Speaker System Use the remote control’s SIGNAL SEL button.
is set to ZONE 2. Off 90 min

52 En
 Using other functions 09

Default system settings Setting Default

Resetting the system
DRC AUTO
Use this procedure to reset all the receiver’s Setting Default
SACD Gain 0 dB
settings to the factory default. Use the front Digital Video Converter ON
LFE Attenuate 0 dB
panel controls to do this. Set MULTI-ZONE to SPEAKERS SB/FH
MULTI ZONE OFF. Auto delay OFF
Normal
! Disconnect the iPod and USB memory device Speaker System
(SB/FH)
Digital Safety OFF
from the receiver beforehand. ExtendedStereo 90
Front SMALL Effect Level
! Set the Control with HDMI to OFF (see HDMI Other modes 50
Setup on page 45 ). Center SMALL
Center Width 3
FH/FW SMALL 2 PL II Music
1 Switch the receiver into standby. Speaker Setting Dimension 0
Surr SMALL Options
2 While holding down ENTER on the Panorama OFF
SB SMALLx2
front panel, press u STANDBY/ON. Neo:6
The display shows RESET c NO d. SW YES
CINEMA: 10
Surround Position IN REAR Neo:6 Options Center Image
3 Select ‘RESET’ using PRESET k/l, Neo:6
Crossover 80 Hz MUSIC: 3
then press ENTER on the front panel.
The display shows RESET? OK. X-Curve OFF 2 PL IIz Options Height Gain MID

4 Press ENTER to confirm. DIMMER Brightest Listening Mode AUTO

Inputs (2 ch/multi ch) SURROUND
OK appears in the display to indicate that the All Inputs
receiver has been reset to the factory default See Input function default and possible settings on Listening Mode
STEREO
(Headphones)
settings. page 27 .
! Note that all settings will be saved, even if the HDMI See also Setting the Audio options on page 48 for
receiver is unplugged. other default DSP settings.
HDMI Audio Amp
MCACC
Control ON
M1:
Control Mode PQLS MCACC Position Memory
MEMORY 1
Display Power Off NO Channel Level (M1 to M6) 0.0 dB
Audio playback Speaker Distance (M1 to M6) 10’00’’
Power On Level LAST ATT of all
Standing Wave 0.0 dB
Volume Limit OFF channels/filters
(M1 to M6)
Mute Level FULL SWch Wide Trim 0.0 dB
Phase Control ON All channels/
EQ Data (M1 0.0 dB
iPod/USB, bands
to M6)
HOME MEDIA EQ Wide Trim 0.0 dB
GALLERY, ON
Auto Sound ADAPTER PORT
Retriever input function
Other input
OFF
functions
Sound Delay 0.0 frame
Dual Mono CH1

En 53
10 Controlling the rest of your system

Controlling the rest of your system Note Setting the remote to control
! You can cancel or exit any of the steps by other components
pressing RCU SETUP. Most components can be assigned to one of
Setting What it does
About the Remote Setup menu ! After one minute of inactivity, the remote the input function buttons (such as DVD or CD)
This is a setting for changing only the automatically exits the operation.
The Remote Setup mode is set by pressing the remote control unit’s operation screen,
using the component’s manufacturer preset
number button while pressing RCU SETUP. The without changing the receiver’s input, code stored in the remote.
different items on the Remote Setup menu are when the remote control unit’s input However, there are cases where only certain
Direct
function buttons are pressed. This
Operating multiple receivers functions may be controllable after assigning
described below. For their setting procedures, function
refer to the explanations for the respective is convenient for using the remote Up to four receivers can be operated discretely the proper preset code, or the codes for the
control unit for devices not connected using this receiver’s remote control when using manufacturer in the remote control will not
items.
to the receiver. See Direct function on multiple receivers, provided they are of the work for the model that you are using.
Setting What it does page 56 .
same model as this receiver. The receiver to be If you can’t find a preset code that matches the
Preset codes can be set for the various This function is used to erase remote operated is switched by inputting the preset component you want to control, you can still
input functions. The remote control control codes that have been learned. code to set the remote control setting. teach the remote individual commands from
codes of a number of other devices Erase Codes learned for the different input
! Set the remote modes on the receivers before another remote control (see Programming sig-
Preset (including products of other brands) learning functions can be erased individually.
using this function (see Remote Control Mode nals from other remote controls on page 55 ).
recall are preset in the remote control to See Erasing one of the remote control
button settings on page 55 . Setup on page 71 ). ! For greater convenience, assign the TV
allow these devices to be operated.
See Selecting preset codes directly on 1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press connected to the MONITOR OUT terminal to
The backlight lighting pattern can be
page 55 . selected from among four modes, in ‘4’ for three seconds. the TV CTRL button, and assign your satellite/
If the desired operations cannot be Back light consideration of convenience and Release the button after the LED flashes once. cable receiver or set-top box connected to the
performed even though you have set battery service life. See Setting the The LED continues to flash. TV/SAT input terminal to the TV/SAT input
Code the preset codes, the remote control backlight mode on page 56 . ! To cancel the preset setup mode press button. If a single device is connected to both
learning signals of other devices can be learned This is a function for resetting preset RCU SETUP. terminals, that device should be assigned to
directly. See Programming signals from codes that have been set. Key reset- both the TV CTRL and TV/SAT input buttons.
other remote controls on page 55 . Reset ting can be done for individual input
2 Press the number button for the ! Devices may be assigned to the following
A series of the remote control opera- function functions. See Erasing all learnt set- receiver (“Receiver 1” to “Receiver 4”) you input function buttons.
tions for starting listening or viewing tings that are in one input function on wish to operate.
Multi can be programmed. Multiple remote page 55 . For example, to operate “Receiver 2”, press ‘2’. RECEIVER MULTI
OPERATION
SOURCE

operation control codes can be set for the differ- This is a function for resetting all If the LED lights for one second and continues
RCU SETUP
ent input functions. See Multi Opera- remote control unit settings you have to flash, the setting has been successfully BDR
tion and System Off on page 56 . All reset made to the defaults set upon ship- completed. BD DVD DVR HDMI

This is a function for automatically ment from the factory. See Resetting When the preset code is input, the LED flashes SAT
TV CD HMG ADPT

turning off the power of devices con- the remote control settings on page 57 . three times to indicate that the setting has USB OPTION

System nected to the receiver. Multiple remote If you have multiple Pioneer receivers, failed.
iPod TUNER SIRIUS

INPUT SELECT TV CTRL RECEIVER

off control codes can be set, as desired. amplifiers, etc., this setting can be
See Multi Operation and System Off on Change used to prevent other units from oper-
page 56 . RC mode ating simultaneously when the remote
control unit is operated. See Operating
multiple receivers on page 54 .

54 En
 Controlling the rest of your system 10

The remote can store about 120 preset codes 1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press
Selecting preset codes directly from other components (this has been tested ‘7’ for three seconds.
with codes of Pioneer format only). 3 cm Release the button after the LED flashes once.
1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press (1 inch)
Certain buttons represent operations that can- The LED continues to flash.
‘1’ for three seconds. This receiver’s Other remote
not be learned from other remote controls. The remote control control ! To cancel the preset setup mode press
Release the button after the LED flashes once.
buttons available are shown below: RCU SETUP.
The LED continues to flash.
! To cancel the preset setup mode press AUDIO VIDEO
4 Press the corresponding button on 2 Press the input function button
RECEIVER MULTI SOURCE
the other remote control that is sending
PARAMETER PARAMETER

RCU SETUP.
OPERATION
LIST TUNE TOOLS corresponding to the command to be
RCU SETUP TOP MENU T.EDIT (teaching) the signal to this receiver’s erased, then press ENTER.
2 Press the input function button for the BAND GUIDE
BDR
remote control. The LED flashes once.
component you want to control. BD DVD DVR HDMI PRESET ENTER PRESET
If the LED lights for one second and continues
3 Press and hold the button to be erased
SAT
When assigning preset codes to TV CONTROL, TV CD HMG ADPT
CATEGORY RETURN
to flash, the setting has been successfully
press TV CTRL here. USB OPTION
HOME for three seconds.
iPod TUNER SIRIUS MENU TUNE
completed.
The LED blinks once and flashes continuously. iPod CTRL
If the LED lights for one second, the erasing has
! If the LED flashes for five seconds, it means
INPUT SELECT TV CTRL RECEIVER
AUTO / ALC / PGM MEMORY MENU
DIRECT STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR
been successfully completed.
3 Use the number buttons to enter the MASTER
HDD DVD
the memory is full. See Erasing all learnt
4-digit preset code. INPUT VOLUME THX PHASE CTRL STATUS
settings that are in one input function on 4 Repeat step 3 to erase other buttons.
See Preset code list on page 93 . TV CONTROL TV / DTV MPX PQLS
page 55 to erase a programmed button 5 Press RCU SETUP to exit the erasing
If the LED lights for one second and continues CH VOL MUTE HDMI OUT AUDIO you’re not using to free up more memory mode.
to flash, the setting has been successfully 1 2 3
(note that some signals may take more
SIGNAL SEL MCACC SLEEP INFO
completed. 4 5 6 DISP memory than others).
When the preset code is fully input, the LED CH LEVEL A.ATT
7 8
DIMMER
9
! Note that interference from TVs or other Erasing all learnt settings that
flashes three times to indicate that the setting D.ACCESS CLASS CH devices will sometimes result in the remote are in one input function
0
has failed. If this happens, enter the 4-digit
/ CLR ENTER
control learning the wrong signal.
preset code again.
ZONE 2 ZONE 3 LIGHT

! Some commands from other remote controls This operation erases all the operational
cannot be learned, but in most cases the settings of other devices that have been pro-
4 Repeat steps 2 through 3 for the other grammed in one input function, and restores
components you want to control. remotes just need to be moved closer
1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press the factory default.
To try out the remote control, switch the com- together or farther apart.
‘2’ for three seconds. This function is handy for erasing all data pro-
ponent on or off (into standby) by pressing u Release the button after the LED flashes once. 5 To program additional signals for the grammed for devices no longer being used.
SOURCE. If it doesn’t seem to work, select the The LED continues to flash. current component repeat steps 3 and 4.
next code from the list (if there is one). To program signals for another component, exit
1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press
! To cancel the preset setup mode press
and repeat steps 2 through 4. ‘9’ for three seconds.
5 Press RCU SETUP to exit the preset RCU SETUP.
Release the button after the LED flashes once.
setup mode. 2 Press the input function button for the 6 Press RCU SETUP to exit the The LED continues to flash.
component you want to control. programming mode. ! To cancel the preset setup mode press
The LED blinks once and flashes continuously. RCU SETUP.
Programming signals from 3 Point the two remote controls towards
Erasing one of the remote 2 Press and hold the input function
other remote controls each other, then press the button that will button corresponding to the command to
If the preset code for your component is not be doing the learning on this receiver’s control button settings be erased for three seconds.
available, or the available preset codes do not remote control. This erases one of the buttons you have pro- If the LED lights for one second, the erasing has
operate correctly, you can program signals from The LED flashes once, then stops flashing, grammed and restores the button to the factory been successfully completed.
the remote control of another component. This remaining lit. default.
can also be used to program additional opera- ! The remote controls should be 3 cm (1 inch)
tions (buttons not covered in the presets) after apart.
assigning a preset code.
En 55
10 Controlling the rest of your system

Direct function Setting the backlight mode Multi Operation and System Note
! Default setting: On ! Default setting: 1 (normal mode) Off ! Before Multi operation and System off will
You can use the direct function feature to con- The backlight lighting pattern can be selected The Multi operation feature allows you to work correctly, you must setup the remote to
trol one component using the remote control from among four modes, in consideration of program a series of up to 5 commands for the work with your TV and other components (see
while at the same time, using your receiver to convenience and battery service life. components in your system. Setting the remote to control other components
playback a different component. This could let ! Be sure to call up the preset codes of devices on page 54 for more on this).
1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press
you, for example, use the remote control to set or perform programming signals for other ! Some units may take some time to power up,
‘6’ for three seconds.
up and listen to a CD on the receiver, and then remote controls before multi operation in which case multiple operations may not be
Release the button after the LED flashes once.
use the remote control to rewind a tape in your memory programming (page 55). possible.
The LED continues to flash.
VCR while you continue to listen to your CD The Multi operation feature makes it easy to ! Power on and off commands only work with
! To cancel the preset setup mode press
player. perform the following operations by pressing components that have a standby mode.
RCU SETUP.
When direct function is on, any component you just two buttons. ! Some remote controllers for other
select (using the input function buttons) will be 2 Press the number button for the manufacturers’ devices use the same signals
Press MULTI OPERATION and then the DVD
selected by both the receiver and the remote backlight mode you want to set. for switching the power on and off. In some
input function button to:
control. When you turn direct function off, you ! ‘1’ (normal mode) – The backlight is turned cases, even if this receiver is programmed to
1. Switch this receiver on.
can operate the remote control without affect- on and off with the light button. After it lights, perform these commands, power to the non-
2. Switch this receiver’s input to DVD.
ing the receiver. it turns off automatically if no operation is Pioneer devices may not be switched on and
3. Transmit a sequence of up to five pro-
performed for 10 seconds. off correctly. Program the receiver to perform
1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press grammed commands.
! ‘2’ (frequent lighting mode) – The backlight these commands if the non-Pioneer device
‘5’ for three seconds. Similar to Multi operations, System off allows
turns on when any button on the remote uses separate signals for power on/off.
Release the button after the LED flashes once. you to use two buttons to stop and switch off
control is pressed. It is turned off with
The LED continues to flash. a series of components in your system at the
the light button. After it lights, it turns off
! To cancel the preset setup mode press same time. Only one System off operation Programming a multi-operation
automatically if no operation is performed for
RCU SETUP. 10 seconds.
sequence may be programmed. or a shutdown sequence
Press MULTI OPERATION and then u SOURCE
2 Press the input function button for the ! ‘3’ (eco mode) – The backlight is turned on 1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press
to:
component you want to control. and off with the light button. After it lights, ‘3’ for three seconds.
1. Transmit a sequence of up to five pro-
3 Press ‘1’ (On) or ‘0’ (Off) to switch the it turns off automatically if no operation is Release the button after the LED flashes once.
grammed commands.
direct function mode. performed for 5 seconds. The LED continues to flash.
2. Switch off all Pioneer devices including the
If the LED lights for one second and continues ! ‘4’ (off mode) – The backlight does not turn ! To cancel the preset setup mode press
receiver (except DVD recorders and VCRs).
to flash, the setting has been successfully on even when the light button is pressed. RCU SETUP.
For greater convenience, program this receiver
completed. If the LED lights for one second and continues
to perform power on/off and playback opera- 2 Press the input function button (or u
If the LED flashes three times, the setting has to flash, the setting has been successfully
tions on non-Pioneer devices as well. (The SOURCE button).
failed. completed.
signals for Pioneer devices described above For Multi operations, press the input function
If the LED flashes three times, the setting has
4 Press RCU SETUP to exit the setup. are not contingent on programming for non- you wish to program (for example, if you want
failed.
Pioneer devices.) to start the sequence by switching on your DVD
3 Press RCU SETUP to exit the setup. The buttons that can be programmed using player, press DVD).
Multi operation or System off are the same but- ! With Multi operation, the HDMI and TV CTRL
tons as those that can be programmed for other settings cannot be made. For other settable
remote controls (see Programming signals from input functions, see Setting the remote to
other remote controls on page 55 ). control other components on page 54 .
For System off, press the u SOURCE button.
The LED blinks twice and flashes continuously.

56 En
 Controlling the rest of your system 10

3 If necessary, press the input function off, followed by this receiver (switch of all the
zones becomes off).
Default preset codes
button for the component whose
command you want to input. ! In order to avoid accidently switching off a
Input function button Preset code
This is only necessary if the command is for a DVD recorder that is currently recording, no
DVD 2158
new component (input function). DVD recorder power off codes are sent.
BD 2160
4 Select the button for the command
Erasing the settings for the DVR/BDR 2150
you want to input.
The LED blinks once and flashes continuously. multi-operation HDMI 2159
! You don’t need to program the receiver to TV/SAT 0116
This erases all the settings programmed in the
switch on or off. This is done automatically. remote control for the multi-operation. CD 5066
With Pioneer components, you don’t need to TV CTRL 0116
1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press
program the power to switch off in a shutdown
sequence (except DVD recorders).
‘8’ for three seconds.
Release the button after the LED flashes once.
5 Repeat steps 3 to 4 to program a The LED continues to flash.
sequence of up to five commands. ! To cancel the preset setup mode press
If you press RCU SETUP before programming is RCU SETUP.
completed, commands programmed up to that
2 Press the input function button
point will be stored.
containing the program you want to
6 Press RCU SETUP to exit the cancel or the u SOURCE button for three
programming mode. seconds.
If the LED lights for one second, the erasing has
Using multi operations been successfully completed.

1 Press MULTI OPERATION.

Release the button after the LED flashes once.
Resetting the remote control
The LED continues to flash.
settings
2 Within five seconds, press an input
Use this procedure to reset all the remote con-
function button that has been set up with
trol’s settings to the factory default.
a multi operation.
! When preset codes are set, all the signals
The receiver switches on (if it was in standby)
learned in the input function buttons are
and the programmed multi operation is per-
cleared. This function is convenient when you
formed automatically.
want to reset some but not all of input function
buttons.
Using System off
1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press
1 Press MULTI OPERATION. ‘0’ for three seconds.
Release the button after the LED flashes once. Release the button after the LED flashes once.
The LED continues to flash. The LED continues to flash.
2 Within five seconds, press u SOURCE. 2 Press and hold the ENTER button for
The command sequence you programmed will three seconds.
run, then all Pioneer components will switch If the LED lights for one second, the erasing has
been successfully completed.

En 57
10 Controlling the rest of your system

Controlling components TV and Audio/Video components

This remote control can control components after entering the proper codes (see Setting the remote HDD/ SAT/
to control other components on page 54 for more on this). Use the input function buttons to select Button(s) TV TV (Monitor) BD/DVD VCR
BDR/DVR CATV
the component.
POWER ON/ POWER ON/ POWER ON/ POWER ON/ POWER ON/
! The TV CONTROL buttons on the remote control are dedicated to control the TV assigned to the u SOURCE
OFF
POWER ON/OFF
OFF OFF OFF OFF
TV CTRL button. If you have two TVs, assign the main TV to the TV CTRL button.
Number buttons numerics numerics numerics numerics numerics numerics
RECEIVER MULTI
OPERATION
SOURCE !/CLR k (dot) KURO LINK CLEAR + — *
RCU SETUP ENTER (CLASS) CH ENTER CH ENTER ENTER ENTER — ENTER
BDR
BD DVD DVR HDMI

SAT
EXIT/INFO EXIT TOP MENU TOP MENU — LIST
TV CD HMG ADPT

USB OPTION TOOLS/ TOOLS

iPod TUNER SIRIUS USER MENU GUIDE — GUIDE
INPUT SELECT TV CTRL RECEIVER GUIDE/EPG <a>

MASTER
i/j/k/l i/j/k/l i/j/k/l i/j/k/l i/j/k/l — i/j/k/l
INPUT VOLUME

ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER — ENTER

TV CONTROL

HOME HOME HOME

CH VOL MUTE HOME MENU HOME MENU —
MENU MENU MENU
AUDIO VIDEO
PARAMETER
LIST TUNE TOOLS
PARAMETER
RETURN RETURN RETURN RETURN — RETURN
TOP MENU T.EDIT
BAND GUIDE HDD (Red) Red Red — HDD — Red
DVD (Green) Green Green — DVD — Green
PRESET ENTER PRESET

CATEGORY RETURN

HOME
TUNE
(Yellow) Yellow Yellow — VCR — Yellow
MENU
iPod CTRL
AUTO / ALC / PGM MEMORY MENU
DIRECT STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR (Blue) Blue Blue MENU MENU — Blue
HDD DVD

THX PHASE CTRL STATUS d — — d d d d

TV / DTV MPX PQLS e — AUTO SETUP e e e e

1
HDMI OUT
2 3
AUDIO
g — FREEZE g g g g
SIGNAL SEL MCACC
4 5
SLEEP
6
INFO
DISP
m — — m m m m
CH LEVEL A.ATT
7 8
DIMMER
9 n — — n n n n
D.ACCESS CLASS CH
/ CLR 0 ENTER o ANT AV SELECTION o o — o
ZONE 2 ZONE 3 LIGHT
p — SCREEN SIZE p p — p
AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO
DISPLAY/
DISP DISPLAY DISPLAY DISPLAY DISPLAY —
RECEIVER INFO
OUTPUT
RESOLUTION
CH +/– CH +/– CH +/– CH +/– CH +/– CH +/–
+/–
<a>
a Controls for BD.

58 En
 Controlling the rest of your system 10

Audio/Video components TV (Projector)

CD/CD-R/ Button(s) TV (Projector)

Button(s) LD MD/DAT TAPE
SACD u SOURCE POWER ON
u SOURCE POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF 1 MOVIE
Number buttons numerics numerics numerics — 2 STANDARD
CLEAR 3 DYNAMIC
!/CLR +10 >10/CLEAR CLEAR
<a>
4 USER1
OPEN/CLOSE
ENTER (CLASS) ENTER DISC/ENTER ENTER 5 USER2
<a>
6 USER3
TOP MENU — — MSc
7 COLOR+
LEGATO LINK 8 SHARP+
— — MSd
<b>
9 GAMMA
i/j/k/l i/j/k/l — — e/g/m/n
0 COLOR–
ENTER ENTER — — —
!/CLR SHARP–
SACD SETUP
— — — ENTER (CLASS) COLOR TEMP
<b>
EXIT
RETURN — — —
d d d d d INFO
e e e e e
i/j/k/l i/j/k/l
g g g g g
ENTER ENTER
m m m m m
TEST
n n n n n
o o o o o HIDE

p p p p p MENU
PURE AUDIO m HDMI1
AUDIO AUDIO — —
<b> HDMI2
d
TIME COMP.
DISP DISPLAY/INFO — — n
<b>
o VIDEO
a Controls for MD.
b Controls for SACD. e S-VIDEO
g BRIGHT–
p BRIGHT+
AUDIO POWER OFF
DISP ASPECT
CH +/– CONTRAST+/–

En 59
11 The Advanced MCACC menu

The Advanced MCACC menu

! EQ Type (only available when
CAUTION the Auto MCACC Menu above is
! The test tones used in the Auto MCACC Setup EQ Pro & S-Wave) – This determines how
are output at high volume. the frequency balance is adjusted.
4 Select the setting you want to adjust. After a single calibration is performed, each
Making receiver settings from ! Full Auto MCACC – See Automatically 1 Select ‘Auto MCACC’ from the
of the following three correction curves can
the Advanced MCACC menu conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto Advanced MCACC menu, then press
be stored separately in the MCACC memory.
The Advanced MCACC (Multi Channel ACoustic MCACC) on page 25 for a quick and effective ENTER.
SYMMETRY implements symmetric correc-
Calibration) system was developed in Pioneer’s automatic surround setup. If the Advanced MCACC screen is not dis-
tion for each pair of left and right speakers
laboratories with the aim of making it possible ! Auto MCACC – See Automatic MCACC played, refer to Making receiver settings from the
to flatten the frequency-amplitude charac-
for home users to perform adjustments of the (Expert) on page 60 for a more detailed Advanced MCACC menu on page 60 .
teristics. ALL CH ADJ is a ‘flat’ setting where
same level as in a studio easily and with high MCACC setup. 2 Select the parameters you want to set. all the speakers are set individually so no
precision. The acoustic characteristics of the ! Manual MCACC – Fine-tunes your speaker Use i/j to select the item, then use k/l to special weighting is given to any one channel.
listening environment are measured and the settings and customizes the Acoustic set. FRONT ALIGN sets all speakers in accordance
frequency response is calibrated accordingly Calibration EQ (see Manual MCACC setup on ! Auto MCACC – The default is ALL with the front speaker settings (no equalization
to allow high precision, automatic analysis and page 62 ). (recommended), but you can limit the system is applied to the front left and right channels).
optimal calibration of the sound field to bring it ! Demo – No settings are saved and no errors calibration to only one setting (to save time) if If you selected ALL or Keep SP System as
closer to a studio environment than ever before. occur. When the speakers are connected you want. your Auto MCACC menu, you can specify the
Furthermore, while it was previously difficult to this receiver, the test tone is output — When data measurement is taken (after MCACC preset where you want to save the
to eliminate standing waves, this receiver is repeatedly. Press RETURN to cancel the test selecting ALL or Keep SP System), the SYMMETRY, ALL CH ADJ and FRONT ALIGN
equipped with a standing wave control function tone. reverb characteristics data (both before- settings.
using a unique process to perform acoustic and after-calibration) that this receiver ! THX Speaker (only available when the
analysis and reduce their influence. had been storing will be overwritten. Auto MCACC Menu above is ALL or
This section describes how to calibrate the Automatic MCACC (Expert) — When measurement is performed Speaker Setting) – Select YES when using
sound field automatically and fine-adjust the If your setup requires more detailed settings with other than SYMMETRY (after THX speakers (all speakers other than the
sound field data manually. than those provided in Automatically conducting selecting ALL or Keep SP System), front speakers are set to SMALL). In other
1 Press u RECEIVER to switch on the optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on the reverberation characteristics after cases, leave at NO.
receiver and your TV. page 25 , you can customize your setup options calibration cannot be predicted, so ! STAND.WAVE Multi-Point (only available
Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this below. You can calibrate your system differently the graph for the characteristics after when the Auto MCACC Menu above
receiver. for up to six different MCACC presets, which are calibration (“After”) cannot be displayed. is EQ Pro & S-Wave) – In addition to
useful if you have different listening positions If you will need to display the graph for measurements at the listening position,
2 Press on the remote control, the characteristics after calibration
depending on the type of source (for example, you can use two more reference points for
then press HOME MENU. (“After”), take the measurement using
watching movies from a sofa, or playing a video which test tones will be analyzed for standing
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen the EQ Professional menu in the
game close to the TV). waves. This is useful if you want to get a
appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and Manual MCACC setup (page 62). balanced ‘flat’ calibration for several seating
ENTER to navigate through the screens and — The EQ Pro & S-Wave measurement is positions in your listening area. Place the
select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the Important also taken when ALL or Keep SP System microphone at the reference point indicated
current menu. ! Make sure the microphone/speakers are not is selected. See Acoustic Calibration EQ on-screen and note that the last microphone
! Press HOME MENU at any time to exit the moved during the Auto MCACC Setup. Professional on page 63 for more on this. placement will be at your main listening
Home Menu. ! The screen saver will automatically appear — Either effect of Acoustic Calibration EQ position:
3 Select ‘Advanced MCACC’ from the after five minutes of inactivity. Professional and Standing Wave can
Home Menu, then press ENTER. be switched on and off in the respective
MCACC preset. For details, see Setting
the Audio options on page 48 .

60 En
 The Advanced MCACC menu 11

6 Wait for the Auto MCACC Setup to If Reverse Phase is displayed, the speaker’s ! If Auto MCACC Setup measurement results
2nd reference 3rd reference finish outputting test tones. wiring (+ and –) may be inverted. Check the are incorrect due to the interaction of the
point point A progress report is displayed on-screen while speaker connections. speakers and viewing environment, we
1 2 the receiver outputs test tones to determine — If the connections were wrong, turn off recommend adjusting the settings manually.
the speakers present in your setup. Try to be as the power, disconnect the power cord, You can also choose to view the settings by
quiet as possible while it’s doing this. then reconnect properly. After this, selecting individual parameters from the
3
Main listening ! With error messages (such as Too much perform the Auto MCACC procedure MCACC Data Check screen (see Checking
position ambient noise! or Check microphone.), again. MCACC Data on page 64 ).
select RETRY after checking for ambient — If the connections were right, select Press RETURN after you have finished check-
noise (see Problems when using the Auto GO NEXT and continue. ing each screen. When you’re finished, select
3 Connect the microphone to the MCACC MCACC Setup on page 26 ) and verifying the RETURN to go back to the Home Menu.
8 Make sure ‘OK’ is selected, then press
SETUP MIC jack on the front panel. mic connection. If there doesn’t seem to be Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this
ENTER.
Make sure there are no obstacles between the a problem, you can simply select GO NEXT receiver upon completion of the Auto MCACC
A progress report is displayed on-screen while
speakers and the microphone. and continue. Setup.
the receiver outputs more test tones to deter-
! Do not adjust the volume during the test mine the optimum receiver settings.
MULTI-ZONE iPod iPhone iPad
DIRECT CONTROL
AUTO SURR/ALC/
STREAM DIRECT
tones. This may result in incorrect speaker Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this is
CONTROL ON/OFF
settings. happening. It may take 3 to 7 minutes.
7 If necessary, confirm the speaker ! If you selected a STAND.WAVE Multi-Point
configuration in the GUI screen. setup (in step 2), you will be asked to place
PHONES MCACC USB
SETUP MIC 5V 2.1 A
The configuration shown on-screen should the mic at the 2nd and 3rd reference points
reflect the actual speakers you have. before finally placing it at your main listening
iPod iPhone iPad
If no operations are performed for 10 seconds position.
while the speaker configuration check screen 9 The Auto MCACC Setup procedure
Microphone is being displayed, the Auto MCACC Setup will is completed and the Advanced MCACC
resume automatically. In this case, you don’t menu reappears automatically.
need to select ‘OK’ and press ENTER in step 8. The settings made in the Auto MCACC Setup
! If you see an ERR message (or the speaker should give you excellent surround sound
configuration displayed isn’t correct), from your system, but it is also possible to
Tripod
there may be a problem with the speaker adjust these settings manually using the
connection. If selecting RETRY doesn’t work, Manual MCACC setup menu (starting below)
If you have a tripod, use it to place the micro- turn off the power and check the speaker or Manual SP Setup menu (starting on page
phone so that it’s about ear level at your connections. If there doesn’t seem to be a 66).
normal listening position. If you do not have problem, you can simply use i/j to select ! Depending on the characteristics of your
a tripod, use some other object to install the the speaker and k/l to change the setting room, sometimes identical speakers with
microphone. and continue. cone sizes of around 12 cm (5 inches) will
! It may not be possible to measure correctly ! If the speaker is not pointed to the end up with different size settings. You
if the microphone is placed on a table, sofa, microphone (listening position) or when can correct the setting manually using the
etc. using speakers that affect the phase Manual speaker setup on page 66 .
4 When you’re finished setting the (dipole speakers, reflective speakers, etc.), ! The subwoofer distance setting may be
Reverse Phase may be displayed even if the farther than the actual distance from the
options, select START then press ENTER.
speakers are properly connected. listening position. This setting should
5 Follow the instructions on-screen.
be accurate (taking delay and room
characteristics into account) and generally
does not need to be changed.
En 61
11 The Advanced MCACC menu

! Fine Channel Level – Make fine adjustments ! After pressing ENTER, test tones will be make the two tones sound as if they are arriving
Manual MCACC setup to the overall balance of your speaker system output. simultaneously at a position slightly in front of
You can use the settings in the Manual MCACC (see Fine Channel Level on page 62 ). 3 Select each channel in turn and adjust you and between your arm span.
setup menu to make detailed adjustments ! Fine SP Distance – Make precise delay the levels (+/–12.0 dB) as necessary. ! If you can’t seem to achieve this by adjusting
when you’re more familiar with the system. settings for your speaker system (see Fine Use k/l to adjust the volume of the speaker the distance setting, you may need to change
Before making these settings, you should have Speaker Distance on page 62 ). you selected to match the reference speaker. the angle of your speakers very slightly.
already completed Automatically conducting ! Standing Wave – Control overly resonant When it sounds like both tones are the same ! The subwoofer’s test tone differs in tone from
optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on low frequencies in your listening room (see volume, press j to confirm and continue to the other channels. Adjust so that the sound
page 25 . Standing Wave on page 62 ). next channel. of the subwoofer can be heard distinctly.
You only need to make these settings once The last two settings are specifically for cus- ! For comparison purposes, the reference Note that when adjusting the subwoofer,
(unless you change the placement of your cur- tomizing the parameters explained in Acoustic speaker will change depending on which depending on the low frequency response of
rent speaker system or add new speakers). Calibration EQ Adjust on page 63 : speaker you select. your speaker, it may be difficult to hear the
! EQ Adjust – Manually adjust the frequency ! If you want to go back and adjust a channel, change even when the setting is increased
balance of your speaker system while simply use i/j to select it. or decreased or when the position of the
CAUTION listening to test tones (see Acoustic speaker is changed. Note that it may be
! The test tones used in the Manual MCACC 4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
Calibration EQ Adjust on page 63 ). difficult to compare this tone with the other
setup are output at high volume. You will return to the Manual MCACC setup
! EQ Professional – Calibrate your system speakers in your setup (depending on the
based on the direct sound coming menu. low frequency response of the reference
Important from the speakers and make detailed speaker).
! Press the MCACC button while the pertinent settings according to your room’s reverb Fine Speaker Distance
setup screens are displayed to select MCACC characteristics (see Acoustic Calibration EQ ! Default setting: 10’00’’ (all speakers)
presets. Professional on page 63 ). For proper sound depth and separation with
! For some of the settings below, you’ll have to your system, it is necessary to add a slight bit of
connect the setup microphone to the front Fine Channel Level delay to some speakers so that all sounds will
panel and place it about ear level at your arrive at the listening position at the same time.
! Default setting: 0.0dB (all channels)
normal listening position. Press HOME MENU You can adjust the distance of each speaker When it sounds like the delay settings are
You can achieve better surround sound by
to display the Home Menu before you in half inch increments. The following setting matched up, press j to confirm and continue
properly adjusting the overall balance of your
connect the microphone to this receiver. can help you make detailed adjustments that to the next channel.
speaker system. You can adjust the Channel
! See Problems when using the Auto MCACC you may not achieve using the Manual speaker ! For comparison purposes, the reference
Level of each speaker in 0.5 dB increments. The
Setup on page 26 for notes regarding high setup on page 66 . speaker will change depending on which
following setting can help you make detailed
background noise levels and other possible speaker you select.
adjustments that you may not achieve using the 1 Select ‘Fine SP Distance’ from the
interference. ! If you want to go back and adjust a channel,
Manual speaker setup on page 66 . Manual MCACC setup menu.
! If you’re using a subwoofer, switch it on and simply use i/j to select it.
turn up the volume to the middle position. 1 Select ‘Fine Channel Level’ from the 2 Adjust the distance of the left channel
Manual MCACC setup menu. from the listening position. 4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
1 Select ‘Manual MCACC’ from the You will return to the Manual MCACC setup
The volume increases to the 0.0 dB reference 3 Select each channel in turn and adjust
Advanced MCACC menu. menu.
level. the distance as necessary.
See Making receiver settings from the Advanced
MCACC menu on page 60 if you’re not already 2 Adjust the level of the left channel. Use k/l to adjust the delay of the speaker you
at this screen. This will be the reference speaker level, so you selected to match the reference speaker. Standing Wave
may want to keep the level around 0.0dB so that Listen to the reference speaker and use it to ! Default setting: ON/ATT 0.0dB (all filters)
2 Select the setting you want to adjust.
you’ll have plenty of room to adjust the other measure the target channel. From the listening Acoustic standing waves occur when, under
If you’re doing this for the first time, you might
speaker levels. position, face the two speakers with your arms certain conditions, sound waves from your
want to make these settings in order.
outstretched pointing at each speaker. Try to speaker system resonate mutually with sound

62 En
 The Advanced MCACC menu 11

waves reflected off the walls in your listen- Acoustic Calibration Equalization is a kind of ! Reverb View – You can check the reverb
ing area. This can have a negative effect on room equalizer for your speakers (excluding the
Acoustic Calibration EQ measurements made for specified frequency
the overall sound, especially at certain lower subwoofer). It works by measuring the acoustic Professional ranges in each channel.
frequencies. Depending on speaker place- characteristics of your room and neutralizing This setup minimizes the unwanted effects of — If the Reverb View procedure is
ment, your listening position, and ultimately the ambient characteristics that can color the room reverberation by allowing you to calibrate performed after the Automatically
the shape of your room, it results in an overly original source material (providing a ‘flat’ equal- your system based on the direct sound coming conducting optimum sound tuning
resonant (‘boomy’) sound. The Standing Wave ization setting). If you’re not satisfied with the from the speakers. (Full Auto MCACC) on page 25 or
Control uses filters to reduce the effect of overly adjustment provided in Automatically conduct- Performing the Acoustic Calibration EQ Reverb Measurement operation,
resonant sounds in your listening area. During ing optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) Professional procedure is effective when the depending on the standing wave control
playback of a source, you can customize the on page 25 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on lower frequencies seem overly reverberant in setting, differences may appear on the
filters used for Standing Wave Control for each page 60 , you can also adjust these settings your listening room (i.e. it sounds ‘boomy’) as reverb graph. With the Auto MCACC
of your MCACC presets. manually to get a frequency balance that suits shown at Type A below, or when different chan- function, the reverberations are
! Standing Wave control filter settings cannot your tastes. nels seem to exhibit different reverb character- measured with the standing waves
be changed during playback of sources using 1 Select ‘EQ Adjust’ from the istics as shown at Type B. controlled, so the reverb characteristics
the HDMI connection. Manual MCACC setup menu. ! Type A: Reverberance of high vs. low graph shows the characteristics with the
1 Select ‘Standing Wave’ from the frequencies effect of the standing waves eliminated.
2 Select the channel(s) you want and By contrast, the Reverb Measurement
Manual MCACC setup menu. adjust to your liking. Level
Low
frequencies function measures the reverberations
2 Adjust the parameters for the Standing Use i/j to select the channel. High without controlling the standing waves,
frequencies
Wave Control. Use k/l to select the frequency and i/j so the graph indicates the reverb
! Filter Channel – Select the channel to which to boost or cut the EQ. When you’re finished, Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro. Conventional MCACC
characteristics including the effect
calibration range EQ calibration range
you will apply the filter(s): MAIN (all except go back to the top of the screen and press k Time of the standing waves. If you wish to
center channel and subwoofer), Center or to return to Ch, then use i/j to select the 0 80 160 (in msec)
check the reverb characteristics of the
SW (subwoofer). channel. room itself (with the standing waves
! TRIM (only available when the filter channel ! The OVER! indicator shows in the display ! Type B: Reverb characteristics for
different channels as such), we recommend using the
above is SW) – Adjust the subwoofer channel if the frequency adjustment is too drastic Reverb Measurement function.
level (to compensate for the difference in and might distort. If this happens, bring the Level Front L ! Advanced EQ Setup – Use this to select the
output post-filter). level down until OVER! disappears from the time period that will be used for frequency
Front R
! Freq / Q / ATT – These are the filter display. adjustment and calibration, based on the
parameters where Freq represents the 3 When you’re finished, press RETURN. Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro. Conventional MCACC reverb measurement of your listening area.
frequency you will be targeting and Q is the You will return to the Manual MCACC setup
calibration range EQ calibration range
Note that customizing system calibration
Time
bandwidth (the higher the Q, the narrower menu. 0 80 160 (in msec) using this setup will alter the settings you
the bandwidth, or range) of the attenuation made in Automatically conducting optimum
(ATT, the amount of reduction to the targeted sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 25
frequency). Note Using Acoustic Calibration EQ
! Changing the frequency curve of one channel or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 60 and
3 When you’re finished, press RETURN. Professional is not necessary if you’re satisfied with these
too drastically will affect the overall balance. If
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup the speaker balance seems uneven, you can 1 Select ‘EQ Professional’, then press settings.
menu. raise or lower channel levels using test tones ENTER. 3 If you selected ‘Reverb Measurement’,
with the TRIM feature. Use k/l to select 2 Select an option and press ENTER. select EQ ON or EQ OFF, and then START.
Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust TRIM, then use i/j to raise or lower the ! Reverb Measurement – Use this to The following options determine how the reverb
! Default setting: ON/0.0dB (all channels/ channel level for the current speaker. measure the reverb characteristics before characteristics of your listening area are dis-
bands) and after calibration. played in Reverb View:

En 63
11 The Advanced MCACC menu

! EQ OFF – You will see the reverb markers on the vertical axis indicate decibels in
characteristics of your listening area without 2 dB steps. Checking MCACC Data Speaker Setting
the equalization performed by this receiver At the procedure of Automatically conducting Use this to display the speaker size and number
5 If ‘Advanced EQ Setup’ is selected,
(before calibration). optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on of speakers. See Speaker Setting on page 66 for
select the MCACC memory to be stored,
! EQ ON – You will see the reverb page 25 , the procedure of Automatic MCACC more on this.
then enter the desired time setting for
characteristics of your listening area with the calibration, and then select START. (Expert) on page 60 or after fine-adjusting at 1 Select ‘Speaker Setting’ from the
equalization performed by this receiver (after ! To specify the place where the MCACC Manual MCACC setup on page 62 , you can MCACC Data Check menu.
calibration). Note that the EQ response may memory is to be stored, press MCACC to check your calibrated settings using the GUI 2 Select the channel you want to check.
not appear entirely flat due to adjustments select the MCACC memory you want to store. screen. Use i/j to select the channel. The corre-
necessary for your listening area. Based on the reverb measurement above, you 1 Press on the remote control, sponding channel on the layout diagram is
— The calibration corresponding to the can choose the time period that will be used for then press HOME MENU. highlighted.
currently selected MCACC preset will be the final frequency adjustment and calibration. A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen
used when EQ ON is selected. To use Even though you can make this setting without appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and Channel Level
another MCACC preset, press MCACC to reverb measurement, it is best to use the mea- ENTER to navigate through the screens and
select the MCACC memory you want to surement results as a reference for your time Use this to display the level of the various chan-
select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the
store. setting. For an optimal system calibration based nels. See Channel Level on page 67 for more
current menu.
— After auto calibration with EQ Type on the direct sound coming from the speakers, on this.
: SYMMETRY (Full Auto MCACC, 2 Select ‘MCACC Data Check’ from the
we recommend using the 30-50ms setting. 1 Select ‘Channel Level’ from the
etc.), the graph for the inferred reverb Home Menu.
Use k/l to select the setting. Use i/j to MCACC Data Check menu.
characteristics can be displayed by switch between them. 3 Select the setting you want to check.
selecting Reverb View. To display the 2 When ‘MCACC’ is highlighted, use
Select the setting from the following time ! Speaker Setting – Used to check the
actually measured reverb characteristics settings of the speaker systems. See Speaker
k/l to select the MCACC preset you
periods (in milliseconds): 0-20ms, 10-30ms,
after EQ calibration, measure with Setting on page 64 for more on this. want to check.
20-40ms, 30-50ms, 40-60ms, 50-70ms and
EQ ON. ! Channel Level – Used to check the output The level of the various channels set at the
60-80ms. This setting will be applied to all
When the reverb measurement is finished, level of the different speakers. See Channel selected MCACC preset is displayed. ‘---’ is
channels during calibration.
you can select Reverb View to see the results Level on page 64 for more on this. displayed for channels that are not connected.
When you’re finished, select START. It will take
on-screen. See Professional Calibration EQ about 2 to 4 minutes for the calibration to finish. ! Speaker Distance – Used to check the
graphical output on page 76 for troubleshooting After the Acoustic Calibration Equalization is distance to the different speakers. See Speaker Distance
information. set, you are given the option to check the set- Speaker Distance on page 64 for more on this. Use this to display the distance from the dif-
4 If you selected ‘Reverb View’, you can tings on-screen. ! Standing Wave – Used to check the ferent channels to the listening position. See
check the reverb characteristics for each standing wave control filter settings. See Speaker Distance on page 67 for more on this.
channel. Press RETURN when you’re done. Standing Wave on page 65 for more on this.
1 Select ‘Speaker Distance’ from the
The reverb characteristics are dis- ! Acoustic Cal EQ – Used to check
MCACC Data Check menu.
played when the Full Auto MCACC or the calibration values of the listening
Reverb Measurement measurements are environment’s frequency response. See 2 When ‘MCACC’ is highlighted, use
conducted. Acoustic Cal EQ on page 65 for more on this. k/l to select the MCACC preset you
Use k/l to select the channel, frequency 4 Press RETURN to go back to the want to check.
and calibration setting you want to check. Use The distance from the various channels set at
MCACC Data Check menu, repeating steps
i/j to go back and forth between the three. the selected MCACC preset is displayed. ‘---’ is
2 and 3 to check other settings.
The reverb characteristics graph before and displayed for channels that are not connected.
5 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
after EQ calibration can be displayed by select-
You will return to the Home Menu.
ing Calibration : Before / After. Note that the

64 En
 The Advanced MCACC menu 11

3 Select the MCACC preset you’ll be

Standing Wave Data Management Renaming MCACC presets
copying the settings ‘From’, then specify
Use this to display the standing wave related This system allows you to store up to six If you have several different MCACC presets where you want to copy them (‘To’).
adjustment values for the various MCACC MCACC presets, allowing you to calibrate your that you’re using, you may want to rename Make sure you don’t overwrite an MCACC
memories. See Standing Wave on page 62 for system for different listening positions (or them for easier identification. preset you’re currently using (this can’t be
more on this. frequency adjustments for the same listening 1 Select ‘Memory Rename’ from the undone).
1 Select ‘Standing Wave’ from the position). This is useful for alternate settings Data Management setup menu. 4 Select ‘OK’ to confirm and copy the
MCACC Data Check menu. to match the kind of source you’re listening to 2 Select the MCACC preset you want to settings.
2 When ‘Filter Channel’ is highlighted, and where you’re sitting (for example, watching rename, then select an appropriate preset When MCACC Memory Copy? is displayed,
use i/j to select the channel for which movies from a sofa, or playing a video game name. select YES. If NO is selected, the memory is not
you want to check standing wave control. close to the TV). Use i/j to select the preset, then k/l to copied.
The standing wave related calibration value From this menu you can copy from one preset select a preset name. Completed! shows in the GUI screen to
for the selected channel stored at the selected to another, name presets for easier identifica- confirm the MCACC preset has been cop-
tion and clear any ones you don’t need. 3 Repeat for as many MCACC presets
MCACC preset and its graph are displayed. ied, then you automatically return to the
! This can be done in Automatically conducting as necessary, then press RETURN when
Data Management setup menu.
3 Press k to highlight ‘MCACC’, then optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on you’re finished.
use i/j to select the MCACC preset you page 25 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page You will return to the Data Management setup
want to check. menu. Clearing MCACC presets
60 , either of which you should have already
completed. If you are no longer using one of the MCACC
Acoustic Cal EQ Copying MCACC preset data presets stored in memory, you can choose to
1 Press on the remote control,
clear the calibration settings of that preset.
Use this to display the calibration values for the then press HOME MENU. If you want to manually adjust the Acoustic
frequency response of the various channels set A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen Calibration EQ (see Manual MCACC setup on 1 Select ‘MCACC Memory Clear’ from the
in the different MCACC presets. See Acoustic appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and page 62 ), we recommend copying your current Data Management setup menu.
Calibration EQ Adjust on page 63 for more on ENTER to navigate through the screens and settings to an unused MCACC preset. Instead 2 Select the MCACC preset you want to
this. select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the of just a flat EQ curve, this will give you a refer- clear.
1 Select ‘Acoustic Cal EQ’ from the current menu. ence point from which to start. Make sure you don’t clear an MCACC preset
MCACC Data Check menu. 2 Select ‘Data Management’ from the ! The settings made in Automatically conducting you’re currently using (this can’t be undone).
Home Menu. optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on
2 When ‘Ch’ is highlighted, use i/j to 3 Select ‘OK’ to confirm and clear the
page 25 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page
select the channel. 3 Select the setting you want to adjust. preset.
60 .
The calibration value for the frequency response ! Memory Rename – Name your MCACC When MCACC Memory Clear? is displayed,
of the selected channel stored at the selected presets for easy identification (see Renaming 1 Select ‘MCACC Memory Copy’ from the select YES. If NO is selected, the memory is not
MCACC preset and its graph are displayed. MCACC presets on page 65 ). Data Management setup menu. cleared.
! MCACC Memory Copy – Copy settings from 2 Select the setting you want to copy. Completed! shows in the GUI screen
3 Press k to highlight ‘MCACC’, then
one MCACC preset to another (see Copying ! All Data – Copies all the settings of the to confirm the MCACC preset has been
use i/j to select the MCACC preset you
MCACC preset data on page 65 ). selected MCACC preset memory. cleared, then you automatically return to the
want to check.
! MCACC Memory Clear – Clear any MCACC ! Level & Distance – Copies only the channel Data Management setup menu.
presets that you don’t want (see Clearing level and speaker distance settings of the
MCACC presets on page 65 ). selected MCACC preset memory.

En 65
12 The System Setup and Other Setup menus

The System Setup and Other Setup

! Speaker System – Specifies how you are ! Speaker B – Select to use the B speaker
using your surround back speaker terminals terminals to listen to stereo playback in
and B speaker terminals (page 66). another room (see Switching the speaker
menus ! Speaker Setting – Specifies the size and
number of speakers you’ve connected (page
terminals on page 51 ).
! Front Bi-Amp – Select this setting if you’re
66). bi-amping your front speakers (see Bi-amping
! Network Setup – Conducts the setup ! Channel Level – Adjusts the overall balance your speakers on page 15 ).
Making receiver settings from necessary to connect this unit to the network of your speaker system (page 67). ! ZONE 2 – Select to use the surround back
the System Setup menu (see Network Setup menu on page 68 ). ! Speaker Distance – Specifies the distance speaker terminals for an independent system
The following section describes how to change ! HDMI Setup – Synchronizes this receiver of your speakers from the listening position in another zone (see Using the MULTI-ZONE
the speaker-related settings manually and make with your Pioneer component supporting (page 67). controls on page 51 ).
various other settings (input selection, OSD Control with HDMI (page 45). ! X-Curve – Adjusts the tonal balance of your 3 If you selected Normal(SB/FH),
language selection, etc.). ! Other Setup – Makes customized settings speaker system for movie soundtracks (page Normal(SB/FW), or Speaker B in Step 2,
to reflect how you are using the receiver (see 68).
1 Press u RECEIVER to switch on the select the placement of the surround
The Other Setup menu on page 70 ). ! THX Audio Setting – Specifies whether you
receiver and your TV. speakers.
Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this are using a THX speaker setup (page 68).
In a 7.1-channel surround system with sur-
receiver. 3 Make the adjustments necessary for round speakers placed directly at the sides of
Manual speaker setup each setting, pressing RETURN to confirm the listening position, the surround sound of
2 Press on the remote control,
This receiver allows you to make detailed set- after each screen. 5.1-channel sources is heard from the side.
then press HOME MENU.
tings to optimize the surround sound perfor- This function mixes the sound of the surround
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen
mance. You only need to make these settings speakers with the surround back speakers so
appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and Speaker system setting
once (unless you change the placement of your that the surround sound is heard from diago-
ENTER to navigate through the screens and ! Default setting: Normal(SB/FH)
current speaker system or add new speakers). nally to the rear as it should be.
select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the There are several ways you can use the speaker
These settings are designed to customize your Depending on the positions of the speakers and
current menu. terminals with this receiver. In addition to a
system, but if you’re satisfied with the settings the sound source, in some cases it may not be
! Press HOME MENU at any time to exit the normal home theater setup where they are
made in Automatically conducting optimum possible to achieve good results. In this case,
Home Menu. used for the front height speakers or front wide
sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 25 , it set the setting to ON SIDE or IN REAR.
3 Select ‘System Setup’ from the isn’t necessary to make all of these settings. speakers, they can be used for bi-amping the
! ON SIDE – Select when the surround
Home Menu, then press ENTER. front speakers or as an independent speaker
speakers is positioned right beside you.
system in another room.
4 Select the setting you want to adjust. CAUTION ! IN REAR – Select when the surround speaker
! Manual SP Setup – Sets the type of ! The test tones used in the Manual SP Setup 1 Select ‘Speaker System’ from the is positioned obliquely behind you.
connection used for surround back terminals are output at high volume. Manual SP Setup menu.
4 When ‘Setting Change?’ is displayed,
and the size, number distance and overall See Making receiver settings from the System
1 Select ‘Manual SP Setup’, then press select Yes.
balance of the connected speakers (see Setup menu on page 66 if you’re not already at
ENTER. If No is selected, the setting is not changed.
Manual speaker setup on page 66 ). this screen.
See Making receiver settings from the System You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
! Input Setup – Specifies what you’ve 2 Select the speaker system setting.
Setup menu on page 66 if you’re not already at
connected to the digital, HDMI and ! Normal(SB/FH) – Select for normal home
component video inputs (see The Input Setup
this screen. Speaker Setting
theater use with front height speakers in your
menu on page 27 ). 2 Select the setting you want to adjust. main (speaker system A) setup. Use this setting to specify your speaker configu-
! OSD Language – The GUI screen’s display If you are doing this for the first time, you may ! Normal(SB/FW) – Select for normal home ration (size, number of speakers and crossover
language can be changed (see Changing the want to adjust these settings in order: theater use with front wide speakers in your frequency). It is a good idea to make sure that
OSD display language (OSD Language) on main (speaker system A) setup. the settings made in Automatically conduct-
page 25 ). ing optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC)

66 En
 The System Setup and Other Setup menus 12

on page 25 are correct. Note that this setting — You can adjust this setting only the best bass results. Depending on the 4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
applies to all MCACC presets, and cannot be when Speaker System setting is speaker placement of your room you You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
set independently. Normal(SB/FW). may actually experience a decrease in
! If you’re using a THX speaker setup, set all — If the surround speakers are set to NO, the amount of bass due low frequency Channel Level
speakers to SMALL. this setting will automatically be set to cancellations. In this case, try changing
NO. the position or direction of speakers. If Using the channel level settings, you can adjust
1 Select ‘Speaker Setting’ from the the overall balance of your speaker system, an
Manual SP Setup menu. ! Surr – Select LARGE if your surround you can’t get good results, listen to the
speakers reproduce bass frequencies bass response with it set to PLUS and important factor when setting up a home the-
2 Choose the set of speakers that you effectively. Select SMALL to send bass YES or the front speakers set to LARGE ater system.
want to set, then select a speaker size. frequencies to the other speakers or and SMALL alternatively and let your ears 1 Select ‘Channel Level’ from the
Use k/l to select the size (and number) of subwoofer. If you didn’t connect surround judge which sounds best. If you’re having Manual SP Setup menu.
each of the following speakers: speakers choose NO (the sound of the problems, the easiest option is to route The test tones will start.
! Front – Select LARGE if your front speakers surround channels is sent to the front all the bass sounds to the subwoofer by
reproduce bass frequencies effectively, or 2 Adjust the level of each channel using
speakers or a subwoofer). selecting SMALL for the front speakers. k/l.
if you didn’t connect a subwoofer. Select ! SB – Select the number of surround back If you select NO for the subwoofer the front
SMALL to send the bass frequencies to the Use i/j to switch speakers.
speakers you have (one, two or none). Select speakers will automatically be fixed to LARGE. Adjust the level of each speaker as the test tone
subwoofer. LARGEx2 or LARGEx1 if your surround Also, the center, surround, surround back, front
! Center – Select LARGE if your center speaker is emitted.
back speakers reproduce bass frequencies height and front wide speakers can’t be set to ! If you are using a Sound Pressure Level (SPL)
reproduces bass frequencies effectively, or effectively. Select SMALLx2 or SMALLx1 to LARGE if the front speakers are set to SMALL.
select SMALL to send bass frequencies to meter, take the readings from your main
send bass frequencies to the other speakers In this case, all bass frequencies are sent to the listening position and adjust the level of each
the other speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect surround subwoofer.
connect a center speaker, choose NO (the speaker to 75 dB SPL (C-weighting/slow
back speakers choose NO. 3 Select ‘X. OVER’ and set the crossover reading).
center channel is sent to the front speakers). — If you selected ZONE 2 or Front Bi-Amp
! FH – Select LARGE if your front height frequency. 3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
(in Speaker system setting on page 66 Frequencies below this point will be sent to the
speakers reproduce bass frequencies ) you can’t adjust the surround back You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
effectively, or select SMALL to send bass subwoofer (or LARGE speakers).
settings. ! This setting decides the cutoff between bass
frequencies to the other speakers or — If the surround speakers are set to Note
subwoofer. If you didn’t connect front height sounds playing back from the speakers
NO, the surround back speakers will selected as LARGE, or the subwoofer, ! You can change the channel levels by press
speakers, choose NO (the front height automatically be set to NO. to the receiver operation mode, then
channel is sent to the front speakers). and bass sounds playing back from those
! SW – LFE signals and bass frequencies of selected as SMALL. It also decides where press CH LEVEL, and then using k/l on the
— You can adjust this setting only channels set to SMALL are output from the remote control.
when Speaker System setting is the cutoff will be for bass sounds in the LFE
subwoofer when YES is selected. Choose the channel.
Normal(SB/FH). PLUS setting if you want the subwoofer to
— If the surround speakers are set to NO, ! With Full Auto MCACC setup Speaker Distance
output bass sound continuously or you want or Auto MCACC setup (ALL or
this setting will automatically be set to For good sound depth and separation from
deeper bass (the bass frequencies that would Speaker Setting), the setting here will not
NO. your system, you need to specify the distance of
normally come out the front and center apply and the crossover frequency will be
! FW – Select LARGE if your front wide your speakers from the listening position. The
speakers are also routed to the subwoofer). If automatically set. Crossover frequency is a
speakers reproduce bass frequencies receiver can then add the proper delay needed
you did not connect a subwoofer choose NO frequency aimed at achieving the optimal
effectively, or select SMALL to send bass for effective surround sound.
(the bass frequencies are output from other sound field taking into account the bass
frequencies to the other speakers or speakers). 1 Select ‘Speaker Distance’ from the
subwoofer. If you didn’t connect front wide capacity of all connected speakers and
— If you have a subwoofer and like lots of human aural characteristics.
Manual SP Setup menu.
speakers, choose NO (the front wide channel bass, it may seem logical to select LARGE
is sent to the front speakers). ! If you’re using THX speakers, confirm that
for your front speakers and PLUS for the the crossover frequency is set to 80Hz.
subwoofer. This may not, however, yield
En 67
12 The System Setup and Other Setup menus

2 Adjust the distance of each speaker

THX Audio Setting Network Setup menu IP address/Proxy setting
using k/l.
You can adjust the distance of each speaker in This menu allows the user to adjust various THX Make the settings for connecting the receiver to In case the router connected to the LAN termi-
1/2 inch Increments. features including Loudness Plus, SBch pro- the Internet and using the network functions. nal on this receiver is a broadband router (with
cessing, THX Select2 Subwoofer (on/off), and a built-in DHCP server function), simply turn on
3 When you’re finished, press RETURN. 1 Press on the remote control,
Boundary Gain Control. Please see page 85 for the DHCP server function, and you will not need
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu. then press HOME MENU.
details regarding these THX features. to set up the network manually. You must set up
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen the network as described below only when you
1 Select ‘THX Audio Setting’ from the appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and
Note have connected this receiver to a broadband
Manual SP Setup menu. ENTER to navigate through the screens and
! For best surround sound, make sure the router without a DHCP server function. Before
surround back speakers are the same 2 Select either ON or OFF for the THX select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the you set up the network, consult with your ISP or
distance from the listening position. Loudness Plus setting. current menu. the network manager for the required settings.
3 Specify whether the SBch Processing is 2 Select ‘System Setup’ from the It is advised that you also refer to the operation
X-Curve AUTO or MANUAL. Home Menu. manual supplied with your network component.
! AUTO – When surround back speakers are 3 Select ‘Network Setup’ from the ! In case you make changes to the network
Most soundtracks mixed for cinema sound too
connected, Dolby Digital EX signal is present System Setup menu. configuration without the DHCP server
bright when played back in large rooms. The
in the audio signals being input is detected function, make the corresponding changes to
X-Curve setting acts as a kind of re-equalization 4 Select the setting you want to adjust.
and the appropriate THX surround mode is the network settings of this receiver.
for home theater listening, and restores proper If you are doing this for the first time, you may
set.
tonal balance of movie soundtracks. want to adjust these settings in order:
! MANUAL – The desired THX surround mode IP Address
Since the principal is the same, X-Curve isn’t ! IP Address, Proxy – Sets up the IP address/
can be selected regardless of whether or not The IP address to be entered must be defined
applied when you’re using any of the Home Proxy of this receiver (page 68).
surround back channel signals are present in within the following ranges. If the IP address
THX, Pure direct or Optimum surround modes. ! Network Standby – Allows the AVNavigator
the audio signals being input. defined is beyond the following ranges, you
1 Select ‘X-Curve’ from the or iControlAV2 function to be used even
4 Specify whether your subwoofer is cannot play back audio files stored on compo-
Manual SP Setup menu. when the receiver is in the standby mode
Select2 certified or not. nents on the network or listen to Internet radio
(page 69).
2 Choose the X-Curve setting you want. If your subwoofer isn’t THX Select2 certified, but stations.
! Friendly Name – The name of the receiver
Use k/l to adjust the setting. The X-Curve you still want to switch boundary gain compen- Class A: 10.0.0.1 to 10.255.255.254
displayed on a computer or other device
is expressed as a downwards slope in deci- sation on, select YES here, but the effect might Class B: 172.16.0.1 to 172.31.255.254
connected to the network can be changed
bels per octave, starting at 2 kHz. The sound not work properly. Class C: 192.168.0.1 to 192.168.255.254
(page 69).
becomes less bright as the slope increases (to
5 Select either ON or OFF for Boundary ! Parental Lock – Restricts usage of network
a maximum of –3.0dB/oct). Use the following Subnet Mask
Gain Compensation setting. functions (page 69).
guidelines to set the X-Curve according to your
! Port Number Setting – Sets the numbers of In case an xDSL modem or a terminal adapter
room size: 6 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
the ports where signals from IP Control are is directly connected to this receiver, enter the
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
Room size (ft 2) ≤400 ≤550 ≤650 ≤800 ≤2200 ≤12000 received (page 69). subnet mask provided by your ISP on paper. In
X-Curve ! Wireless LAN Converter – Used to make the most cases, enter 255.255.255.0.
–0.5 –1.0 –1.5 –2.0 –2.5 –3.0
(dB/oct) wireless LAN converter’s access point and IP
address settings (page 69). Default Gateway
! If you select OFF, the frequency curve will be For the wireless LAN converter, use the In case a gateway (router) is connected to this
flat and the X-Curve has no effect. separately sold AS-WL300. receiver, enter the corresponding IP address.
3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

68 En
 The System Setup and Other Setup menus 12

Primary DNS Server/ 5 Enter the address of your proxy server 3 Input the port number.
Parental Lock
Secondary DNS Server or the domain name. ! Use i/j to select a character, k/l to
Use i/j to select a character, k/l to set the Set restrictions for using Internet services. Also set the position, and ENTER to confirm your
In case there is only one DNS server address
position, and ENTER to confirm your selection. set the password accompanying the usage selection.
provided by your ISP on paper, enter it in the
restrictions. ! It is not possible to set the same port number
‘Primary DNS Server’ field. In case there are 6 Enter the port number of your proxy
! Upon shipment from the factory, the password more than once.
more than two DNS server addresses, enter server.
is set to “0000”.
‘Secondary DNS Server’ in the other DNS Use i/j to select a character, k/l to set the 4 If there are other port numbers you
server address field. position, and ENTER to confirm your selection. want to change, repeat steps 2 and 3.
Important
7 Select ‘OK’ to confirm the IP Address/
Proxy Hostname/Proxy Port When the HOME MEDIA GALLERY input is
Proxy setup. Note
selected, the setting made here cannot be
This setting is required when you connect ! When the wireless LAN converter (AS-WL300)
reflected. Set the input to something other than
this receiver to the Internet via a proxy server. Network Standby is connected, the port number cannot be set
HOME MEDIA GALLERY before making this
Enter the IP address of your proxy server in the to port 3.
This setting allows the AVNavigator or iContro- setting.
‘Proxy Hostname’ field. Also, enter the port ! We recommend setting the port number to 23
number of your proxy server in the ‘Proxy Port’ lAV2 function for operating the receiver from a 1 Select ‘Parental Lock’ from the or within the range of 49152 to 65535.
field. computer connected on the same LAN as the Network Setup menu. ! When the port number is changed, network
receiver to be used even when the receiver is in
1 Select ‘IP Address, Proxy’ from the 2 Input the password. communications between the receiver and
the standby mode.
Network Setup menu. Use i/j to select a character, k/l to set the AVNavigator are no longer possible. In this
1 Select ‘Network Standby’ from the position, and ENTER to confirm your selection. case, click Settings on the AVNavigator’s
2 Select the DHCP setting you want. Network Setup menu. function menu, select the IP Address tab
When you select ON, the network is automati- 3 Specify whether to turn Parental Lock
2 Specify whether the Network Standby and input one of the port numbers set on the
cally set up, and you do not need to follow Steps on or off.
is ON or OFF. receiver side to enable communications with
3. Proceed with Step 4. ! OFF – Internet services are not restricted.
! ON – The AVNavigator or iControlAV2 AVNavigator.
If there is no DHCP server on the network and ! ON – Internet services are restricted.
you select ON, this receiver will use its own function can be used even when the receiver
4 If you want to change the password,
Auto IP function to determine the IP address. is in the standby mode. Wireless LAN Converter
! OFF – The AVNavigator or iControlAV2 select Change Password.
! The IP address determined by the Auto IP In this case, the procedure returns to step 2. This setting is required for connecting a wire-
function is 169.254.X.X. You cannot listen to function cannot be used when the receiver less LAN converter to the receiver and using
an Internet radio station if the IP address is is in the standby mode (This lets you reduce wireless network functions.
set for the Auto IP function. power consumption in the standby mode). Port Number Setting For the wireless LAN converter, use the sepa-
On this receiver, there can be up to 5 numbers rately sold AS-WL300.
3 Enter the IP Address, Subnet Mask,
Default Gateway, Primary DNS Server and
Friendly Name of ports where signals are received. One of
these, port 8102 which used for communicating Access Point Setting
Secondary DNS Server. 1 Select ‘Friendly Name’ from the with iControlAV2, cannot be changed, but the
Press i/j to select a number and k/l to Network Setup menu. Make the connection settings for the wireless
desired number can be set for the 4 other ports.
move the cursor. LAN converter connected to the receiver and
2 Select ‘Edit Name’ then select 1 Select ‘Port Number Setting’ from the the access point. Connect the wireless LAN
4 Select ‘OFF’ or ‘ON’ for the ‘Rename’. Network Setup menu. converter to the receiver and set DHCP on the
Enable Proxy Server setting to deactivate If after changing the name you want to restore
2 Select the port number you want to “IP Address, Proxy” settings menu beforehand
or activate the proxy server. the name to the default, select Default.
change. (page 68). There are four way to make the set-
In case you select ‘OFF’, proceed with Step 7. In
3 Input the name you want. tings for connecting to the access point, as
case you select ‘ON’, on the other hand, pro-
Use i/j to select a character, k/l to set the shown below.
ceed with Step 5.
position, and ENTER to confirm your selection.

En 69
12 The System Setup and Other Setup menus

! WPS (PBC) – Connection settings are made connection settings, we recommend 1 Press on the remote control,
automatically simply by pressing the WPS making the connection settings at then press HOME MENU. The Other Setup menu
buttons on the access point and wireless LAN Search for Access Point or Manual Setting. A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen The Other Setup menu is where you can make
converter, following the instructions displayed appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and customized settings to reflect how you are
on the receiver’s screen. This is the simplest WLAN IP Address ENTER to navigate through the screens and using the receiver.
way of making the settings, and is possible If the IP address of a device connected in the select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the 1 Press on the remote control,
when the access point and wireless LAN LAN other than the wireless LAN converter current menu. then press HOME MENU.
converter are equipped with WPS buttons. is set to “192.168.XXX.249”, the IP address of 2 Select ‘Network Information’ from the A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen
Network connection settings require the wireless LAN converter will be redundant, Home Menu. appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and
approximately 2 minutes from the time the making connection to the access point impos- Display the setting status of the network-related ENTER to navigate through the screens and
WPS buttons are pressed. Wait until the sible. In this case, use this setting to set an IP items. select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the
settings are completed. address specific to the wireless LAN converter. current menu.
! WPS (PIN) – Display a list of the SSIDs of
1 Select ‘Wireless LAN Converter’ from 2 Select ‘System Setup’ from the
connectable access points and select the
access point to which you want to connect
the Network Setup menu. Home Menu.
from this list. Connection settings are made by 2 Make the wireless LAN converter 3 Select ‘Other Setup’, then press ENTER.
inputting the 8-digit PIN code displayed on the settings as necessary.
When making the connection settings of the
4 Select the setting you want to adjust.
receiver’s screen to the access point to which
If you are doing this for the first time, you may
you want to connect. wireless LAN converter and access point, select
want to adjust these settings in order:
! Search for Access Point – Display a list of “Access Point Setting” and make the connec-
! Auto Power Down – Sets the power to turn
the SSIDs of connectable access points and tion settings for the wireless LAN converter and
off automatically when the receiver is not
select the access point to which you want to access point following the instructions on the
being used.
connect from this list. Connection settings screen.
! Volume Setup – Sets up the volume-related
with the access point are made by setting the If you want to set the wireless LAN converter’s
operations of this receiver (page 71).
access point’s security protocol, security key IP address, select “WLAN IP Address” and
! Remote Control Mode Setup – Sets this
and WEP default key (only when the access input the IP address.
receiver’s remote control mode (page 71).
point’s security protocol is WEP).
! Flicker Reduction Setup – Adjusts the way
! Manual Setting – Connection settings are
Checking the Network the GUI screen looks (page 71).
made by manually inputting the SSID, security
! EXTENSION Setup – Allows the CU-RF100
protocol, security key and WEP default key Information to be used even when the receiver is in the
of the access point to which you want to
The setting status of the following network- standby mode (page 71).
connect.
related items can be checked. ! Software Update – Use to update the
! IP Address – Check the IP address of this receiver’s software and check the version.
Note receiver. ! Pairing Bluetooth Setup – Use to pair a
! If there is a “; ” (semicolon) in the access ! MAC Address – Check the MAC address of Bluetooth ADAPTER and Bluetooth wireless
point’s SSID or security key, wireless LAN this receiver. technology device (page 34).
connection will not be possible even after ! Friendly Name – Friendly Name on page 69 .
5 Make the adjustments necessary for
the wireless LAN converter settings are ! SSID – Check the SSID of the access point
each setting, pressing RETURN to confirm
completed. Change the setting of the access connected with the wireless LAN converter
after each screen.
point’s SSID or security key to a character (only when a wireless LAN converter is
string that does not include a “; ” (semicolon). connected).
! If it is not possible to connect to the access
point with the WPS (PBC) or WPS (PIN)

70 En
 The System Setup and Other Setup menus 12

2 Select the Power ON Level setting you 1 Select ‘Remote Control Mode Setup’
Auto Power Down Software Update
want. from the Other Setup menu.
The power can be set to turn off automatically if The volume can be set so that it is always set Use this procedure to update the receiver’s
2 Select the Remote Control Mode
no operation has been performed for a specific to the same level when the receiver’s power is software and check the version. There are two
setting you want.
amount of time with no audio or video signals turned on. ways to update: via the Internet and via a USB
being input to the receiver. When using ZONE ! LAST (default) – When the power is turned 3 Select ‘OK’ to change the remote memory device.
2, the ZONE 2 power can also be set to turn off, on, the volume is set to the same level as control mode. Updating via the Internet is performed by
but for ZONE 2 the power turns off automati- when the power was last turned off. 4 Follow the instructions on the screen accessing the file server from the receiver and
cally after the amount of time set here even if ! “---” – When the power is turned on, the to change the remote control’s setting. downloading the file. This procedure is only pos-
signals are being input or operations have been volume is set to minimum level. See Operating multiple receivers on page 54 . sible if the receiver is connected to the Internet.
performed. ! –80.0dB to +12.0dB – Specify the volume to Updating via a USB memory device is per-
5 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
Different times can be set for the main zone and be set when the power is turned on, in steps formed by downloading the update file from a
You will return to the Other Setup menu.
ZONE 2. of 0.5 dB. computer, reading this file onto a USB memory
1 Select ‘Auto Power Down’ from the It is not possible to set a volume level greater device then inserting this USB memory device
than the value specified at Volume Limit setup Flicker Reduction Setup into the USB port on the receiver’s front panel.
Other Setup menu.
(see below). ! Default setting: OFF With this procedure, the USB memory device
2 Select the zone you want to set and set containing the update file must first be inserted
3 Select the Volume Limit setting you The GUI screen’s resolution can be increased.
the time after which the power turns off. into the USB port on the receiver’s front panel.
If you feel the GUI screen is hard to see, try
! MAIN – The time can be selected from want.
changing this setting. Note that the resolution ! If an update file is provided on the Pioneer
among “15 min”, “30 min”, “60 min” and Use this function to limit the maximum volume.
in this setting only affects the GUI screen; it has website, download it onto your computer.
“OFF”. The power turns off after there has The volume cannot be increased above the level
no influence on the video output. When downloading an update file from the
been no signal and no operation for the set here, even by operating MASTER VOLUME
Pioneer website onto your computer, the file
selected time. button (or the dial on the front panel). 1 Select ‘Flicker Reduction Setup’ from
will be in ZIP format. Unzip the ZIP file before
! ZONE 2 – The time can be selected from ! OFF (default) – The maximum volume is not the Other Setup menu.
saving it on the USB memory device. If there
among “30 min”, “1 hour”, “3 hours”, limited. 2 Select the Flicker Reduction setting you are any old downloaded files or downloaded
“6 hours”, “9 hours” and “OFF”. The power ! –20.0dB/–10.0dB/0.0dB – The maximum want. files for other models on the USB memory
turns off after the selected time. volume is limited to the value set here.
3 When you’re finished, press RETURN. device, delete them.
4 Select the Mute Level setting you You will return to the Other Setup menu.
Note want.
Important
! Depending on the connected devices, the This sets how much the volume is to be turned
down when MUTE is pressed.
EXTENSION Setup ! DO NOT unplug the power cord during
Auto Power Down function may not work updating.
properly due to excessive noise or other ! FULL (default) – No sound. ! Default setting: OFF
A separately sold the CU-RF100 can be used to ! When updating via the Internet, do not
reasons. ! –40.0dB/–20.0dB – The volume will be
operate the receiver by RF communications. To disconnect the LAN cable. When updating via
turned down to the level specified here.
do so, set the EXTENSION setting to ON. When a USB memory device, do not disconnect the
Volume Setup 5 When you’re finished, press RETURN. USB memory device.
ON is set here, the receiver can be operated
You will return to the Other Setup menu.
You can set the maximum volume of this even when the receiver is in the standby mode. 1 Select ‘Software Update’ from the
receiver or specify what the volume level will be 1 Select ‘EXTENSION Setup’ from the Other Setup menu.
when the power is turned on. Remote Control Mode Setup
Other Setup menu. 2 Select the update procedure.
1 Select ‘Volume Setup’ from the ! Default setting: 1 ! Update via Internet – The receiver checks
This sets this receiver’s remote control mode
2 Select the EXTENSION setting you
Other Setup menu. want. whether updatable software is available via
to prevent erroneous operation when multiple the Internet.
units of the receiver are being used. 3 When you’re finished, press RETURN. ! Update via USB Memory – The receiver
You will return to the Other Setup menu. checks whether the USB memory device
En 71
12 The System Setup and Other Setup menus

inserted into the USB port on the receiver’s Software Update messages
front panel contains updatable software.
“Accessing” is displayed and the update file Status
Descriptions
is checked. Wait a while. messages
No update file was found on the
3 Check on the screen whether or not an NO UPDATE USB memory device. Store the file
update file was found. FILE in the USB memory device’s root
If “New version found.” is displayed, the directory.
update file has been found. The version number Try disconnecting then reconnecting
and updating time are displayed. the USB device or storing the update
If “This is the latest version. There is no need FILE ERROR file again. If the error still occurs,
to update.” is displayed, no update file has try using a different USB memory
been found. device.

4 To update, select OK. UPDATE

Turn the receiver’s power off, then
ERROR 1
The updating screen appears and updating is turn it back on and try updating the
to UPDATE
performed. software again.
ERROR 7
! The power turns off automatically once
If this message flashes, updating
updating is completed.
has failed. Update via a USB mem-
ory device. Put the update file on a
Update via
USB memory device and connect
USB
the device to the USB port. When
the file is found, software updating
starts automatically.
UE11 Updating has failed. Use the same
UE22 procedure to update the software
UE33 again.

72 En
 Additional information 13

Additional information Symptom

AMP ERR blinks in the display, then
Remedy
The receiver may have a serious problem. Do not try switching the
the power automatically switches off. receiver on. Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer
The ADVANCED MCACC blinks and authorized independent service company.
Troubleshooting 1 the power does not turn on.
Incorrect operations are often mistaken for trouble and malfunctions. If you think that there is AMP OVERHEAT blinks in the display Allow the unit to cool down in a well-ventilated place before switching
something wrong with this component, check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in and the FL OFF indicator flash and the back on (see Installing the receiver on page 6 ).
another component. Investigate the other components and electrical appliances being used. If the power turns off. Wait at least 1 minute, then try turning the power on again.
trouble cannot be rectified even after exercising the checks listed below, ask your nearest Pioneer The temperature within the unit has exceeded the allowablevalue.
authorized independent service company to carry out repair work.
Lower the volume level.
! If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity disconnect the
The receiver suddenly power off or The power unit is damaged. Unplug the receiver from the wall and call
power plug from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.
ADVANCED MCACC flashes. a Pioneer authorized independent service company.
If the problem is not solved after the troubleshooting below, if the screen freezes unexpectedly or if
the buttons on the remote control or front panel stop working completely, do the following: No sound
! Press u STANDBY/ON on the front panel to turn off the power, then turn the power back on.
! If the power cannot be turned off, press and hold u STANDBY/ON on the front panel for over 10 Symptom Remedy
seconds. The power will turn off. (In this case, the various settings made on the receiver may be No sound is output when an Check the volume, mute setting (press MUTE) and speaker setting (press
cleared.) input function is selected. SPEAKERS).
No sound is output from the Make sure the correct input function is selected.
Power front speakers.
Check that the MCACC setup microphone is disconnected.
Symptom Remedy
Make sure the correct input signal is selected (press SIGNAL SEL).
The power does not turn on. Make sure that the power cord is plugged in to an active power outlet.
Note that when Fixed PCM ON is selected, you won’t be able to hear any other
Try disconnecting from the power outlet, then plugging back in. signal format (see Setting the Audio options on page 48 ).
Power cannot be turned off. Press the remote control’s ZONE 2, then press u RECEIVER to switch Check that the source component is connected properly (see Connecting your
(ZONE 2 ON is displayed.) the Zone 2 off. equipment on page 11 ).
The receiver suddenly switches off or Check that there are no loose strands of speaker wire touching the Check that the speakers are connected properly (see Connecting the speakers
the iPod iPhone iPad indicator blinks. rear panel or another set of wires. If so, re-attach the speaker wires, on page 13 ).
making sure there are no stray strands.
No sound from the surround or Check that the Stereo listening mode or the Front Stage Surround Advance
The receiver may have a serious problem. Disconnect from the power center speakers. mode isn’t selected; select one of the surround listening modes (see Enjoying
and call a Pioneer authorized independent service company. various types of playback using the listening modes on page 36 ).
During loud playback the power sud- Turn down the volume. Check that the surround/center speakers are not set to NO (see Speaker Set-
denly switches off. Lower the 63 Hz and 125 Hz equalizer levels in the Manual MCACC ting on page 66 ).
setup on page 62 . Check the channel level settings (see Channel Level on page 67 ).
Switch on the digital safety feature. While holding down ENTER on the Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 13 ).
front panel, press u STANDBY/ON to set this receiver to the standby
mode. Use TUNE i/j to select D.SAFETY cOFFd, and then use
PRESET k/l to select 1 or 2 (select D.SAFETY cOFFd to deactivate
this feature). If the power switches off even with 2 switched on, turn
down the volume. With 1 or 2 on, some features may be unavailable.
The unit does not respond when the Try switching the receiver off, then back on again.
buttons are pressed. Try disconnecting the power cord, then connect again.

En 73
13 Additional information

Symptom Remedy Symptom Remedy

No sound from surround back Check that the surround back speakers are set to LARGE or SMALL, and the Sound is produced from Check that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL (see Choosing the input
speakers. surround speakers are not set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page 66 ). analog components, but not signal on page 38 ).
Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 13 ). If from digital ones (DVD, LD, Make sure that the digital input is assigned correctly for the input jack the
only one surround back speaker is connected, make sure it’s connected to the CD, etc.). component is connected to (see The Input Setup menu on page 27 ).
left channel speaker terminal. Check the digital output settings on the source component.
Surround back speakers will not play while the Speaker System is set to If the source component has a digital volume control, make sure this is not
Speaker B and audio is being played through speaker B. turned down.
When Speaker System is set to Normal(SB/FH) or Normal(SB/FW) and SP: No sound is output or a noise Check that your BD or DVD player is compatible with Dolby Digital/DTS discs.
FH ON or SP: FW ON is selected with the SPEAKERS button, no sound will be is output when Dolby Digital/ Check the digital output settings or the HDMI audio output settings of your BD
output from the surround back speakers. Select SP: SB/FH ON, SP: SB/FW ON DTS software is played back. or DVD player. Make sure that the DTS signal output is set to On.
or SP: SB ON (see Switching the speaker terminals on page 51 ).
If the source component has a digital volume control, make sure this is not
No sound from front height or Check that the front height or front wide speakers are set to LARGE or SMALL,
turned down.
front wide speakers. and the surround speakers are not set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page 66 ).
No sound when using the If the HDMI input function is selected, sound is muted until exiting the
When Speaker System is set to Normal(SB/FH) or Normal(SB/FW) and SP:
Home Menu. Home Menu.
SB ON is selected with the SPEAKERS button, no sound will be output from
the front height or front wide speakers. Select SP: SB/FH ON, SP: SB/FW ON,
Other audio problems
SP: FH ON or SP: FW ON (see Switching the speaker terminals on page 51 ).
Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 13 ). Symptom Remedy
No sound from subwoofer. Check that the subwoofer is connected properly, switched on and the volume Speaker switching sound Depending on the listening mode, the front height (or front wide) and sur-
turned up. (clicking sound) is heard from round back speakers may switch automatically in function of changes in the
receiver during playback. input audio. A speaker switching sound (clicking sound) will be heard from
If your subwoofer has a sleep function, make sure it is switched off.
the receiver at this time. If this sound bothers you, we recommend to change
Make sure that the Subwoofer setting is YES or PLUS (see Speaker Setting on the speaker terminal option (see Switching the speaker terminals on page 51 ).
page 66 ).
Broadcast stations cannot Fully extend the FM wire antenna, adjust the position for best reception and
The crossover frequency may be set too low; try setting it higher to match the be selected automatically, or secure to a wall, etc.
characteristics of your other speakers (see Speaker Setting on page 66 ). there is considerable noise in Use an outdoor antenna for better reception (see page 21).
If there is very little low frequency information in the source material, change radio broadcasts.
Adjust the position and direction of the AM antenna.
your speaker settings to Front: SMALL / Subwoofer: YES, or Front: LARGE /
Subwoofer: PLUS (see Speaker Setting on page 66 ). Noise may be caused by interference from other equipment, such as a fluo-
rescent light, motor, etc. Switch off or move the other equipment, or move the
Check that the LFE channel is not set to OFF, or to a very quiet setting (see
AM antenna.
Setting the Audio options on page 48 ).
Noise is output when scanning This is not a malfunction of the receiver. The scan function of your player
Check the speaker level settings (see Channel Level on page 67 ).
a DTS CD. alters the digital information, making it unreadable, resulting in noise being
No sound from one speaker. Check the speaker connection (see Connecting the speakers on page 13 ). output. Lower the volume when scanning.
Check the speaker level settings (see Channel Level on page 67 ). When playing a DTS format LD Make sure that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL (see Choosing the input
Check that the speaker hasn’t been set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page there is audible noise on the signal on page 38 ).
66 ). soundtrack.
The channel may not be recorded in the source. By using one of the advanced Can’t record audio. You can only make a digital recording from a digital source, and an analog
effect listening modes, you may be able to create the missing channel (see recording from an analog source.
Enjoying various types of playback using the listening modes on page 36 ). For digital sources, make sure that what you’re recording isn’t copy protected.
Subwoofer output is very low. To route more signal to the subwoofer, set it to PLUS or set the front speakers
to SMALL (see Speaker Setting on page 66 ).

74 En
 Additional information 13

Symptom Remedy ADAPTER PORT terminal

Everything seems to be set The speakers may be out of phase. Check that the positive/negative speaker Symptom Remedy
up correctly, but the playback terminals on the receiver are matched with the corresponding terminals on
The Bluetooth wireless Check that no object that emits electromagnetic waves in the 2.4 GHz band
sound is odd. the speakers (see Connecting the speakers on page 13 ).
technology device cannot be (microwave oven, wireless LAN device or Bluetooth wireless technology appa-
The Phase Control feature If applicable, check that the lowpass filter switch on your subwoofer is off, or connected or operated. Sound ratus) is near the unit. If such an object is near the unit, set the unit far from it.
doesn’t seem to have an the lowpass cutoff is set to the highest frequency setting. If there is a PHASE from the Bluetooth wireless Or, stop using the object emitting the electromagnetic waves.
audible effect. setting on your subwoofer, set it to 0º (or depending on the subwoofer, the technology device is not emit- Check that the Bluetooth wireless technology device is not too far from the
setting where you think it has the best overall effect on the sound). ted or the sound is interrupted. unit and that obstructions are not set between the Bluetooth wireless technol-
Make sure the speaker distance setting is correct for all speakers (see Speaker ogy device and the unit. Set the Bluetooth wireless technology device and the
Distance on page 67 ). unit so that the distance between them is less than about 10 m (33 ft.) and no
Noise or hum can be heard Check that personal computers or other digital components connected to the obstructions exist between them.
even when there is no sound same power source are not causing interference. Check that the Bluetooth ADAPTER and the ADAPTER PORT of the unit are
being input. correctly connected.
Can’t select some Input func- Check the Input Skip settings in the Input Setup menu (see The Input Setup The Bluetooth wireless technology device may not be set to the communica-
tions by the INPUT SELECTOR menu on page 27 ). tion mode supporting the Bluetooth wireless technology. Check the setting of
on the front panel or the Check the HDMI Input assignment in the Input Setup menu then try OFF the Bluetooth wireless technology device.
INPUT SELECT button on the (see The Input Setup menu on page 27 ). Check that pairing is correct. The pairing setting was deleted from this unit or
remote control.
the Bluetooth wireless technology device. Reset the pairing.
There seems to be a time lag See Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on
Check that the profile is correct. Use a Bluetooth wireless technology device
between the speakers and the page 25 to set up your system again using MCACC (this will automatically
that supports A2DP profile and AVRCP profile.
output of the subwoofer. compensate for a delay in the subwoofer output).
The maximum volume avail- Check that the Volume Limit is set to OFF (see Volume Setup on page 71 ). Video
able (shown in the front panel
display) is lower than the Symptom Remedy
+12dB maximum. No image is output when an Check the video connections of the source component.
Certain listening modes or When Operation Mode is set to Basic, the Pioneer-recommended settings input is selected. For HDMI, or when digital video conversion is set to OFF and a TV and another
HOME MENU items cannot be are made and not all of the functions can be used. To use all of the functions component are connected with different cords (in Setting the Video options on
selected. without restrictions, set Operation Mode to Expert (see Operation Mode page 50 ), you must connect your TV to this receiver using the same type of
Setup on page 27 ). video cable as you used to connect your video component.
Make sure the input assignment is correct for components connected using
component video or HDMI cables (see The Input Setup menu on page 27 ).
Check the video output settings of the source component.
Check that the video input you selected on your TV is correct.
Some components (such as video game units) have resolutions that may not
be converted. If adjusting this receiver’s Resolution setting (in Setting the
Video options on page 50 ) and/or the resolution settings on your component
or display doesn’t work, try switching Digital Video Conversion (in Setting the
Video options on page 50 ) to OFF.
Can’t record video. Check that the source is not copy-protected.
The video converter is not available when making recordings. Check that the
same type of video cable is used for connecting both the recorder and the
video source (the one you want to record) to this receiver.

En 75
13 Additional information

Symptom Remedy Symptom Remedy

Noisy, intermittent, or dis- Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal (during scanning, for After using the Auto MCACC There may have been some low frequency noise in the room from an air-
torted picture. example), or the video quality may just be poor (with some video game units, Setup, the speaker size setting conditioner, motor, etc. Switch off all other appliances in the room and use
for example). The picture quality may also depend on the settings, etc. of your is incorrect. Auto MCACC Setup again.
display device. Switch off the video converter and reconnect the source and Depending on a number of factors (bass reproduction capabilities of the
display device using the same type of connection (component or composite), speakers, room size, speaker placement, etc.) this may occur in some cases.
then start playback again. Change the speaker setting manually in Speaker Setting on page 66 , and use
Video signals are not output When a monitor only compatible with resolutions of 480i is connected to the the ALL (Keep SP System) option for the Auto MCACC menu in Automatic
from the component terminal. component terminal and another monitor is connected to the HDMI terminal, MCACC (Expert) on page 60 if this is a recurring problem.
the video signals may not be output to the monitor connected to the compo- Can’t adjust the Fine Speaker Check that the speakers are all in phase (make sure the positive (+) and nega-
nent terminal. If this happens, do the following: Distance setting properly. tive (–) terminals are matched up properly).
— Turn off the power of the monitor connected to the HDMI terminal.
The display shows KEY LOCK With the receiver in standby, press u STANDBY/ON for about 10 seconds
— Change the VIDEO PARAMETER menu RES setting (see Setting the Video
ON when you try to make while holding down SPEAKERS to disable the key lock.
options on page 50 ).
settings.
— Video signals from the HDMI terminal cannot be output to the component
terminals. Input the video signals from the player or other source to the com- Most recent settings have been The power cord was disconnected from the wall while adjusting this setting.
posite or component terminals. When using the component terminal, assign it erased. Settings are only stored if all the zones are turned off. Turn off all the zones
at Input Setup (see The Input Setup menu on page 27 ). before unplugging the power cord.
The picture's movement is When Resolution under VIDEO PARAMETER is set to 1080/24p, the picture The various system settings Do not pull out the power cord while conducting the settings. (The settings
unnatural. may not be displayed properly for some source materials. In this case, set the are not stored. will be stored when both the main zone and sub zone turn off. Turn off all
resolution to something other than 1080/24p (page 50). zones before pulling out the power cord.)

Settings Certain listening modes or When Operation Mode is set to Basic, the Pioneer-recommended settings
HOME MENU items cannot be are made and not all of the functions can be used. To use all of the functions
Symptom Remedy selected. without restrictions, set Operation Mode to Expert (see Operation Mode
The Auto MCACC Setup con- The ambient noise level may be too high. Keep the noise level in the room Setup on page 27 ).
tinually shows an error. as low as possible (see also Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on
Professional Calibration EQ graphical output
page 26 ). If the noise level cannot be kept low enough, you will have to set up
the surround sound manually (page 66). Symptom Remedy
When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SURROUND The reverb characteristics There are cases where the graph does not appear flat (even when selecting
BACK L (Single) terminals. graph after EQ calibration does ALL CH ADJ in the Auto MCACC Setup) due to adjustments made to compen-
To use a 5.1-channel speaker set, use the surround speakers for the surround not appear entirely flat. sate for room characteristics to achieve optimal sound.
channel, not the surround back channel. Areas of the graph may appear identical (before and after) when there is little
Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and the microphone. or no adjustment needed.
If Reverse Phase is displayed, try the following: The graph may appear to have shifted vertically when comparing before and
— The speaker’s wiring (+ and –) may be inverted. Check the speaker con- after measurements.
nections. EQ adjustments made using Despite level adjustments being made, the filters used for analysis may not
— Depending on the type of speakers and their installation conditions, the Manual MCACC setup display these adjustments in the reverb characteristics graph after EQ calibra-
Reverse Phase may be displayed even if the speakers are properly connected. do not appear to change the tion. However, these adjustments are taken into account by the filters dedi-
If this happens, select GO NEXT and continue. reverb characteristics graph cated to overall system calibration.
— If the speaker is not pointed to the microphone (listening position) or when after EQ calibration.
using speakers that affect the phase (dipole speakers, reflective speakers,
etc.), it may not be possible to properly identify the polarity.

76 En
 Additional information 13

Symptom Remedy Remote control

Lower frequency response Low frequencies used in bass management (the subwoofer channel) will not Symptom Remedy
curves do not seem to have change for speakers that have been specified as SMALL in the configuration,
Cannot be remote controlled. Set the remote control unit’s remote control mode so that it matches the set-
been calibrated for SMALL or do not output these frequencies.
ting on the main unit (see Operating multiple receivers on page 54 ).
speakers. Calibration is performed, but due to your speakers’ low frequency limitations,
Check whether the receiver’s remote control mode is properly set (see Remote
no measurable sound is output for display.
Control Mode Setup on page 71 ).
Display Try replacing the batteries in the remote control (see Loading the batteries on
page 6 ).
Symptom Remedy
Be sure to operate within 7 m (23 ft.) and a 30º angle of the remote sensor on
The display is dark or off. Press DIMMER repeatedly to select a different brightness. the front panel (see Operating range of remote control unit on page 7 ).
You can’t get DIGITAL to dis- Check the digital connections and make sure that the digital inputs are Check that there are no obstacles between the receiver and the remote con-
play when using SIGNAL SEL. assigned correctly (see The Input Setup menu on page 27 ). trol.
2 DIGITAL or DTS does not These indicators do not light if playback is paused. Make sure that there is no fluorescent or other strong light shining on to the
light when playing Dolby/DTS Check the playback (especially the digital output) settings of the source com- remote sensor.
software. ponent. Check the connections of the CONTROL IN jacks (see Operating other Pioneer
When playing Dolby Digital Check that the player is connected using a digital connection. components with this unit’s sensor on page 24 ).
or DTS sources, the receiver’s Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choosing the input Other components can’t be If the battery ran down, the preset codes may have been cleared. Re-enter the
format indicators do not light. signal on page 38 ). operated with the system preset codes.
remote. The preset code may be incorrect. Redo the procedure for entering preset
Check that the player isn’t set up so that Dolby Digital and DTS sources are
converted to PCM. codes.
Ensure that if there are several audio tracks on the disc, the Dolby Digital or When commands from the remote control units of other devices are regis-
DTS is selected. tered using the learning function, in some cases they may not be learned
properly. In this case, register the commands again using the learning func-
When playing certain discs, The disc may not contain 5.1/6.1 channel material. Check the disc packaging
tion (see page 55). If they still do not work, they may be in a special format that
none of the receiver’s format for more on what audio tracks are recorded on the disc.
cannot be registered on this receiver’s remote control. Operate the device
indicators light.
using another remote control.
When playing a disc with the Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choosing the input
listening mode set to Auto Sur- signal on page 38 ).
round or ALC, 2 Pro Logic II If a two channel soundtrack is currently playing (including Dolby Surround
or DTS Neo:6 appear on the encoded), then this is not a malfunction. Check the disc packaging for details
receiver. about the audio tracks available.
During playback of DVD- This will occur when playing DVD-Audio material over the HDMI connection.
Audio, the display shows PCM. This is not a malfunction.
The power turns off auto- See the Power section (page 73).
matically and some indicator
flashes, or some indicator
flashes and the power does not
turn on.

En 77
13 Additional information

HDMI Symptom Remedy

Symptom Remedy HDCP ERROR shows in the Check whether or not the connected component is compatible with HDCP. If
display. it is not compatible with HDCP, reconnect the source device using a different
The HDMI indicator blinks Check all the points below.
type of connection (component or composite). Some components that are
continuously.
compatible with HDCP still cause this message to be displayed, but so long as
No picture or sound. This receiver is HDCP-compatible. Check that the components you are con- there is no problem with displaying video, this is not a malfunction.
necting are also HDCP-compatible. If they are not, please connect them using
When Control with HDMI is Even when Control with HDMI is set to ON, the HDMI input is assigned for
the component or composite video jacks.
set to ON, the TV/SAT input’s the BD, DVD, DVR/BDR and VIDEO inputs regardless of the Control with
Depending on the connected source component, it’s possible that it will not HDMI Input assignment is HDMI setting, so use these terminals.
work with this receiver (even if it is HDCP-compatible). In this case, connect canceled.
using the component or composite video jacks between source and receiver.
Synchronized operation not Check the HDMI connections.
If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to possible using Control with The cable may be damaged.
your monitor, please consult the component or monitor manual or contact the HDMI function.
manufacturer for support. Select ON for the Control with HDMI setting (see HDMI Setup on page 45 ).
If video images do not appear on your TV, try adjusting the resolution, Deep Select ALL for the Control Mode with HDMI setting (see HDMI Setup on page
Color or other setting for your component. 45 ).
While analog video signals are being output over HDMI, use a separate con- Turn the TV’s power on before turning on this receiver’s power.
nection for audio output. Set the TV side Control with HDMI setting to on (see TV’s operating instruc-
To output signals in Deep Color, use an HDMI cable (High Speed HDMI® tions).
Cable) to connect this receiver to a component or TV with the Deep Color
feature.
No picture. Try changing the Resolution setting (in Setting the Video options on page 50 ).
No sound, or sound suddenly Check that the HDMI Audio setting is set to AMP (Setting the Audio options
ceases. on page 48 ).
If the component is a DVI device, use a separate connection for the audio.
If analog video is being output over HDMI, please use a separate connection
for the audio.
Check the audio output settings of the source component.
HDMI format digital audio transmissions require a longer time to be rec-
ognized. Due to this, interruption in the audio may occur when switching
between audio formats or beginning playback.
Turning on/off the device connected to this unit’s HDMI OUT terminal during
playback, or disconnecting/connecting the HDMI cable during playback, may
cause noise or interrupted audio.
Noisy or distorted picture. Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal (during scanning, for
example), or the video quality may just be poor (with some video game units,
for example). The picture quality may also depend on the settings, etc. of your
display device. Switch off the video converter and reconnect the source and
display device using the same type of connection (component or composite),
then start playback again.
If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to
your monitor, please consult the component or monitor manual or contact the
manufacturer for support.

78 En
 Additional information 13

Symptom Causes Remedy

Troubleshooting 2
AVNavigator cannot be An error message may appear Re-start the PC, then start the installer (AVNV_XXX_
AVNavigator installed. if there are not enough system xxx.exe) with no other applications active.
resources available.
Symptom Causes Remedy Installation of AVNavigator may Try the following, in the order indicated.
AVNavigator does not The receiver’s power is not Turn the receiver’s power on. (Wait about 60 sec- fail because of incompatibilities 1. If there are any other applications active, exit
interact well with the turned on. onds after the power turns on for network functions with other applications. the other applications and try starting the installer
receiver. to start.) (AVNV_XXX_xxx.exe) again.
After this, press Detection in AVNavigator to rede- 2. If that does not work, try restarting your PC, and
tect the receiver. starting the installer (AVNV_XXX_xxx.exe) with no
The receiver or computer is not Connect a LAN cable to the receiver or computer other applications active.
connected to the LAN. (page 22). Software updating There may be a problem with Contact your contracted provider.
After this, press Detection in AVNavigator to rede- does not operate well. your Internet Service Provider’s
tect the receiver. network.
The router’s power is off. Turn the router’s power on.
After the router is fully started up, press Detection
USB interface
in AVNavigator to redetect the receiver. Symptoms Causes Remedies
AVNavigator’s network settings If your router does not support DHCP, the receiver’s The folders/files stored on a The folders/files are cur- Store the folders/files in the FAT region.
are not correct. IP address must be set in AVNavigator. First set USB memory device are not rently stored in a region
the IP address on the receiver, then set the same displayed. other than the FAT (File
address in AVNavigator (page 68). Allocation Table) region.
After this, press Detection in AVNavigator to rede-
tect the receiver. The number of levels in a Limit the maximum number of levels in a folder
folder is more than 8. to 8 (page 30).
The receiver’s port number set- Click Settings on the AVNavigator’s function menu,
ting has been changed. select the IP Address tab and input the changed There are more than 30 000 Limit the maximum number of folders/files
port number (one of the port numbers set on the folders/files stored in a USB stored in a USB memory device to 30 000 (page
receiver) (page 69). memory device. 30).
After this, press Detection in AVNavigator to rede- The audio files are copy- Copyrighted audio files stored on a USB mem-
tect the receiver. righted. ory device cannot be played back (page 30).
Network connections could be Check the computer’s network settings, security A USB memory device is not The USB memory device Try using a USB memory device compatible
restricted due to the computer’s settings, etc. recognized. does not support the mass with the mass storage class specifications.
network settings, security set- After this, press Detection in AVNavigator to rede- storage class specifica- Note that there are cases where even the audio
tings, etc. tect the receiver. tions. files stored on a USB memory device compat-
When the operating instructions Either refresh the page’s display using the brows- ible with the mass storage class specifications
interactive mode is changed, er’s refresh button or display a different page from are not played back on this receiver (page 30).
the settings may not be trans- the links so that the setting is transferred. Connect the USB memory device and switch on
ferred to the browser, causing this receiver (page 23).
AVNavigator to stop interacting. A USB hub is currently This receiver does not support USB hubs (page
When the Wiring Navi, This is because of the browser’s This is not a problem. Perform the operation to being used. 30).
Interactive Manual, security function. authorize the blocked contents. This receiver recognizes Switch off and on again this receiver.
Glossary or the USB memory device as
Software Update is a fraud.
launched, a warning
about security protec-
tion appears on the
browser.
En 79
13 Additional information

Symptoms Causes Remedies Symptoms Causes Remedies

A USB memory device is con- Some formats of USB Check whether the format of your USB memory The audio files stored Windows Media Player 11 or Install Windows Media Player 11 or Windows Media
nected and displayed, but the memory devices, including device is either FAT 16 or FAT 32. Note that on components on the Windows Media Player 12 is not Player 12 on your PC (page 39).
audio files stored on the USB FAT 12, NTFS, and HFS, the FAT 12, NTFS, and HFS formats cannot be network, such as a PC, currently installed on your PC.
memory device cannot be cannot be played back on played back on this receiver (page 30). cannot be played back. Audio files were recorded in Play back audio files recorded in MP3, WAV (LPCM
played back. this receiver. formats other than MP3, WAV only), MPEG-4 AAC, FLAC, or WMA. Note that some
The file format cannot be See the list of file formats that can be played (LPCM only), MPEG-4 AAC, audio files recorded in these formats may not be
properly played back on this back on this receiver (page 31). FLAC, and WMA. played back on this receiver.
receiver. Audio files recorded in MPEG-4 Audio files recorded in MPEG-4 AAC or FLAC can-
Cannot detect USB keyboard. The USB keyboard is routed This receiver is not compatible with USB hubs. AAC or FLAC are being played not be played back on Windows Media Player 11 or
through a USB hub. Plug the keyboard directly into the receiver. back on Windows Media Player Windows Media Player 12. Try using another server.
A PS2 keyboard is routed PS2 keyboards cannot be used with this 11 or Windows Media Player 12. Refer to the operation manual supplied with your
through a PS2/USB con- receiver, even if routed through a PS2/USB server.
nector. connector. Use a USB keyboard. The component connected Check whether the component is affected by spe-
Keyboard is not a USB HID Some devices will not be detected. Use a USB to the network is not properly cial circumstances or is in the sleep mode.
Class device. HID Class keyboard. operated. Try rebooting the component if necessary.

Cannot enter correct text using Keyboard is not US-interna- Use a US-international layout keyboard. NB: The component connected to Try changing the settings for the component con-
the USB keyboard. tional layout keyboard. Some characters cannot be entered. the network does not permit file nected to the network.
sharing.
HOME MEDIA GALLERY The folder stored on the compo- Check the folder stored on the component con-
nent connected to the network nected to the network.
Symptoms Causes Remedies has been deleted or damaged.
Cannot access the The LAN cable is not firmly Firmly connect the LAN cable (page 22).
Network connections could be Check the computer’s network settings, security
network. connected.
restricted due to the computer’s settings, etc.
The router is not switched on. Switch on the router. network settings, security set-
Internet security software is cur- There are cases where a component with Internet tings, etc.
rently installed in the connected security software installed cannot be accessed. Cannot access the The component connected to If the client is automatically authorized, you need to
component. component connected the network is not properly set. enter the corresponding information again. Check
The audio component on Switch on the audio component on the network to the network. whether the connection status is set to “Do not
the network which has been before switching on this receiver. authorize”.
switched off is switched on. There are no playable audio files Check the audio files stored on the component con-
Playback does not start The component is currently Check whether the component is properly con- on the component connected to nected to the network.
while “Connecting...” disconnected from this receiver nected to this receiver or the power supply. the network.
continues to be dis- or the power supply.
played.
The PC or Internet The corresponding IP address is Switch on the built-in DHCP server function of your
radio is not properly not properly set. router, or set up the network manually according to
operated. your network environment (page 68).
The IP address is being auto- The automatic configuration process takes time.
matically configured. Please wait.

80 En
 Additional information 13

Symptoms Causes Remedies Symptoms Causes Remedies

Audio playback is The audio file currently being Check whether the audio file was recorded in a Cannot listen to Inter- The firewall settings for compo- Check the firewall settings for components on the
undesirably stopped or played back was not recorded format supported by this receiver. net radio stations. nents on the network are cur- network.
disturbed. in a format playable on this Check whether the folder has been damaged or rently in operation.
receiver. corrupted. You are currently disconnected Check the connection settings for components on
Note that there are cases where even the audio files from the Internet. the network, and consult with your network service
listed as playable on this receiver cannot be played provider if necessary (page 68).
back or displayed (page 43).
The broadcasts from an Internet There are cases where you cannot listen to some
The LAN cable is currently Connect the LAN cable properly (page 22). radio station are stopped or Internet radio stations even when they are listed
disconnected. interrupted. in the list of Internet radio stations on this receiver
There is heavy traffic on the Use 100BASE-TX to access the components on the (page 40).
network with the Internet being network. The Home Media Gal- The remote control is not cur- Press HMG to set the remote control to the Home
accessed on the same network. lery cannot be operated rently set to the Home Media Media Gallery mode (page 40).
When in the DMR mode, In this case, adjust the volume from the receiver or with the buttons on the Gallery mode.
depending on the external con- remote control. remote control.
troller being used, playback may
be interrupted when a volume SIRIUS radio messages
operation is performed from the
controller.
Status messages Causes Remedy
Antenna Error The SIRIUS antenna is not Check that the antenna cable is attached securely.
There is a connection routed There may be a shortage of bandwidth on the 2.4
properly connected.
through a wireless LAN on the GHz band used by the wireless LAN. Make wired
same network. LAN connections not routed through a wireless Check Sirius Tuner The SiriusConnectTM tuner is Check that the 8 pin mini DIN cable and AC Adapter
LAN. not properly connected. are attached securely.
Install away from any devices emitting electromag- Acquiring Signal The SIRIUS signal is too weak at Check for antenna obstructions and reposition the
netic waves on the 2.4 GHz band (microwave ovens, the current location. SIRIUS antenna to get better signal reception. Use
game consoles, etc.). If this does not solve the the Antenna Aiming option to optimize the antenna
problem, stop using other devices that emit electro- position.
magnetic waves. Subscription Updating Unit is updating subscription. Wait until the encryption code has been updated.
Cannot access In case of Windows Media Player Instead of logging onto the domain, log onto the Updating Channels Unit is updating channels. Wait until the encryption code has been updated.
Windows Media Player 11: You are currently logged local machine (page 40).
Invalid Channel Selected channel is not avail- Select another channel.
11 or Windows Media onto the domain through
able/does not exist.
Player 12. your PC with Windows XP or
Windows Vista installed. Firmware Updating The SiriusConnectTM tuner’s Wait for updating to finish.
In case of Windows Media Player firmware is being updated.
12: You are currently logged
onto the domain through your
PC with Windows 7 installed.

En 81
13 Additional information

! Avoid using devices generating electro- If the settings can be displayed, then change the settings of the wireless
Troubleshooting of wireless magnetic waves as much as possible change the IP address settings of the LAN converter.
LAN when using the system with the wireless receiver and wireless LAN converter as Note, however, that making the
LAN. necessary. advanced wireless LAN settings will not
Network cannot be accessed via wireless necessarily improve the wireless LAN
Multiple wireless LAN converters are con- The IP address settings of the receiver and
LAN. environment. Be careful when changing
nected to the wireless LAN router. wireless LAN converter do not match the
Wireless LAN converter’s power is not on. ! When connecting multiple wireless LAN settings of the wireless LAN router, etc. the settings.
(Wireless LAN converter’s “Power”, “WPS” converters, their IP addresses must be ! Check the IP address settings of the The access point is set to conceal the SSID.
and “Wireless” indicators are not all lit.) changed. For example, if the wireless receiver and wireless LAN converter ! In this case, the SSID may not be dis-
! Check that the USB cable connect- LAN router’s IP address is “192.168.1.1”, (including the DHCP setting). played on the access point list screen.
ing the wireless LAN converter to the set the first wireless LAN converter’s IP If the receiver’s DHCP setting is “ON”, If not, set the SSID, etc., by making the
receiver’s DC OUTPUT for WIRELESS address to “192.168.1.249”, the second turn the receiver’s power off, then turn wireless LAN converter settings on the
LAN terminal is properly connected. wireless LAN converter’s IP address to the power back on. receiver manually.
WLAN POW ERR is displayed on the receiv- “192.168.1.248”, using values between 2 Check that the IP addresses of the The access point’s security settings use
er’s display window. and 249 (such as “249” and “248”) that receiver and wireless LAN converter WEP 152-bit length code key or shared key
! There is a problem with the wireless are not assigned to other wireless LAN match the settings of the wireless LAN authentication.
LAN converter’s power supply. Turn the converters or to other devices. router, etc. ! The receiver does not support WEP
receiver’s power off, then disconnect Wireless LAN connections cannot be estab- If the receiver’s DHCP setting is “OFF”, 152-bit length code key or shared key
the USB cable, reconnect the USB cable lished between the wireless LAN converter set an IP address matching the network authentication.
and turn the receiver’s power back on. and base unit (wireless LAN router, etc.). of the base unit (wireless LAN router,
Network connections cannot be established
! If WLAN POW ERR is still displayed ! The wireless LAN converter must be set etc.).
even when the above measures are taken.
after repeating the above procedure in order to establish wireless LAN con- For example, if the wireless LAN router’s
! Reset the wireless LAN converter. After
several times, there is a problem with nections. See Wireless LAN Converter on IP address is “192.168.1.1”, set the
this, redo the wireless LAN converter’s
the receiver or the USB cable. Unplug page 69 . receiver’s IP address to “192.168.1.XXX”
settings.
the receiver from the wall and call a (*1), the subnet mask to “255.255.255.0”,
The wireless LAN converter is properly About resetting
Pioneer authorized independent service the gateway and DNS to “192.168.1.1”.
connected to the receiver and the wireless 1. Check that the wireless LAN convert-
company. Next, set the wireless LAN converter’s IP
LAN converter’s indicators are lit, but the er’s power is on.
The LAN cable is not firmly connected. address to “192.168.1.249” (*2).
wireless LAN converter cannot be set from 2. Press the wireless LAN converter’s
! Firmly connect the LAN cable (page 23). (*1) Set the “XXX” in “192.168.1.XXX” to
the receiver (the settings screen cannot be reset button for at least 3 seconds.
a number between 2 and 248 that is not
Wireless LAN converter and base unit (wire- displayed). 3. Release the reset button.
assigned to other devices.
less LAN router, etc.) are too far apart or ! If DHCP in the receiver’s IP settings is When the wireless LAN converter is
(*2) Set the “249” in “192.168.1.249” to
there is an obstacle between them. set to OFF and the IP address has been restarted, the resetting procedure is
a number between 2 and 249 that is not
! Improve the wireless LAN environment set manually, the IP address set in the completed.
assigned to other devices.
by moving the wireless LAN converter wireless LAN converter may not match.
and base unit closer together, etc. In the receiver’s IP settings, set DHCP Try making the wireless LAN converter’s
to ON. After the setting is completed, advanced settings.
There is a microwave oven or other device ! The wireless LAN converter can be
generating electromagnetic waves near the turn the receiver’s power off. Next, turn
the receiver’s power back on and check connected to a computer to make the
wireless LAN environment. advanced wireless LAN settings. For
! Use the system in a place away from whether the wireless LAN converter’s
settings can be displayed with the details, see the CD-ROM included for
microwave ovens or others device gener- the wireless LAN converter. Check the
ating electromagnetic waves. receiver.
settings of the wireless LAN router, etc.,

82 En
 Additional information 13

About status messages Speaker Setting Guide Step 2: Adjusting the speaker
height
Refer to the following information when you come up with a status message while operating the In order to achieve an even better surround
Home Media Gallery. effect, it is important to accurately position Adjust the heights (angles) of the different
the speakers and make their volume and tone speakers.
Status messages Descriptions Adjust so that the front speaker units reproduc-
characteristics uniform so as to finely focus the
A component on the network, including a PC, is currently being connected. multi-channel sound. ing mid- and high frequencies is roughly at the
STARTING H.M.G.
Wait for a while. height of the ears.
The three major elements in positioning the
Connection Down The selected category or Internet radio station cannot be accessed. speakers are distance, angle and orienta- If the center speaker cannot be set at the same
File Format Error Cannot be played back for some reasons. tion (the direction in which the speakers are height as the front speakers, adjust its angle of
Track Not Found The selected song has not been found anywhere on the network. pointing). elevation to point it to the listening position.
Distance: The distance of all the speakers Set surround speaker 1 so that it is not under
Server Error The selected server cannot be accessed.
should be equal. the height of the ears.
Server Disconnected The server has been disconnected.
Angle: The speakers should be horizontally
empty There are no files stored in the selected folder.
symmetrical. Step 3: Adjusting the speaker
Preset Not Stored The selected Internet radio station is not currently registered and saved. Orientation: The orientation should be horizon- orientation
Out of Range The value entered is beyond the permitted range of the network settings. tally symmetrical.
If the left and right speakers are not pointing
License Error The license for the contents to be played back is invalid. In most homes, however, it is not possible to
in the same direction, the tone will not be the
This is displayed when the file you have attempted to register in the Favorites achieve this environment. For the distance, on
Item Already Exists same on the right and left, and as a result the
folder has already been registered. this receiver it is possible to automatically cor-
sound field will not be reproduced properly.
rect the speaker distance electrically to a preci-
Favorite List Full
This is displayed when you have attempted to register a file in the Favorites However, if all the speakers are pointed towards
folder but the Favorites folder is already full. sion of 0.5 inch using the Full Auto MCACC
the listening position, the sound field will seem
Setup function (page 25).
cramped. Testing by the Pioneer Multi-channel
Research Group has shown that a good sense
Step 1: Speaker layout and of sound positioning can be achieved by point-
distance adjustment ing all the speakers towards an area 30 cm to 80
Use speaker stands or the like to make sure the cm (12 inches to 31 inches) behind the listening
speakers are steady, and leave at least 10 cm position (between the surround speakers and
(4 inches) from the surrounding walls. Position the listening position).
the speakers attentively so that the speakers on However, the sense of sound positioning can
the left and right are at equal angles from the differ according to the conditions in the room
listening position (center of the adjustments). and the speakers being used. In smaller envi-
(We recommend using cords, etc., when adjust- ronments in particular (when the front speakers
ing the layout.) Ideally all the speakers should are close to the listening position), with this
be equidistant from the listening position. method the speakers will be pointed too inward.
We suggest you use this example of installation
as reference when trying out different installa-
Note tion methods.
! If the speakers cannot be set at equal
distances (on a circle), use the Auto MCACC
Setup speaker distance correction and Fine
Speaker Distance functions to make them
equalize the distance artificially.

En 83
13 Additional information

Step 4: Positioning and adjusting Positional relationship between Important information Note
the subwoofer speakers and monitor regarding the HDMI ! If your display only has one HDMI terminal,
Placing the subwoofer between the center connection you can only receive HDMI video from the
and front speakers makes even music sources Position of front speakers and connected component.
There are cases where you may not be able to
sound more natural (if there is only one sub- monitor ! Depending on the component, audio output
woofer, it doesn’t matter if it is placed on the left route HDMI signals through this receiver (this
The front speakers should be as equidistant as may be limited to the number of channels
or right side). The low bass sound output from depends on the HDMI-equipped component
possible to the monitor. available from the connected display unit (for
the subwoofer is not directional and there is no you are connecting-check with the manufac-
example audio output is reduced to 2 channels
need to adjust the height. Normally the sub- turer for HDMI compatibility information).
for a monitor with stereo audio limitations).
woofer is placed on the floor. Put it in a position If you aren’t receiving HDMI signals properly
TV ! If you want to switch the input function, you’ll
at which it will not cancel out the bass sound L R through this receiver (from your component),
have to switch functions on both the receiver
output from the other speakers. Also note that please try one of the following configurations
and your display unit.
placing it near a wall may result in sympathetic when connecting up.
! Since the sound is muted on the display when
vibrations with the building that could exces- 45° to 60° using the HDMI connection, you must adjust
sively amplify the bass sound. Configuration A the volume on the display every time you
If the subwoofer must be installed near a wall, Use component video cables to connect the switch input functions.
place it at an angle so that it is not parallel to video output of your HDMI-equipped compo-
the wall surface. This can help reduce any sym- nent to the receiver’s component video input.
pathetic vibrations, but depending on the shape The receiver can then convert the analog com- Cleaning the unit
of the room this could result in standing waves. Position of center speaker and ponent video signal to a digital HDMI signal for ! Use a polishing cloth or dry cloth to wipe off
However, even if standing waves are generated, monitor transmission to the display. For this configu- dust and dirt.
their influence on the sound quality can be ration, use the most convenient connection
Since mostly dialogs are output from the center ! When the surface is dirty, wipe with a soft
prevented using the Auto MCACC’s standing (digital is recommended) for sending audio to
speaker, keeping the center speaker as close cloth dipped in some neutral cleanser diluted
wave control function (page 62). the receiver. See the operating instructions for
as possible to the screen makes the overall five or six times with water, and wrung out
sound more natural. For TVs using Braun tubes, more on audio connections. well, and then wipe again with a dry cloth. Do
Step 5: Default settings with the however, when installing the center speaker on not use furniture wax or cleansers.
Auto MCACC Setup (auto sound the floor, adjust its angle of elevation to point it Note ! Never use thinners, benzene, insecticide
field correction) function towards the listening position. ! The picture quality will change slightly during sprays or other chemicals on or near this unit,
conversion. since these will corrode the surface.
It is more effective to perform the Full Auto Installation on floor (Diagram as seen
MCACC Setup (page 25) procedure once from the side)
the adjustments described above have been Configuration B
completed.
Monitor Connect your HDMI-equipped component
directly to the display using an HDMI cable.
Note Then use the most convenient connection
! The distance to the subwoofer may be slightly (digital is recommended) for sending audio
larger than the distance actually measured to the receiver. See the operating instruc-
with a tape measure, etc. This is because this tions for more on audio connections. Set the
distance is corrected for electric delay, and is ! If the center speaker is not of the shielded display volume to minimum when using this
not a problem. type, install it away from the TV. configuration.
! When installing the center speaker on top of
the monitor, place it facing slightly downwards
towards the listening position.
84 En
 Additional information 13

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent theatre environment. THX engineers developed closest speaker as you move away from the
Surround sound formats #’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; patented technologies to accurately translate middle seating position. Adaptive Decorrelation
Below is a brief description of the main sur- 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872; 7,333,929; the sound from the movie theatre environment slightly changes one surround channel’s time
round sound formats you’ll find on BDs, DVDs, 7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide into the home, correcting the tonal and spatial and phase relationship with respect to the other
satellite, cable and terrestrial broadcasts, and patents issued & pending. DTS and the Symbol errors that occur. On this product, when the surround channel. This expands the listening
video cassettes. are registered trademarks, & DTS-HD, DTS-HD THX indicator is on, THX features are automati- position and creates-with only two speakers- the
Master Audio, and the DTS logos are trademarks cally added in Cinema modes (e.g. THX Cinema, same spacious surround experience as in a
of DTS, Inc. Product includes software. © DTS, THX Surround EX). movie theatre.
Dolby
Inc. All Rights Reserved.
The Dolby technologies are explained below.
Re-Equalization THX Select2 Plus
See http://www.dolby.com for more detailed
The tonal balance of a film soundtrack will be Before any home theatre component can be
information. About THX
excessively bright and harsh when played back THX Select2 Plus certified, it must incorporate
The THX technologies are explained below. over audio equipment in the home because film all the features above and also pass a rigorous
See http://www.thx.com for more detailed soundtracks were designed to be played back in series of quality and performance tests. Only
information. large movie theaters using very different pro- then can a product feature the THX Select2 Plus
fessional equipment. Re-Equalization restores logo, which is your guarantee that the Home
the correct tonal balance for watching a movie Theatre products you purchase will give you
soundtrack in a small home environment. superb performance for many years to come.
Manufactured under license from Dolby THX Select2 Plus requirements cover every
Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround aspect of the product including pre-amplifier
EX” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Timbre Matching
and power amplifier performance and opera-
Dolby Laboratories. The human ear changes our perception of a
tion, and hundreds of other parameters in both
sound depending on the direction from which
the digital and analog domain.
THX, the THX logo and Select2 Plus are trade- the sound is coming. In a movie theatre, there is
DTS
marks of THX Ltd. which are registered in some an array of surround speakers so that the sur-
The DTS technologies are explained below.
jurisdictions. All rights reserved. All other trade- round information is all around you. In a home THX Surround EX
See http://www.dts.com for more detailed theatre, you use only two speakers located to THX Surround EX - Dolby Digital Surround EX
marks are the property of their respective owners.
information. the side of your head. The Timbre Matching is a joint development of Dolby Laboratories
feature filters the information going to the sur- and the THX Ltd. In a movie theater, film
THX Cinema processing
round speakers so that they more closely match soundtracks that have been encoded with
THX is an exclusive set of standards and tech- the tonal characteristics of the sound coming Dolby Digital Surround EX technology are able
nologies established by THX Ltd. THX grew from from the front speakers. This ensures seam- to reproduce an extra channel which has been
George Lucas’ personal desire to make your less panning between the front and surround added during the mixing of the program. This
experience of the film soundtrack, in both movie speakers. channel, called Surround Back, places sounds
theatres and in your home theatre, as faith- behind the listener in addition to the currently
ful as possible to what the director intended. available front left, front center, front right,
Movie soundtracks are mixed in special
Adaptive Decorrelation
surround right, surround left and subwoofer
movie theatres called dubbing stages and are In a movie theatre, a large number of surround
channels. This additional channel provides the
designed to be played back in movie theatres speakers help create an enveloping surround
opportunity for more detailed imaging behind
with similar equipment and conditions. This sound experience, but in a home theatre there
the listener and brings more depth, spacious
same soundtrack is then transferred directly are usually only two speakers. This can make
ambience and sound localization than ever
onto Laserdisc, VHS tape, DVD, etc., and is the surround speakers sound like headphones
before. Movies that were created using the
not changed for playback in a small home that lack spaciousness and envelopment. The
Dolby Digital Surround EX technology, when
surround sounds will also collapse into the

En 85
13 Additional information

released into the home consumer market may enables users to experience the true impact of THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
exhibit wording to that effect on the packaging. soundtracks regardless of the volume setting. About SIRIUS COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
A list of movies created using this technology THX Loudness Plus is automatically applied “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
can be found on the Dolby web site at http:// when listening in any THX listening mode. The WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
www.dolby.com. new THX Cinema, THX Music, and THX Games LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
Only amplifier and controller products bearing modes are tailored to apply the proper THX MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
the THX Surround EX logo, when in the THX Loudness Plus settings for each type of content. PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
Surround EX mode, faithfully reproduce this IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION
new technology in the home. OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
This product may also engage the “THX About iPod DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
Surround EX” mode during the playback of EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
5.1 channel material that is not Dolby Digital DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
Surround EX encoded. In such case the infor- SIRIUS, XM and all related marks and logos TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
mation delivered to the Surround Back channel are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
will be program dependent and may or may not subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Service not PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
be very pleasing depending on the particular available in Alaska and Hawaii. HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
soundtrack and the tastes of the individual LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
listener. LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
About FLAC OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
Boundary Gain CompensationTM OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
Depending on the listener’s and the subwoof- FLAC Decoder DAMAGE.
er’s position, the listener may experience an Copyright © 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005,
excessive bass effect. This feature compensates 2006, 2007
for excessive bass resulting from a boundary Josh Coalson
“Made for iPod,” “Made for iPhone,” and “Made
gain effect. This feature is designed to operate Redistribution and use in source and binary
for iPad” mean that an electronic accessory
when used with a subwoofer certified to THX forms, with or without modification, are permit-
has been designed to connect specifically to
Select2TM specifications. ted provided that the following conditions are
iPod, iPhone, or iPad, respectively, and has
been certified by the developer to meet Apple met:
THX Loudness Plus Description performance standards. Apple is not respon- ! Redistributions of source code must retain the
THX Loudness Plus is a new volume control sible for the operation of this device or its com- above copyright notice, this list of conditions
technology featured in THX Ultra2 PlusTM and pliance with safety and regulatory standards. and the following disclaimer.
THX Select2 PlusTM Certified amplifiers. With Please note that the use of this accessory ! Redistributions in binary form must reproduce
THX Loudness Plus, home theater audiences with iPod, iPhone, or iPad may affect wireless the above copyright notice, this list of
can now experience the rich details in a sur- performance. conditions and the following disclaimer in
round mix at any volume level. A consequence Apple, AirPlay, the AirPlay logo, iPad, iPhone, the documentation and/or other materials
of turning the volume below Reference Level is iPod, iPod shuffle, iPod nano, iPod classic, iPod provided with the distribution.
that certain sound elements can be lost or per- touch, iTunes and Mac are trademarks of Apple ! Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation
ceived differently by the listener. THX Loudness Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. nor the names of its contributors may be used
Plus compensates for the tonal and spatial to endorse or promote products derived from
shifts that occur when the volume is reduced this software without specific prior written
by intelligently adjusting ambient surround permission.
channel levels and frequency response. This

86 En
 Additional information 13

Auto Surround, ALC and Stream Direct with different input Multichannel signal formats
signal formats Input signal format Auto Surround / ALC PURE DIRECT / DIRECT
The following charts show what you will hear with different input signal formats, depending on the Surround Back speaker(s): Connected
Stream Direct mode (see Using Stream Direct on page 37 ) you have selected. Dolby Digital EX Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital EX (6.1 channel flagged)
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE
Dolby TrueHD EX (6.1 channel flagged)
Stereo (2 channel) signal formats <a> <a>
DTS-HD Master Audio ES (6.1 channel
DTS-ES (Matrix) DTS-ES (Matrix)
Auto Surround / ALC / flagged)
Input signal format PURE DIRECT
DIRECT DTS-ES (6.1 channel sources/6.1 channel
DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete) DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)
Surround Back speaker(s): Connected flagged)
Dolby Digital Surround 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE DTS sources (5.1 channel encoding) Straight decoding Straight decoding
DTS Surround Neo:6 CINEMA Neo:6 CINEMA DTS-HD sources As above As above
Other stereo sources Stereo playback Stereo playback Other 5.1/6.1/7.1 channel sources As above As above
Analog sources As above ANALOG DIRECT (stereo) Surround Back speaker(s): Not connected
PCM sources As above PCM DIRECT DVD-A sources/Multi-ch PCM Straight decoding Straight decoding
DVD-A sources As above As above SACD sources (5.1 channel encoding) As above As above
SACD sources As above Stereo playback Other 5.1/6.1/7.1 channel sources As above As above
Surround Back speaker(s): Not connected a Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected.
Dolby Digital Surround 2 Pro Logic II MOVIE 2 Pro Logic II MOVIE
DTS Surround Neo:6 CINEMA Neo:6 CINEMA
Other stereo sources Stereo playback Stereo playback
Analog sources As above ANALOG DIRECT (stereo)
PCM sources As above PCM DIRECT
DVD-A sources As above As above
SACD sources As above Stereo playback

En 87
13 Additional information

decoder can then use for enhanced surround THX Calibrating the sound field/
Glossary listening with greater sound detail. The THX technologies are explained below. Improving the sound quality
Dolby Pro Logic IIz See http://www.thx.com for more detailed
Phase Control
Adding a pair of speakers above the front left information.
Audio formats/Decoding The Phase Control technology incorporated into
and right speakers adds expressiveness in the THX Cinema this receiver’s design provides coherent sound
Dolby
vertical direction to the previous horizontally- A mode for playing in a home theater environ- reproduction through the use of phase match-
The Dolby technologies are explained below.
oriented sound field. The height channel ment the sound tracks of theater movies that ing for an optimal sound image at your listening
See http://www.dolby.com for more detailed
strengthens the sound field’s sense of three- have been recorded and edited for playback in position.
information.
dimensionality and air, producing presence and large spaces such as movie theaters.
Dolby Digital expansion.
Virtual Surround Back
THX Music When you’re not using surround back speakers,
Dolby Digital is a multichannel digital audio
DTS A mode adjusted mainly for listening to music selecting this mode allows you to hear a virtual
coding system widely used in cinemas, and
The DTS technologies are explained below. that has been masterized at a higher level than surround back channel through your surround
in the home for DVD and digital broadcast
See http://www.dts.com for more detailed movie sound tracks. speakers. You can choose to listen to sources
soundtracks.
information. THX Games with no surround back channel information.
Dolby TrueHD
DTS Digital Surround A mode for playing the sound of games with Virtual Height
Dolby TrueHD is the lossless encoding technol-
DTS Digital Surround is a 5.1-channel audio spatial fidelity. In many cases the sound is When you’re not using front height speak-
ogy developed for high-definition optical discs
coding system from DTS Inc. now widely used mixed in the same way as for movies, but this ers, selecting this mode allows you to hear a
in the upcoming era.
for DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, 5.1 music discs, mode is meant for small environments rather virtual front height channel through your front
Dolby Digital Plus digital broadcasts, and video games. than the large environments of theaters. speakers.
Dolby Digital Plus is the audio technology for
DTS-HD Master Audio THX Surround EX Virtual Depth
all high-definition programming and media. It
DTS-HD Master Audio is a technology that A mode using technology developed jointly When this mode is selected, the sound field
combines the efficiency to meet future broad-
delivers master audio sources recorded in a by Dolby Laboratories and THX for creating a expands virtually to behind the display, result-
cast demands with the power and flexibility to
professional studio to listeners without any loss sound field behind the listeners. ing in a sound field with the same depth as
realize the full audio potential expected in the
of data, preserving audio quality. THX Loudness Plus the 3D picture to achieve a better sense of
upcoming high-definition era.
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio A mode creating a rich, subtle surround sound presence.
Dolby Digital Surround EX
A high definition audio technology by which field through optimal calibration of the volume Auto Sound Retriever
Dolby Digital Surround EX (the EX stands for
signals can be transferred over HDMI cables. and frequency response of the individual chan- The Auto Sound Retriever feature employs
EXtended) is an extension of Dolby Digital
DTS-ES nels according to the volume level. DSP technology to restore sound pressure
encoding whereby a surround back channel
is matrixed into the surround left/right chan- DTS-ES (the ES stands for Extended Surround) Decoding and smooth jagged artifacts left over after
nels for 6.1 channel playback. This allows for is a decoder that is capable of decoding both A technology for converting digital signals compression.
compatibility with Dolby Digital 5.1 channel DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 and DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 that have been compressed upon recording With some audio inputs, the Sound Retriever
decoding, as well as for decoding using Dolby encoded sources. by a digital signal processing circuit, etc., into effect is automatically optimized based on the
Digital EX. DTS Neo:6 the original signals. The term “decoding” (or bitrate information of the contents that have
DTS Neo:6 can generate 7.1 channel surround “matrix decoding”) is also used for the technol- been input to achieve high sound quality.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx and Dolby Surround
sound from any matrixed stereo source (such ogy which converts 2-channel sound sources Sound Retriever Air
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is an improved version of the
as video or TV) and from 5.1 channel sources. into multiple channels or expands 5.1-channel Sound Retriever Air compensates for reduced
Dolby Pro Logic II (and Dolby Pro Logic) decod-
signals into 6.1 or 7.1 channels. sound quality due to compression when send-
ing system. DTS Neural Surround
Dolby Surround is an encoding system which DTS Neural Surround can generate 7.1 chan- ing Bluetooth signals.
embeds surround sound information within nel surround sound from any matrixed stereo
a stereo soundtrack, which a Dolby Pro Logic source (such as video or TV).

88 En
 Additional information 13

PQLS ARC (Audio Return Channel) aacPlus Windows Media DRM

Jitterless high quality playback is possible by When a TV supporting the HDMI ARC (Audio AAC decoder uses aacPlus developed by Coding Windows Media DRM is a DRM (Digital Rights
connecting a PQLS-compatible player with Return Channel) function is connected to the Technologies. (www.codingtechnologies.com) Management) service for the Windows Media
HDMI connections. receiver, the sound of the TV can be input via platform. It is designed to provide secure
ALC (Auto Level Control) the HDMI OUT terminal. delivery of audio and/or video content over an
In the Auto level control (ALC) mode, this The sound of the TV can be input from the IP network to a PC or other playback device in
receiver equalizes playback sound levels. receiver’s HDMI OUT terminal, so connection such a way that the distributor can control how
Also, the low and high frequency sounds, dia- with the TV can be completed with a single that content is used. The WMDRM-protected
logs, surround effects, etc., that are difficult to HDMI cable. content can only be played back on a compo-
hear when the volume is low are adjusted to be
FLAC nent supporting the WMDRM service.
FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec) is an audio
optimal for the volume level. This mode is par- Network function Router
format allows lossless codec. Audio is com- A device for relaying data flowing on a network
ticularly optimum when listening at night. AirPlay pressed in FLAC without any loss in quality. to another network. In homes, routers often
Front Stage Surround Advance This receiver supports AirPlay audio streaming For more details about FLAC, visit the following
With the Front Stage Surround Advance fea- from iPod touch (2nd, 3rd and 4th generations), also function as DHCP servers. Products with
website: built-in wireless LAN access points are called
ture, you can enjoy seamless, natural surround iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPad with iOS 4.2 or later, http://flac.sourceforge.net/
sound effects using only the front speakers, and iTunes 10.1 (Mac and PC) or later. “wireless LAN routers”.
without deteriorating the quality of the original
Windows Media DHCP
For more information, see the Apple website
Windows Media is a multimedia framework for Abbreviation of Dynamic Host Configuration
sound. (http://www.apple.com).
media creation and distribution for Microsoft Protocol. A protocol for automatically assign-
MCACC DLNA Windows. Windows Media is either a regis-
The Auto MCACC Setup provides a quick but The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a ing such setting information as IP addresses
tered trademark or trademark of Microsoft within network connections. This offers conve-
accurate surround sound setup, which includes cross-industry organization of consumer elec- Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.
the advanced features of Professional Acoustic tronics, computing industry and mobile device nience in that, when enabled, it allows network
Use an application licensed by Microsoft functions to be used simply by connecting the
Calibration EQ. companies. Digital Living provides consumers Corporation to author, distribute, or play
with easy sharing of digital media through a devices to the network.
Windows Media formatted content. Using
HDMI wired or wireless network in the home. an application unauthorized by Microsoft Wireless LAN/Wi-Fi
vTuner Corporation is subject to malfunction. “Wi-Fi” (Wireless Fidelity) is a trademark
Control with HDMI function coined by the Wi-Fi Alliance trade associa-
Synchronized operations below with a Control vTuner is a paid online database service that Windows Media Player 11/
allows you to listen to radio and TV broadcasts tion to increase recognition of wireless LAN
with HDMI-compatible Pioneer TV or Blu-ray Windows Media Player 12 standards. With the increase in the number
Disc player or with a component of another on the Internet. vTuner lists thousands of sta- Windows Media Player is software to deliver
tions from over 100 different countries around of devices connected to computers in recent
make that supports the Control with HDMI music, photos and movies from a Microsoft years, Wi-Fi offers the advantage of eliminat-
functions are possible when the component is the globe. For more detail about vTuner, visit the Windows computer to home stereo systems
following website: ing the complexity of making connections with
connected to the receiver using an HDMI cable. and TVs. LAN cables by using wireless connection. As
! The receiver’s volume can be set and the http://www.radio-pioneer.com With this software, you can play back files
“This product is protected by certain intel- a way of reassuring users, products that have
sound can be muted using the TV’s remote stored on the PC through various devices wher- passed interoperability tests carry the logo
control. lectual property rights of NEMS and BridgeCo. ever you like in your home.
Use or distribution of such technology outside “Wi-Fi Certified” to indicate that compatibility is
! The receiver’s input switches over This software can be downloaded from assured.
automatically when the TV’s input is of this product is prohibited without a license Microsoft’s website.
changed or a Control with HDMI-compatible from NEMS and BridgeCo or an authorized ! Windows Media Player 11 (for Windows XP or WPS
component is played. subsidiary.” Windows Vista) Abbreviation of Wi-Fi Protected Setup. A stan-
! The receiver’s power is also set to standby, ! Windows Media Player 12 (for Windows 7) dard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance industry
when the TV’s power is set to standby. For more information check the official group for a function allowing settings related
Microsoft website. to interconnection of WPS-compatible wireless

En 89
13 Additional information

LAN devices and encryption to be made with Receiver function vTuner

simple operations. There are a number of meth- Features index See Listening to Internet radio stations on page
Operation Mode
ods, including push-button configuration and 40 .
This receiver is equipped with a great number Operation Mode
PIN code configuration. This AV receiver sup- Rhapsody
of functions and settings. The Operation Mode See Operation Mode Setup on page 27 .
ports both push-button configuration and PIN See Playback with Home Media Gallery on page
feature is provided for users who find it difficult AVNavigator
code configuration. 40 .
to master all these functions and settings. See About using AVNavigator (included
SSID Sirius Internet Radio
CD-ROM) on page 7 .
Abbreviation of Service Set IDentifier. A wire- See Playback with Home Media Gallery on page
less LAN access point identifier. Can be set as Full Auto MCACC
40 .
desired using up to 32 characters of English See Automatically conducting optimum sound
letters and numbers. tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 25 . Pandora
See Playback with Home Media Gallery on page
Automatic MCACC (Expert)
40 .
Bluetooth function See Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 60 .
DLNA
Bluetooth wireless technology Manual MCACC setup
See About network playback on page 42 .
A short-range wireless communications See Manual MCACC setup on page 62 .
standard for digital devices. Information is AirPlay
PQLS
exchanged between devices several meters to See Using AirPlay on iPod touch, iPhone, iPad,
See Setting the PQLS function on page 46 .
several tens of meters apart using radio waves. and iTunes on page 39 .
Phase Control
It uses radio waves on the 2.4 GHz band which Wireless LAN
See Better sound using Phase Control on page
does not require applications for licenses or See Connecting to a wireless LAN on page 23 .
38 .
usage registration for applications conducting Playback High Resolution audio file
wireless exchange of digital information at rela- Standing Wave
See About playable file formats on page 43 .
tively low speeds, such as computer mouses See Setting the Audio options on page 48 .
and keyboards, mobile phones, smartphones, Slideshow
Phase Control Plus
text and audio information for PDAs, etc. See Playing back photo files stored on a USB
See Setting the Audio options on page 48 .
memory device on page 30 .
Pairing Auto Sound Retriever
“Pairing” must be done before you start play- Bluetooth ADAPTER
See Setting the Audio options on page 48 .
back of Bluetooth wireless technology content See Bluetooth ADAPTER for Wireless Enjoyment
ALC (Auto Level Control) of Music on page 34 .
using the Bluetooth ADAPTER. Make sure to
See Auto playback on page 36 .
perform pairing the first time you operate the ARC (Audio Return Channel)
system or any time pairing data is cleared. Front Stage Surround Advance See HDMI Setup on page 45 .
The pairing step is necessary to register the See Enjoying various types of playback using the
SACD Gain
Bluetooth wireless technology device to enable listening modes on page 36 .
See Setting the Audio options on page 48 .
Bluetooth communications. For more details, Sound Retriever Air
see also the operating instructions of your
Auto delay
See Enjoying various types of playback using the
See Setting the Audio options on page 48 .
Bluetooth wireless technology device. listening modes on page 36 .
! Pairing is required when you first use the Height Gain (Dolby Pro Logic llz Height
Dialog Enhancement
Bluetooth wireless technology device and option)
See Setting the Audio options on page 48 .
Bluetooth ADAPTER. See Setting the Audio options on page 48 .
! To enable Bluetooth communication, pairing Internet radio
Virtual Height
should be done with both your system and See Listening to Internet radio stations on page
See Setting the Audio options on page 48 .
Bluetooth wireless technology device. 40 .

90 En
 Additional information 13

Virtual Surround Back

See Setting the Audio options on page 48 .
Virtual Depth
See Setting the Audio options on page 48 .
Digital Video Converter
See Setting the Video options on page 50 .
Pure Cinema
See Setting the Video options on page 50 .
Progressive Motion
See Setting the Video options on page 50 .
Advanced Video Adjust
See Setting the Video options on page 50 .
Auto Power Down
See The Other Setup menu on page 70 .

En 91
13 Additional information

Tuner Section Number of Furnished Parts

Specifications Frequency Range (FM).......87.5 MHz to 108 MHz MCACC Setup microphone................................. 1
Antenna Input (FM)................... 75 W unbalanced Remote control unit............................................. 1
Amplifier section
Frequency Range (AM).........531 kHz to 1602 kHz AAA size IEC R03 dry cell batteries..................... 2
Continuous average power output of 110
Antenna (AM)............... Loop antenna (balanced) iPod cable............................................................. 1
watts* per channel, min., at 8 ohms, from 20
Video Section AM loop antenna.................................................. 1
Hz to 20 000 Hz with no more than 0.08 %**
Signal level FM wire antenna.................................................. 1
total harmonic distortion.
Composite Video........................1 Vp-p (75 W) Power cord
Continuous Power Output
Component Video..............Y: 1.0 Vp-p (75 W), CD-ROM (AVNavigator)
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 W, 0.08 %)
PB/PR: 0.7 Vp-p (75 W) These operating instructions
Front...................................... 110 W + 110 W
Center....................................................110 W Corresponding maximum resolution
Surround............................... 110 W + 110 W Component Video....................1080p (1125p) Note
Surround back (Front height/wide) (Video convert off) ! Specifications and the design are subject to
............................................... 110 W + 110 W Digital In/Out Section possible modifications without notice, due to
Continuous Power Output (1 kHz, 6 W, 1.0 %) HDMI terminal.............................19-pin (Not DVI) improvements.
Front...................................... 150 W + 150 W HDMI output type..................................5 V, 55 mA ! This product includes FontAvenue® fonts
Center....................................................150 W USB terminal.............USB2.0 Full Speed (Type A) licensed by NEC Corporation. FontAvenue is a
Surround............................... 150 W + 150 W iPod terminal.......... USB, and Video (Composite) registered trademark of NEC Corporation.
Surround back (Front height/wide) SIRIUS antenna cable.........8-pin mini DIN cable
............................................... 150 W + 150 W ADAPTER PORT terminal...................5 V, 100 mA
Total harmonic distortion........................... 0.06 % WIRELESS LAN ADAPTER terminal
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 100 W + 100 W, 8 W) .............................................................5 V, 600 mA
Guaranteed speaker impedance....... 16 W to 8 W,
Integrated Control Section
less than 8 W to 6 W (setting required)
Control (SR) terminal......ø 3.5 Mini-jack (MONO)
* Measured pursuant to the Federal Trade Control (IR) terminal.......ø 3.5 Mini-jack (MONO)
Commission’s Trade Regulation rule on Power IR signal................High Active (High Level: 2.0 V)
Output Claims for Amplifiers RS-232C cable type....................9-pin, cross type,
** Measured by Audio Spectrum Analyzer female-female
Audio Section EXTENSION terminal..........................5 V, 150 mA
Input (Sensitivity/Impedance) Network Section
LINE.......................................... 350 mV/47 kW LAN terminal..................10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX
Output (Level/Impedance)
Miscellaneous
REC.......................................... 335 mV/2.2 kW
Power requirements.................... AC 120 V, 60 Hz
Signal-to-Noise Ratio
Power consumption.....................................570 W
(IHF, short circuited, A network)
In standby
LINE......................................................103 dB
.............. 0.1 W (HDMI Setup – Control : OFF)
Frequency Response......5 Hz to 100 000 Hz dB
............... 0.3 W (HDMI Setup – Control : ON)
(Pure Direct Mode)
Dimensions
....... 435 mm (W) x 185.6 mm (H) x 440.3 mm (D)
(17 3/16 in. (W) x 7 5/16 in. (H) x 17 3/8 in. (D))
Weight (without package)........... 13.7 kg (30.2 lb)

92 En
 Additional information 13

KEC 0104 Olevia 0048, 0054, 0059 Scotch 0006 Vizio 0004, 0070, 0071,
Preset code list Kenwood 0004, 0006, Onwa 0008, 0104 Scott 0004, 0006, 0007, 0108
0100 Oppo 0095 0008, 0009, 0090, 0104 Wards 0000, 0001, 0004,
You should have no problem controlling a component if you find the manufacturer in this list, but
KLH 0106 Optimus 0105 Sears 0000, 0004, 0006, 0005, 0006, 0009, 0100,
please note that there are cases where codes for the manufacturer in the list will not work for the
Kloss Novabeam 0008, Optoma 0075 0009, 0101, 0102, 0103 0101
model that you are using. There are also cases where only certain functions may be controllable
0012 Optonica 0014 Sharp 0004, 0006, 0007, Waycon 0102
after assigning the proper preset code. KTV 0008, 0100, 0104, Orion 0025 0014, 0033 Westinghouse 0047,
0110 Panasonic 0003, 0010, Sheng Chia 0014 0051
Important LG 0005, 0052, 0078, 0017, 0027, 0105, 0114, Shogun 0004 White Westinghouse
! We do not guarantee the operations of all the manufacturers and devices listed. Operation may not 0097 0120, 0121, 0124, 0125 Signature 0001 0023
be possible even if a preset code is entered. Logik 0001 Penney 0100, 0102 Sony 0002, 0018, 0029, Yamaha 0004, 0005,
Luxman 0004, 0006 Philco 0003, 0004, 0005, 0030, 0031, 0034 0006, 0100
If you can’t find a preset code that matches the component you want to control, you can still teach
LXI 0000, 0006, 0101, 0006, 0007, 0100, 0101 Soundesign 0004, 0006, Zenith 0001, 0004, 0011,
the remote individual commands from another remote control (see Programming signals from other
0102 Philips 0003, 0004, 0007, 0008, 0009, 0104 0015, 0099
remote controls on page 55 ). Magnavox 0004, 0006, 0019, 0020, 0101 Squareview 0103
0019, 0020, 0037, 0042, Philips Magnavox 0019 SSS 0004, 0008, 0104
TV 0100, 0101 Pilot 0004, 0100 Starlite 0008, 0104
Pioneer 0004, 0006, Carnivale 0100 Dumont 0004, 0011, Goldstar 0004, 0005, Majestic 0001 Polaroid 0057, 0106 Superscan 0014
0113, 0115, 0116, 0117, Carver 0101 0099 0006, 0007, 0100 Marantz 0004, 0006, Portland 0004, 0005, Supre-Macy 0012
0119, 0122, 0123 CCE 0110 Durabrand 0041, 0103, Gradiente 0066 0062, 0100, 0101 0006 Supreme 0002
Admiral 0001, 0014 Celebrity 0002 0104 Grunpy 0008, 0009, 0104 Matsushita 0105 Prima 0065 SVA 0088
Adventura 0012 Celera 0106 Dwin 0014 Haier 0112 Maxent 0087, 0107 Princeton 0097 Sylvania 0004, 0006,
Aiwa 0002 Changhong 0106 Electroband 0002 Hallmark 0004, 0006 Megapower 0097 Prism 0010 0049, 0079, 0080, 0100,
Akai 0002, 0100 Citizen 0004, 0006, 0008, Electrograph 0107 Harman/Kardon 0101 Megatron 0006 Proscan 0000 0101, 0103
Albatron 0097 0100 Electrohome 0002, 0003, Harvard 0008, 0104 Memorex 0001, 0005, Proton 0004, 0006, 0007 Symphonic 0008, 0041,
Alleron 0009 Clarion 0104 0004, 0006 Havermy 0014 0006, 0041 Protron 0055 0103, 0104
America Action 0104 Coby 0056 Element 0082 Hewlett Packard 0053 MGA 0004, 0005, 0006, Proview 0068 Syntax 0054
Amtron 0008 Colortyme 0004, 0006 Emerson 0004, 0006, Hisense 0069 0100 Pulsar 0004, 0011, 0099 Syntax-Brillian 0054
Anam 0104 Concerto 0004, 0006 0007, 0008, 0009, 0023, Hitachi 0004, 0006, 0007 Midland 0010, 0011, Quasar 0003, 0010, 0105 Tandy 0014
Anam National 0003, Contec 0104 0103, 0104 Hyundai 0098 0099 Radio Shack 0100, 0104 Tatung 0003, 0108
0008 Contec/Cony 0007, 0008 Emprex 0092 Ilo 0089, 0091 Mintek 0091 Radio Shack/Realistic Technics 0010, 0105
AOC 0004, 0005, 0006, Craig 0008, 0104 Envision 0004, 0006, IMA 0008 Mitsubishi 0004, 0005, 0000, 0004, 0006, 0007, Techwood 0004, 0006,
0100 Crosley 0081, 0101 0100 Infinity 0101 0006, 0014, 0045 0008 0010
Apex 0021, 0102, 0106 Crown 0008, 0104 Epson 0061 InFocus 0074 Monivision 0097 RCA 0000, 0003, 0004, Teknika 0001, 0004,
Audiovox 0008, 0104 CTX 0063 ESA 0103 Initial 0091 Montgomery Ward 0005, 0006, 0013, 0024, 0005, 0006, 0007, 0008,
Aventura 0103 Curtis Mathes 0000, Fujitsu 0009 Insignia 0085, 0086 0001 0035 0009, 0101, 0104
Axion 0094 0004, 0006, 0014, 0100, Funai 0008, 0009, 0103, Inteq 0099 Motorola 0003, 0014 Realistic 0100, 0104 TMK 0004, 0006
Bang & Olufsen 0111 0101 0104 Janeil 0012 MTC 0004, 0005, 0006, Runco 0011, 0099, 0100 TNCi 0099
Belcor 0004 CXC 0008, 0104 Futuretech 0008, 0104 JBL 0101 0100 Sampo 0004, 0006, 0100, Toshiba 0026, 0028,
Bell & Howell 0001 Cytron 0093 Gateway 0067, 0107, JC Penney 0000, 0004, Multitech 0008, 0104, 0107 0036, 0038, 0040, 0043,
Benq 0064 Daewoo 0004, 0005, 0108 0005, 0006, 0010 0110 Samsung 0004, 0005, 0102
Bradford 0008, 0104 0006, 0023 GE 0000, 0003, 0004, JCB 0002 NAD 0006, 0102 0006, 0007, 0022, 0032, Vector Research 0100
Brillian 0109 Daytron 0004, 0006 0006, 0010, 0016, 0039 Jensen 0004, 0006 NEC 0003, 0004, 0005, 0076, 0077, 0083, 0100, Vidikron 0101
Brockwood 0004 Dell 0073 GFM 0080, 0084 JVC 0007, 0010, 0044, 0006, 0100 0110 Vidtech 0004, 0005, 0006
Broksonic 0104 DiamondVision 0096 Gibralter 0004, 0011, 5064 Net-TV 0107 Sansui 0025 Viewsonic 0058, 0107
Candle 0004, 0006, 0012, Dimensia 0000 0099, 0100 Kawasho 0002, 0004, Nikko 0006, 0100 Sanyo 0004, 0050 Viking 0012
0100 Disney 0046 0006 Norcent 0060 Sceptre 0072 Viore 0089

En 93
13 Additional information

DVD DVR (BDR, HDR)

If operations are not possible using the preset codes below, you may be able to conduct operations If operations are not possible using the preset codes below, you may be able to conduct operations
with the preset codes for the BD, DVR (BDR, HDR). with the preset codes for the DVD, BD.
Pioneer 2014, 2158 Daewoo 2021, 2087 Kenwood 2028, 2068 Rio 2087 Pioneer 2103, 2150, Panasonic 2100, 2106 Sony 2105, 2108, 2109,
Accurian 2092 Denon 2026, 2068 KLH 2070, 2080 Rowa 2071 2151, 2152, 2153, 2154, Sharp 2104, 2112 2110, 2113
Advent 2072 Desay 2055 Koss 2024, 2069, 2075 Samsung 2009, 2011, 2155, 2156, 2157 Toshiba 2111
Aiwa 2012 DiamondVision 2042 Landel 2093 2015, 2031, 2044, 2068
Akai 2066 Disney 2022 Lasonic 2085 Sansui 2066
Alco 2070 Durabrand 2090 Lenoxx 2074, 2090 Sanyo 2066, 2083 VCR
Allegro 2087 Emerson 2067, 2082, LG 2019, 2051, 2061, Sharp 2035 Pioneer 1035 Emerson 1003, 1004, Linksys 1017 Proscan 1030
Amphion MediaWorks 2091 2082, 2087 Sherwood 2063 ABS 1017 1005 Lloyd’s 1005 Pulsar 1018
2037 Enterprise 2082 Liquid Video 2075 Shinsonic 2086 Adventura 1005 Expressvu 1029 LXI 1003 Quarter 1001
AMW 2037 ESA 2053, 2091 Liteon 2025, 2092 Sonic Blue 2087 Aiwa 1005 Fisher 1001 Magnavox 1004, 1018 Quartz 1001
Apex 2002, 2018, 2079, Fisher 2083 Magnavox 2067, 2076, Sony 2003, 2004, 2010, Alienware 1017 Fuji 1004 Magnin 1003 Quasar 1004
2080 Funai 2091 2091 2012, 2027, 2046, 2047, American High 1004 Funai 1005 Marantz 1000, 1001, Radio Shack 1003
Apple 2058 GE 2016, 2077, 2080 Memorex 2066 2048 Asha 1002 Garrard 1005 1004 Radio Shack/Realistic
Arrgo 2088 GFM 2043 Microsoft 2077 Sungale 2054 Audio Dynamics 1000 Gateway 1017 Marta 1003 1001, 1002, 1003, 1004,
Aspire 2073 Go Video 2087 Mintek 2038, 2080, 2086 Superscan 2067 Audiovox 1003 GE 1002, 1004 Matsushita 1004 1005
Astar 2052 Gradiente 2068 Mitsubishi 2020 Sylvania 2023, 2067, Bang & Olufsen 1032 GOI 1029 Media Center PC 1017 Radix 1003
Audiovox 2070 Greenhill 2080 Nesa 2080 2091 Beaumark 1002 Goldstar 1000, 1003 MEI 1004 Randex 1003
Axion 2040 Haier 2094 Next Base 2093 Symphonic 2023 Bell & Howell 1001 Gradiente 1005 Memorex 1001, 1002, RCA 1002, 1004, 1007,
Bang & Olufsen 2081 Harman/Kardon 2030, Nexxtech 2056 Teac 2070 Calix 1003 Harley Davidson 1005 1003, 1004, 1005, 1018, 1016, 1020, 1022, 1030,
Blaupunkt 2080 2084 Onkyo 2076 Technics 2068 Candle 1002, 1003 Harman/Kardon 1000 1019 1031
Blue Parade 2078 Hitachi 2011 Oppo 2041, 2057 Theta Digital 2078 Canon 1004 Headquarter 1001 MGN Technology 1002 Realistic 1001, 1002,
Boston 2059 Hiteker 2079 Oritron 2069, 2075 Toshiba 2001, 2006, Citizen 1002, 1003 Hewlett Packard 1017 Microsoft 1017 1003, 1004, 1005
Broksonic 2066 iLive 2062 Panasonic 2005, 2007, 2049, 2066, 2076 Colortyme 1000 HNS 1016 Mind 1017 ReplayTV 1026
California Audio Labs Ilo 2038 2017, 2032, 2033, 2050, Trutech 2000 Craig 1002, 1003 Howard Computers Mitsubishi 1010 Ricavision 1017
2068 Initial 2038, 2080 2068, 2076 Urban Concepts 2076 Curtis Mathes 1000, 1017 Motorola 1004 Runco 1018
CambridgeSoundWorks Insignia 2036, 2064, Philips 2045, 2076 US Logic 2086 1002, 1004 HP 1017 MTC 1002 Samsung 1002, 1016,
2065 2091 Proceed 2079 Venturer 2070 Cybernex 1002 HTS 1029 Multitech 1002, 1005 1022, 1024
CineVision 2087 Integra 2078 Proscan 2077 Xbox 2077 CyberPower 1017 Hughes Network NEC 1000, 1001 Sanky 1018
Coby 2029 iSymphony 2060 Qwestar 2069 Yamaha 2005, 2068 Daewoo 1005 Systems 1016, 1020, Nikko 1003 Sansui 1014, 1019
Curtis Mathes 2089 JBL 2084 RCA 2008, 2016, 2070, Zenith 2019, 2076, 2082, DBX 1000 1022, 1023, 1024 Niveus Media 1017 Sanyo 1001, 1002
CyberHome 2000, 2088 JVC 2013 2077, 2078, 2080 2087 Dell 1017 Humax 1016, 1020 Noblex 1002 Sears 1001, 1003, 1004
Cytron 2039 Kawasaki 2070 Regent 2074 DIRECTV 1016, 1020, Hush 1017 Northgate 1017 Sharp 1012
1022, 1023, 1024, 1027, iBUYPOWER 1017 Olympus 1004 Shogun 1002
1030, 1031 Instant Replay 1004 Optimus 1003 Singer 1004
BD Dish Network 1029 JC Penney 1000, 1001, Orion 1014, 1019 Sonic Blue 1026
If operations are not possible using the preset codes below, you may be able to conduct operations Dishpro 1029 1002, 1003, 1004 Panasonic 1004, 1008 Sony 1006, 1009, 1017,
with the preset codes for the DVD, DVR (BDR, HDR). Durabrand 1018 JCL 1004 Philco 1004 1021
Pioneer 2159, 2160 Kenwood 2044 Panasonic 2114, 2115, Sony 2120, 2121, 2122, Dynatech 1005 JVC 1000, 1001, 1020, Philips 1004, 1011, 1016, Stack 1017
Denon 2147, 2148, 2149 LG 2123, 2124 2116 2129 Echostar 1029 1029 1020, 1022, 1023, 1024, STS 1004
Hitachi 2144, 2145, 2146 Marantz 2139, 2140 Philips 2117 Toshiba 2125, 2099 Electrohome 1003 Kenwood 1000, 1001 1025 Sylvania 1004, 1005
JVC 2127, 2128, 2130, Mitsubishi 2137, 2138 Samsung 2119 Yamaha 2134, 2135, Electrophonic 1003 Kodak 1003, 1004 Philips Magnavox 1011 Symphonic 1005
2131, 2132, 2133 Onkyo 2126 Sharp 2141, 2142, 2143 2136 LG 1003 Pilot 1003 Systemax 1017

94 En
 Additional information 13

Tagar Systems 1017 Tivo 1016, 1020, 1021, UltimateTV 1031 Wards 1002, 1003, 1004,
Tandy 1001 1022, 1025 Unitech 1002 1005 Satellite Set Top Box (SAT/PVR Combination)
Tashiko 1003 TMK 1002 Vector Research 1000 Yamaha 1000, 1001 Pioneer 0126, 0128 Dish Network System Hughes Network Samsung 6114
Teac 1005 Toshiba 1015, 1017, Video Concepts 1000 Zenith 1013, 1018 Bell ExpressVu 6002, 6002, 6089 Systems 6113, 6114, Sonicview 6055, 6107
Technics 1004 1028 Videosonic 1002 ZT Group 1017 6003 Dishpro 6002, 6089 6115, 6116 Sony 6062
Teknika 1003, 1004, Totevision 1002, 1003 Viewsonic 1017 DirecTV 6070, 6110, Echostar 6002, 6089, JVC 6003 Star Choice 6032
1005 Touch 1017 Voodoo 1017 6062, 6113, 6060, 6059, 6003 Motorola 6032 Tivo 6113, 6114, 6115,
6114, 6115, 6116 Expressvu 6002 Philips 6113, 6114 6116
Proscan 6110
Satellite Set Top Box
Pioneer 0126, 6097, Echostar 6002, 6089, Next Level 6032 Smart 6051
6098, 6145 6036, 6005, 6003, 6004, nfusion 6015 Sonicview 6055, 6107 Cable Set Top Box
ADB 6035, 6001 6146 Nokia 6025, 6026, 6118, Sony 6062, 6063, 6030, Pioneer 6028, 6029, Director 6073 Myrio 6077, 6078 Shaw 6074
Akai 6102 Expressvu 6002, 6004 6119, 6121 6143 6095, 6099 Emerson 6122 Noos 6040 Starcom 6122
Alba 6005, 6013, 6011 Fujitsu 6133, 6134, 6135 Pace 6035, 6005, 6030, Star Choice 6032 ABC 6122 Fosgate 6072 Pace 6074, 6029, 6028, Stargate 6122
Allsat 6102 Fortec Star 6123, 6023 6031 Star Trak 6032 Accuphase 6122 General Instrument 6106, 6083 Suddenlink 6074, 6029
Alltech 6011 Fresat 6014 Panarex 6016 TechniSat 6033 Amino 6077, 6078 6073, 6072, 6122 Panasonic 6112, 6083 Supercable 6072
Amstrad 6033, 6030, Funai 6070 Panasonic 6008, 6009, Thomson 6110, 6111, Auna 6082 Homecast 6024 Paragon 6112 Time Warner 6074,
6044 GE 6111 6030, 6136, 6137, 6138 6014 BCC 6072 i3 Micro 6077 Penney 6112 6029, 6058
Anttron 6013 General Instrument Pansat 6016, 6022 Tivo 6113, 6114, 6115, Bell & Howell 6122 Insight 6074, 6073, 6029 Philips 6012 Tivo 6076
Asat 6102 6032 Philips 6002, 6113, 6038, 6116 Bright House 6074, 6029 Jebsee 6122 Pulsar 6112 Toshiba 6112
Austar 6000, 6045 GOI 6002, 6004 6054, 6060, 6059, 6102, Toshiba 6038, 6054, Cable One 6074, 6029 Jerrold 6073, 6072, 6122 Quasar 6112 United Cable 6072, 6122
BELL 6160 Grundig 6007, 6030 6103, 6030, 6114 6039, 6130 Cablevision 6074, 6029 Knology 6029 Regal 6072 US Electronics 6072
Bell ExpressVu 6002, Hirschmann 6033 Primestar 6032, 6147 TPS 6041 Charter 6074, 6029, 6058 Macab 6040 Rogers 6029 Videoway 6112
6003 Hisense 6020 Proscan 6110, 6111 Triasat 6033 Cisco 6029, 6028, 6083 Mediacom 6074, 6029 Runco 6112 Zenith 6112
British Sky Hitachi 6038, 6049, 6132 Proton 6020 Ultrasat 6021 Comcast 6074, 6029, Memorex 6112 Samsung 6095
Broadcasting 6030 Houston 6002 RadioShack 6002, 6111, US Digital 6020 1982 Motorola 6074, 6073, Scientific Atlanta 6029,
Canal 6105 HTS 6002, 6004 6032 USDTV 6020 Cox 6074, 6029 6072, 6029, 6122, 6094 6028, 6027, 6112
Chaparral 6034 Hughes Network Radix 6036 ViewSat 6048 Digeo 6029, 6058 MTS 6094 Sejin 6077
CNS 6001 Systems 6113, 6038, RCA 6002, 6110, 6111, Voom 6032
Coolsat 6021 6054, 6114, 6115, 6116 6113, 6109, 6061, 6114, Zehnder 6101
Crossdigital 6043 Hyundai 6016 6142, 6144, 6148 Zenith 6042, 6069, 6037, Cable Set Top Box (Cable/PVR Combination)
Digenius 6104 iLo 6020 SA 6124, 6126, 6158, 6125, 6127, 6129 Pioneer 0127, 6029 Comcast 6074, 6029, Mediacom 6074, 6029 Shaw 6074
Digiwave 6053 Innova 6059 6159 Amino 6078 6083, 6076 Motorola 6074, 6081 Suddenlink 6074, 6029
DirecTV 6070, 6110, Jerrold 6032, 6128, 6149, Saba 6014 Bright House 6074, 6029 Cox 6074, 6029 Myrio 6078 Supercable 6072
6111, 6062, 6063, 6113, 6150, 6151, 6152, 6153, Sagem 6041, 6120 Cable One 6074, 6029 Digeo 6081, 6058 Pace 6029 Time Warner 6074,
6008, 6038, 6054, 6069, 6154, 6155, 6156, 6157 Samsung 6070, 6113, Cablevision 6074, 6029 Homecast 6024 Panasonic 6083 6029, 6058
6060, 6059, 6043, 6018, JVC 6002, 6003, 6004 6091, 6043, 6017, 6114, Charter 6074, 6029, 6058 Insight 6074, 6029 Rogers 6029 Tivo 6076
6114, 6115, 6116, 6093 Kathrein 6096 6093 Cisco 6029, 6083 Knology 6029 Scientific Atlanta 6029
Dish Network System Lava 6053 Sanyo 6046
6002, 6089, 6003, 6004 LG 6047, 6018 Sat Cruiser 6015
Dishpro 6002, 6089, Marantz 6102 Schwaiger 6066
6004 McIntosh 6032 SEI 6139
DX Antenna 6140 Mitsubishi 6038 Siemens 6007, 6036
E Aichi 6141 Motorola 6032, 6042 SKY 6042, 6059, 6030,
NEC 6050, 6131 6031
Netsat 6059 SM Electronic 6011

En 95
13 Additional information

CD (SACD)
Pioneer 5065, 5066 Kenwood 5020, 5021, Philips 5022, 5032, 5044 TEAC 5015, 5016, 5034,
AKAI 5043 5031 RCA 5013, 5029 5035, 5037
Asuka 5045 Luxman 5049 Roadstar 5052 Technics 5041
Denon 5019 Marantz 5033 Sharp 5051 Victor 5014
Fisher 5048 Onkyo 5017, 5018, 5030, Sony 5012, 5023, 5026, Yamaha 5024, 5025,
Goldstar 5040 5050 5027, 5028, 5039 5038, 5046, 5047
Hitachi 5042 Panasonic 5036

CD-R
Pioneer 5067
Philips 5054
Yamaha 5055

Cassete Deck
Pioneer 5058, 5059, 5070

Digital Tape
Pioneer 5069

MD
Pioneer 5068

96 En
Additional information 13

En 97
13 Additional information

98 En
 PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.

LIMITED WARRANTY
WARRANTY VALID ONLY IN COUNTRY OF PRODUCT PURCHASE
WARRANTY
Pioneer Electronics (USA) Inc. (PUSA), and Pioneer Electronics Of Canada, Inc. (POC), warrant that products distributed by PUSA in the U.S.A., and by POC in Canada that fail to function
properly under normal use due to a manufacturing defect when installed and operated according to the owner’s manual enclosed with the unit will be repaired or replaced with a unit of comparable
value, at the option of PUSA or POC, without charge to you for parts or actual repair work. Parts supplied under this warranty may be new or rebuilt at the option of PUSA or POC.
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY APPLIES TO THE ORIGINAL OR ANY SUBSEQUENT OWNER OF THIS PIONEER PRODUCT DURING THE WARRANTY PERIOD PROVIDED THE
PRODUCT WAS PURCHASED FROM AN AUTHORIZED PIONEER DISTRIBUTOR/DEALER IN THE U.S.A. OR CANADA. YOU WILL BE REQUIRED TO PROVIDE A SALES
RECEIPT OR OTHER VALID PROOF OF PURCHASE SHOWING THE DATE OF ORIGINAL PURCHASE OR, IF RENTED, YOUR RENTAL CONTRACT SHOWING THE PLACE
AND DATE OF FIRST RENTAL. IN THE EVENT SERVICE IS REQUIRED, THE PRODUCT MUST BE DELIVERED WITHIN THE WARRANTY PERIOD, TRANSPORTATION PREPAID,
ONLY FROM WITHIN THE COUNTRY OF PURCHASE AS EXPLAINED IN THIS DOCUMENT. YOU WILL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF THE
PRODUCT. PUSA OR POC, AS APPROPRIATE, WILL PAY TO RETURN THE REPAIRED OR REPLACEMENT PRODUCT TO YOU WITHIN THE COUNTRY OF PURCHASE.
Parts Labor
PRODUCT WARRANTY PERIOD
Home Audio and Video ......................................................................................................................................................... 1 Year 1 Year
Microphones, Headphones, Phono Cartridges and Styluses ................................................................................................ 90 Days 90 Days
Shorter limited warranty periods apply to some models. Please refer to the limited warranty document enclosed with the product for a definitive statement of the warranty period.
The warranty period for retail customers who rent the product commences upon the date product is first put into use (a) during the rental period or (b) retail sale, whichever occurs first.
WHAT IS NOT COVERED
IF THIS PRODUCT WAS PURCHASED FROM AN UNAUTHORIZED DISTRIBUTOR, THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTY
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND THIS PRODUCT IS SOLD STRICTLY “AS IS” AND “WITH ALL FAULTS".
PIONEER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL AND/OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES.
PIONEER DOES NOT WARRANT ANY PRODUCT LISTED ABOVE WHEN IT IS USED IN A TRADE OR BUSINESS OR IN ANY INDUSTRIAL OR COMMERCIAL APPLICATION.
THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT APPLY IF THE PRODUCT HAS BEEN SUBJECTED TO POWER IN EXCESS OF ITS PUBLISHED POWER RATING.
THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER TELEVISION OR DISPLAY SCREENS DAMAGED BY STATIC, NON-MOVING, IMAGES APPLIED FOR LENGTHY PERIODS (BURN-IN).
THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER THE CABINET OR ANY APPEARANCE ITEM, USER ATTACHED ANTENNA, ANY DAMAGE TO RECORDS OR RECORDING TAPES OR DISCS, ANY
DAMAGE TO THE PRODUCT RESULTING FROM ALTERATIONS, MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED IN WRITING BY PIONEER, ACCIDENT, MISUSE OR ABUSE, DAMAGE DUE TO
LIGHTNINGORTOPOWERSURGES,SUBSEQUENTDAMAGEFROMLEAKING,DAMAGEFROMINOPERATIVEBATTERIES,ORTHEUSEOFBATTERIESNOTCONFORMINGTOTHOSE
SPECIFIED IN THE OWNER’S MANUAL.
THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER THE COST OF PARTS OR LABOR WHICH WOULD BE OTHERWISE PROVIDED WITHOUT CHARGE UNDER THIS WARRANTY OBTAINED FROM
ANYSOURCEOTHERTHANAPIONEERAUTHORIZEDSERVICECOMPANYOROTHERDESIGNATEDLOCATION. THISWARRANTYDOESNOTCOVERDEFECTSORDAMAGECAUSED
BY THE USE OF UNAUTHORIZED PARTS OR LABOR OR FROM IMPROPER MAINTENANCE.
ALTERED, DEFACED, OR REMOVED SERIAL NUMBERS VOID THIS ENTIRE WARRANTY
NO OTHER WARRANTIES
IN THE U.S.A. - PIONEER LIMITS ITS OBLIGATIONS UNDER ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TO A PERIOD NOT TO EXCEED THE WARRANTY PERIOD. NO WARRANTIES SHALL APPLY AFTER THE
WARRANTY PERIOD. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS AND SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSIONS
OR LIMITATIONS OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. THIS WARRANTY GIVES
YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS AND YOU MAY HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH MAY VARY FROM STATE TO STATE.
IN CANADA - EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED HEREIN, THERE ARE NO REPRESENTATIONS, WARRANTIES, OBLIGATIONS OR CONDITIONS, IMPLIED, STATUTORY
OR OTHERWISE, APPLICABLE TO THIS PRODUCT.

TO OBTAIN SERVICE
PUSA and POC have appointed a number of Authorized Service Companies throughout the U.S.A. and Canada should your product require service. To receive warranty service
you need to present your sales receipt or, if rented, your rental contract showing place and date of original owner’s transaction. If shipping the unit you will need to package
it carefully and send it, transportation prepaid by a traceable, insured method, to an Authorized Service Company. Package the product using adequate padding material to
prevent damage in transit. The original container is ideal for this purpose. Include your name, address and telephone number where you can be reached during business hours.
On all complaints and concerns in the U.S.A. call Customer Support at 1-800-421-1404, or, in Canada, call Customer Satisfaction at 1-877-283-5901.

IN THE U.S.A. IN CANADA

For hook-up and operation of your unit or to locate an For additional information on this warranty,
Authorized Service Company, please call or write: please call or write:
CUSTOMER SATISFACTION GROUP
PIONEER ELECTRONICS SERVICE, INC. PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.
P.O. BOX 1760 300 ALLSTATE PARKWAY
LONG BEACH, CALIFORNIA 90801 MARKHAM, ON L3R 0P2
1-800-421-1404 (905) 479-4411
1-877-283-5901
http://www.pioneerelectronics.com http://www.pioneerelectronics.ca

DISPUTE RESOLUTION
IN THE U.S.A. - Following our response to any initial request to Customer Support, should a dispute arise between you and Pioneer, Pioneer makes available its Complaint
Resolution Program to resolve the dispute. The Complaint Resolution Program is available to you without charge. You are required to use the Complaint Resolution Program
before you exercise any rights under, or seek any remedies, created by Title I of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty-Federal Trade Commission Improvement Act, 15 U.S.C. 2301 et seq.
To use the Complaint Resolution Program call 1-800-421-1404 and explain to the customer service representative the problem you are experiencing, steps you have taken
to have the product repaired during the warranty period and the name of the authorized Distributor/Dealer from whom the Pioneer product was purchased. After the complaint
has been explained to the representative, a resolution number will be issued. Within 40 days of receiving your complaint, Pioneer will investigate the dispute and will either:
(1) respond to your complaint in writing informing you what action Pioneer will take, and in what time period, to resolve the dispute; or (2) respond to your complaint in writing
informing you why it will not take any action.
IN CANADA - Call the Customer Satisfaction Manager at (905) 946-7446 to discuss your complaint and to obtain a prompt resolution.

RECORD THE PLACE AND DATE OF PURCHASE FOR FUTURE REFERENCE

Model No. ____________________________________________ Serial No. _________________________________________ Purchase Date _______________________

Purchased From _______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

KEEP THIS INFORMATION AND YOUR SALES RECEIPT IN A SAFE PLACE

En
Additional information

99
13
 To register your product, find the nearest authorized service location, to
purchase replacement parts, operating instructions, or accessories,
please go to one of following URLs :

Pour enregistrer votre produit, trouver le service après-vente agréé le plus

proche et pour acheter des pièces de rechange, des modes d’emploi ou
des accessoires, reportez-vous aux URL suivantes :

In the USA/Aux Etats-Unis

http://www.pioneerelectronics.com
In Canada/Aux Canada
http://www.pioneerelectronics.ca
S018_B1_EnFr

© 2011 PIONEER CORPORATION.

All rights reserved.

PIONEER CORPORATION
1-1, Shin-ogura, Saiwai-ku, Kawasaki-shi, Kanagawa 212-0031, Japan
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.
P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.
340 Ferrier Street, Unit 2, Markham, Ontario L3R 2Z5, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411
PIONEER EUROPE NV
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
5 Arco Lane, Heatherton, Victoria, 3202, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico, D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270
K002_B3_En

Printed in <ARB7457-A>